Notice Inviting Tender (nit) Government Of

Transcript

NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH INFRASTRUCTURE CORPORATION OF ANDHRA PRADESH LTD. (INCAP) 3rd Floor, FDC Complex, AC Guards, Hyderabad – 500028 Email: [email protected] Ph: 040-23321771 Andhra Pradesh Fiber Grid – Phase I “e”NIT.No .INCAP(AP)/P/Optical Fiber Grid / 62/2014 Dated: 07-07-2015 NAME OF WORK : NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE CONTRACTOR WHO DOWNLOADED THE BID DOCUMENTS : 1 Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ INDEX S. NO. DETAILS Page No. 1 NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) Inclusive of Eligibility Criteria and Scope of Work 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2 A) General 28 B) Tender Document 38 C) Preparation of Tenders 39 D) Submission of Tenders 42 E) Tender Opening and Evaluation 44 F) Award of Contract 48 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 3 4 A) General 50 B) Time for completion 54 C) Inspection, Testing & Installation 58 D) Cost Control 60 E) Completing the Contract 64 F) Special Conditions 66 73 Technical Bid Price Bid 5 i) Schedule - A 74 ii) Schedule - B 79 6 Technical documents to be submitted by the bidder in support of BoQ and Specifications 80 7 Checklist of key documents to be submitted 81 Technical Specifications & requisite features / characterstics of the components 82 8 Annexures I. 9 Network Route Map & Location of PoPs 178 Forms of Tender 179 III. Guidelines for installation of Aerial ADSS Optical Fiber Cable 197 IV. Quality Assurance 200 II. 2 V. VI. VII. VIII. IX. Installation Methodology 201 Acceptance Test Procedure 204 Verification & Measurement of works done 212 Project Timelines, SLA & Penalties 219 Roles and responsibilities of Stakeholders 224 3 DEFINITIONS 1. INCAP: Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh Limited, a Govt. of A.P. Undertaking 2. Contractor (OR) Implementation Agency: The successful bidder with whom agreement would be entered into for executing the work. 3. The Authority (OR) Client (OR) Department: Vice Chairman & Managing Director, INCAP or any other official / agency authorized by VC & MD, INCAP or any authorized Government department / agency / Govt. Corporation. The Authority will enter into agreement with the contractor i.e., the successful bidder for executing the works and will administer the contract. 4. Project Monitoring Agency / Project Management Agency (PMA): The agency authorized by the Authority to test and monitor the quantities / quality of the works and report on the progress and measure / certify the works etc. 5. Tender Inviting Officer: Vice Chairman & Managing Director, INCAP, Hyderabad 6. NOC: Network Operations Center 7. PoP: Point of Presence 4 GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH INFRASTRUCTURE CORPORATION OF ANDHRA PRADESH LTD. (INCAP) Andhra Pradesh Fiber Grid – Phase I *** 1. NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT) NOTICE No. INCAP (AP)/P/Optic Fiber Grid/62/2014, Dated: 07.07.2015 : Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh 1. Name of the work 2. Estimated Contract Value (ECV) of work : put to tender INR 3,29,00,00,000/- (INR 329 Crores) 3. Period of completion of work : 4. Form of contract : 9 months Implementation + 12 months Operations & Maintenance Lumpsum 5. Cost of Bid Document : INR 25000/- + VAT INR 3500/- 6. E.M.D. to be paid in the form of Demand : Draft in favor of VC & MD INCAP, Hyderabad or unconditional & irrevocable Bank Guarantee in favour of VC & MD, INCAP, Hyderabad obtained from Nationalized Bank or any Scheduled commercial bank, valid for a minimum period of 120 days from the last date for submission of bids. INR 3,29,00,000/- 7. Bid Validity 120 days from the last date of submission of bids 8. a) Period for downloading of tender : 09-07-2015 at 15.00 Hrs. to documents 30-07-2015 up to 15:00 Hrs. : b) Pre-bid meeting : At 15:00 Hrs on 17-07-2015 at INCAP Office, Hyderabad c) Last date of Submission of Bid : At 15:00 Hrs on 31-07-2015 d) Date of opening of Technical Bid : At 16:00 Hrs on 31-07-2015 e) Date of opening of Price Bid : At 16:00 Hrs on 05-08-2015 5 9. Procedure for Bid Submission: The bidder shall submit his response through Bid submission to the tender on eProcurement platform at www.eprocurement.gov.in by following the procedure given below: The bidder would be required to register on the e-procurement market place www.eprocurement.gov.in or https://tender.eprocurement.gov.in and submit their bids online. Offline bids shall not be entertained by the Tender Inviting Authority for the tenders published in eprocurement platform. The bidders shall submit their eligibility and qualification details, Technical bid, Financial bid etc., in the online standard formats displayed in eProcurement web site. The bidders shall upload the scanned copies of all the relevant certificates, documents etc., in support of their eligibility criteria/technical bids and other certificates/documents with clear readability, in the eProcurement web site. The bidder shall sign on the statements, documents, certificates, uploaded by the agency, owning responsibility for their correctness/authenticity. a) Registration with eProcurement platform: For registration and online bid submission bidders may contact HELP DESK on www.eprocurement.gov.in or https://tender.eprocurement.gov.in b) Digital Certificate authentication: The bidder shall authenticate the bid with his Digital Certificate for submitting the bid electronically on eProcurement platform and the bids not authenticated by digital certificate of the bidder will not be accepted on the eProcurement platform. For obtaining Digital Signature Certificate, you may please contact: Andhra Pradesh Technology Services Limited BRKR Bhavan, B-Block Tankbund Road , Hyderabad-500022 Phone: +91-40-23220305 Fax: +91-40-23228057 (OR) You may please contact Registration Authorities of any Certifying Authorities in India. The list of CAs are available by clicking the link https://tender.eprocurement.gov.in/DigitalCertificate/signature.html c) Hard copies: i) Vide ref. G.O.Ms.No.174, I&CAD dept dated:1-9-2008, submission of original hard copies of the uploaded scanned copies of DD/BG towards EMD by participating bidders to the tender inviting authority before the opening of the price bid is dispensed forthwith. ii) All the bidders shall invariably upload the scanned copies of DD/BG in eProcurement system and this will be the primary requirement to consider the bid responsive. iii) The department shall carry out the technical evaluation solely based on the uploaded certificates/documents, DD/BG towards EMD in the eProcurement system and open the price bids of the responsive bidders. iv) The department will notify the successful bidder for submission of original hardcopies of all the uploaded documents and DD/BG towards EMD prior to entering into agreement. v) The successful bidder shall invariably furnish the original DD/BG towards EMD, Certificates/Documents of the uploaded scanned copies to the Tender Inviting Authority before entering into agreement, either personally or through courier or post and the receipt of the same within the stipulated date shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder. The department will not take any responsibility for any delay in receipt/non-receipt of original DD/BG towards EMD, Certificates/Documents from the successful bidder before the stipulated time. 6 On receipt of documents, the department shall ensure the genuinity of the DD/BG towards EMD and all other certificates/documents uploaded by the bidder in eProcurement system in support of the qualification criteria before concluding the agreement. d) Deactivation of Bidders (Ref: The GO. Ms. No. 174 -I&CAD dated: 1-9-2008): If any successful bidder fails to submit the original hard copies of uploaded certificates/documents, DD/BG towards EMD within stipulated time or if any variation is noticed between the uploaded documents and the hardcopies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be suspended from participating in the tenders on eProcurement platform for a period of 3 years. The eProcurement system would deactivate the user ID of such defaulting bidder based on the trigger/recommendation by the Tender Inviting Authority in the system. Besides this, the department shall invoke all processes of law including criminal prosecution of such defaulting bidder as an act of extreme deterrence to avoid delays in the tender process for execution of the development schemes taken up by the government. Other conditions as per tender document are applicable. The bidder is requested to get a confirmed acknowledgement from the Tender Inviting Authority a proof of Hardcopies submission to avoid any discrepancy. e) Payment of Transaction Fee: It is mandatory for all the participant bidders from 1st January 2006 to electronically pay a prescribed nonrefundable Transaction fee to M/s.APTS, the service provider through "Payment Gateway Service on EProcurement platform". The Electronic Payment Gateway accepts all Master and Visa Credit Cards issued by any bank and Direct Debit facility/Net Banking of ICICI Bank, HDFC, Axis Bank to facilitate the transaction. This is in compliance as per G.O.Ms. 13 dated 07.05.2006. f) Corpus Fund: As per GO MS No.4, user departments shall collect 0.04% of ECV (estimated contract value) with a cap of Rs.10,000 (Rupees ten thousand only) for all works with ECV upto Rs.50 Crores, and Rs.25,000/- (Rupees twenty five thousand only) for works with ECV above Rs.50 Crores, from successful bidders on eProcurement platform before entering into agreement / issue of purchase orders, towards eprocurement fund in favour of Managing Director, APTS. There shall not be any charge towards eProcurement fund in case of works, goods and services with ECV less than and upto Rs. 10 lakhs g) Tender Document: The bidder is requested to download the tender document and read all the terms and conditions mentioned in the tender Document and seek clarification if any from the Tender Inviting Authority. Any offline bid submission clause in the tender document could be neglected. The bidder has to keep track of any changes by viewing the Addendum/Corrigenda issued by the Tender Inviting Authority from time-to-time in the e-Procurement platform. The Department calling for tenders shall not be responsible for any claims/issues arising out of this. h) Bid Submission Acknowledgement: The bidder shall complete all the processes and steps required for Bid submission. The system will generate an acknowledgement with a unique bid submission number after completing all the prescribed steps and processes by the bidder. Users may also note that the bids for which an acknowledgement is not generated by the e-procurement system are treated as invalid or not saved in the system. Such invalid bids are not made available to the Tender Inviting Authority for processing the bids. The Government of AP is not responsible for incomplete bid submission by users. 7 10. The bidders may contact the CGM Technical, INCAP, Hyderabad for any further information / clarifications on e-procurement. 11. The bidders need to register on the electronic procurement market place of Government of Andhra Pradesh i.e., www.eprocurement.gov.in. On registration in the e-procurement market place they will be provided with a user ID and password by the system using which they can submit their bids on line. 12. While registering on the e-procurement market place, bidders need to scan and upload the required documents as per the tender requirements on to their profile.The e-procurement market place provides an online selfservice registration facility to such of the Contractors who are already registered with respective participating departments for supply of specified goods and services. 13. All the bidders shall invariably upload the scanned copies of DD/BG in e-Procurement system and this will be the primary requirement to consider the bid as responsive. The Department shall carry out the Technical bid evaluation solely based on the uploaded certificates/documents, DD/BG towards EMD in the e-procurement system and open the price bids of the eligible and responsive bidders. The Department will notify the successful bidder for submission of original hard copies of all uploaded documents and DD/BG towards EMD prior to entering into agreement. 14. The bidders shall furnish a declaration in online stating that the soft copies uploaded by them are genuine. Any incorrectness/deviation noticed will be viewed seriously and apart from cancelling the work duly forfeiting the EMD, criminal action will be initiated including suspension of business. 8 15.Eligibility Criteria: The Applicants have to fulfill all the eligibility criteria stipulated as below. The Price bid of only those applicants who satisfy all the eligibility conditions and who score the minimum stipulated marks or more in the evaluation of technical bid will be considered. Important Note: To avoid conflict of interest, Telecom Service providers, Internet Service providers, organisations engaged in providing cable TV services and their subsidiaries will not be eligible to bid for this project either as prime bidder or as consortium member S. No A Documentary Proof to be submitted Criterion Criterion to be met by General Eligibility In case of Single Bidder: Copy of valid Certificate of incorporation issued by competent authority in India The bidder should be either a In case of Consortium: company (single legal entity) or a consortium of companies. Copy of valid certificate of incorporation issued by competent The company shall be an authority in India by each of the Bidder in case of single entity incorporated entity under the consortium members bidding Companies Act 1956 / 2013. 1 2 Valid agreement on INR 100/- Stamp In case of consortium, the applicant Paper concluded among all the consortium shall submit a valid members of the consortium duly agreement among the members. stamped and signed by the Authorized Signatories of the The maximum number of members companies under consortium dated allowed in a consortium is four (4) prior to the submission of bid. including Lead member. All the consortium members shall be jointly The agreement shall clearly specify & severally liable. the details of Lead member and other consortium members and outline the financial strengths, technical strengths and the role and responsibility of each of the members of the consortium. (OR) All the Consortium members individually and jointly, in case the bidder is a consortium Copy of a valid Certificate of incorporation issued by competent Bidder, in case of single entity authority in India (for each of the bidding. The bidder should be registered members in case of consortium) under the Companies Act, 1956 / OR 2013 and should have been in Copy of audited annual accounts for operational existence with relevant the last 3 financial years i.e., FY All the members of the experience for at least the last three 2012-13, FY 2013-14 & FY 2014-15 Consortium individually, in (3) financial years case the bidder is a Note: In case the final audited annual consortium accounts reports are not available for FY 2014-15, the provisional 9 financial statements of FY 2014-15 duly certified by the statutory auditor of the company shall be submitted. Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 3 Certified copy of valid service tax OR The bidder should have valid service and VAT registration certificates tax and VAT registration in India issued by competent authority in All the members of the India Consortium individually, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 4 The bidder should not have been OR blacklisted by any Govt. department Self-declaration by the bidder duly or any PSU in India as on the date of signed by the authorized signatory All the members of the bid submission Consortium individually, in case the bidder is a consortium B Financial Capacity Eligibility 5 Average annual turnover of the bidder for the last three financial years should be at least INR 350 crores from activities related to provision of IT Systems Integration services / IT services / Network services / Telecom services / Fiber cable laying services / Certificate from statutory auditor of NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV the Bidder mentioning the turnover Headend Services in India from the activities related to provision of IT Systems Integration In case the bidder is a consortium, services / IT services / Network the sum of the average annual services / Telecom services / Fiber turnover of all the consortium cable laying services / members for the last three financial NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV years from activities related to Headend Services in India in the last provision of IT Systems Integration three financial years. services / IT services / Network services / Telecom services / Fiber If the final audited accounts for FY cable laying services / 2014-15 are not available, then the NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV data based on the provisional Headend Services in India shall be accounts certified by the statutory at least INR 350 crores and; auditor of the company will be considered. The average annual turnover of the lead member for the last three financial years from activities related to provision of IT Systems Integration services / IT services / Network services / Telecom services / Fiber cable laying services / 10 Bidder, in case of single entity bidding OR The members of the consortium individually and jointly with the provision that the average annual turnover of the lead member for the last three years from the activities mentioned shall be at least INR 100 crores while that of the other members individually shall not be less than INR 50 crores. NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV Headend Services in India shall be at least INR 100 crores. Other consortium members’ annual average turnover from the relevant activities shall not be less than INR 50 Crores individually in the last three financial years. Bidder, in case of single entity bidding The bidder should have positive networth of at least INR 100 crores as on 31st March, 2015. 6 C In case the bidder is a consortium, the combined networth of all the entities shall be at least INR 100 crores as on 31st March, 2015. The networth of the lead member of the consortium shall be at least INR 50 crores. OR The members of the consortium jointly / Certificate from Statutory Auditor of individually with the the Company stating the networth of provision that the combined the Bidder as on 31st March, 2015. networth of all the members shall be INR 100 crores as on 31st March, 2015. The networth of the lead member of the consortium shall be at least INR 50 crores. Technical Capacity Eligibility Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 7 The bidder should have the experience of laying / pulling and installing optical fiber cable (OFC) for a length of at least 1500 Kms in India after 1st April, 2005 Certified copy of the relevant work OR order(s) and certificate(s) with details from the client(s) stating that the The members of the work(s) has been completed consortium jointly on cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 8 The bidder should have the experience of setting up and maintaining atleast one Network Operating Centre services with atleast 50 clients on WAN in India after 1st April, 2005 9 The bidder should have the experience in implementing Operating Support System & Business Support System (OSS / BSS) in communications / internet service sectors in India serving a subscriber base of atleast 50,000 in India after 1st April, 2005 Certified copy of the relevant work OR order(s) and certificate(s) with details from the client(s) stating that the The members of the work(s) has been completed consortium jointly on cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding Certified copy of the relevant work OR order(s) and certificate(s) with details from the client(s) stating that the The members of the work(s) has been completed consortium jointly on cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium 11 Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 10 The bidder should have the experience in setting up and maintaining Wide Area Network / Points of Presence and its related electronics equipment in at least 50 different locations in India after 1st April, 2005 OR Certified copy of the relevant work order(s) and certificate(s) with details The members of the from the client(s) stating that the consortium jointly on work(s) has been completed cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 11 The bidder should have the experience of setting up and managing operations of atleast one Cable TV Headend of minimum 200 channels in India after 1st April, 2005 OR Certified copy of the relevant work order(s) and certificate(s)with details The members of the from the client(s) stating that the consortium jointly on work(s) has been completed cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium Note: 1) In case the bidder is a consortium, all correspondence related to this project shall be done with / through the lead member. 2) No correspondence shall be allowed from the bidder after the opening of the bid documents. 12 Scope of the Work Summary:  Setting up a state-wide high speed, optical fiber infrastructure leveraging the existing assets of the electricity transmission/distribution companies such as electric poles/substation etc.  Establishing a scalable infrastructure and network with a business model of Infrastructure as a service (IAAS) and Platform as a service (PAAS) on a non-discriminatory basis to ISPs, TSPs, MSOs and content providers etc with their services being extended to last mile user through Points of Presence (PoPs) at around 2449 places, mainly at substations and further utilizing the existing LCO network wherever available.  Operating and maintaining the entire network infrastructure under the guidance / control of the Authority for a period of 1 year from the date of operation and acceptance after completion of all the works. (The route map and network design / architecture will be provided by the Authority and the same have been included in this tender document)  The contractor need to propose a solution that meets the objectives and SLAs of the Project. Contractor will be responsible to meet the service levels as mentioned in the tender document. Contractor is also allowed to improvise the architecture and other components of the solution so that the project meets its objectives. Architecture The Network Route Maps – for the entire state and also each of the 13 districts and the proposed locations of the PoPs have been furnished in this tender document under Annexure I. 1.1 High Level Network Topology Considerations 1.1.1 Aggregation Network Layer 1.1.1.1 Dist. HQ to Mandals Backbone 1.1.1.2 Ring Architecture with at least 2Gbps per Mandal 1.1.1.3 Inter-Dist. 100G DWDM Network to serve aggregated capacity as well as come over distance limitations, expandable to 200gbps. 1.1.2 Total 13 Dists - To be covered with the NOC establishment at Visakhapatnam and PoPs at around 2449 locations. 1.1.3 Total PoPs NOC District PoPs Zonal PoPs Mandal PoPs Substation PoPs Total 1 10 49 605 1784 2449 General Network Design Principles: 13 a) The Overall NETWORK architecture shall be designed such that the latency (from both SHQ to GPON and any GPON to any GPON) is less than 4 ms for any GPON pair or any GPON to SHQ plus transmission latency of 5ms/1000 km which shall be computed using the shortest GIS path on the network for the given pair of nodes. b) The Overall NETWORK architecture shall be designed such that the convergence time for the Network shall be less than 100 ms. NOC Architecture: International Xchange - National Xchange Caching servers BGP Load balancing Internet Routers - Firewall cum IPS Support Servers Support Server Pool (Antivirus, NNM, DNS,BRAS,OSS/BS , HelpDesk, Log Correlator, etc) Core Switches Firewall Data Center Content servers WDM_2 WDM_1 District District WDM District Ring WDM District Ring District District District District District District 1.2 Network Design Considerations 1.2.1 DWDM ROADM 1.2.1.1 100G Point to Point from every Dist. to NoC. 1.2.1.2 80g shared Distirct to Zonal Nodes. 1.2.2 OLA (Optical Amplifier) sites need to be identified and created from Power, Space perspective. 1.2.3 0.3dB/Km loss assumed with distances based on Google Maps 14 1.2.4 IPoDWDM used for 10GE reducing electronics footprint 1.2.5 Multi degree ROADM based solution with 100G SD-FEC transponders for better performance 1.2.6 Design simulation is with 40Ch system and OLA sites can be minimized by reducing the number of channels in the design 1.3 Inter-District DWDM Design Topology View 1.4 Inter-District Topology and Design 15 • Key Benefits of the Architecture 100G ROADM based architecture providing flexibility of creating partial/full mesh in the inter-District layer over physical ring topology for additional reliability and traffic routing • Protection at IP/MPLS layer • IP & Optical convergence with optimization of network resources 1.5 One District Topology & Design 16 Key Benefits of the Architecture • • High Reliability • Zonal Node Rings – 100 G capacity protected • Mandal Rings Single Homed or can also be Dual Homed for added reliability depending upon the fiber topology between Zonal Node and Mandals • Modular Chassis based District & Mandal Nodes for added reliability with full redundancy Services Oriented Architecture • • Both L2 & L3 VPNs, IP Multicast VPNs/Routing along with multipoint services Quality of Experience • H-QoS capabilities based on High number of Queues per GE/10GE/100GE port and not limiting to ONLY 8 queues per port only • 20Gbps per Zonal Node over Ring Topology • 100G DWDM ROADM based Inter-Distt. P2P over Ring • For added reach and capacity 17 1.6 Expanded view of all POP locations 1.7 Expanded view of Remote locations 18 Mandal Hub PoP Expanded View Mandal PoP Expanded 4Channel DWDM 4x10GE DWDM 10GE 10GE Ring to Mandal Hub With 40 Km SFP 10GE IP/MPLS Node with 8 x 10GE & 8 x 1 GE interfaces nx1GE interfaces for Point of Interconnect (POI) 10GE 10GE Rings to Mandal with 40 Km SFP 10GE IP/MP 2 x 10 GE 1/10GE interfaces for Point of Interconnect or to OLT 1.8 Summary 1.8.1 Services Oriented Architecture for IP Broadband Applications 1.8.1.1 L2, L3 VPNs, P2P, P2MP and MP2MP VPNs support, IP Multicast VPNs support for Video 1.8.1.2 Any Service, Any Connectivity support 1.8.1.3 Per Customer Per Service QoS support 1.8.1.4 Traffic Engineering 1.8.1.5 IPv6 Ready 1.8.1.6 SDN, NFv Ready 1.8.1.7 DWDM Core Scalable to Terabits of Capacity 1.8.2 Distt. Level Chassis based IP/MPLS Node (1+1 Nodes) 1.8.2.1 Min. 2x100GE,24x10GE and 20x1GE per node 1.8.2.2 H-QoS support with high number of hardware queues for per customer per service QoS (beyond 8 queues per port) 1.8.3 Zonal Node Level Chassis based IP/MPLS node 1.8.3.1 Min. 8x10GE, 8xGE ports 1.8.3.2 H-QoS support with high number of hardware queues for per customer per service QoS (beyond 8 queues per port) 1.8.4 Mandal Level Chassis based IP/MPLS node configuration 1.8.4.1 Min. 2x10GE, 12xGE ports 19 1.8.4.2 H-QoS support with high number of hardware queues for per customer per service QoS (beyond 8 queues per port) 1.8.5 Realistic Capacity Planning model required to ascertain right capacities day 1 and expandability in future A. Network Implementation 1.1 Route Survey & Network Design Validation The Contractor shall validate the route map & network design supplied by the Govt. authority and submit compliance / deviation summary of the implementation sites, in due agreement with INCAP / IT, E&C Department or any designated agency by the IT, E&C Department. Note: All route maps are subject to minor corrections due to local variations. As part of the Route Survey and Network Design Validation activity, the Contractor should validate and submit the final route maps and network design. 1.2 Fiber Implementation: a) Supply, delivery to site, unloading, storing and handling of 24 Fiber ADSS along with fittings and associated items as required b) Supply, delivery to site, unloading, storing and handling of outdoor type, pole mountable, vandalism proof, Fiber Optic Distribution Panel (FODP) along with associated items as required. c) All fittings, accessories and associated works for the proper and safe installation of ADSS on electrical assets such as poles. d) Stringing / laying, jointing, live line installation, testing and commissioning of All Dielectric Self Supporting (ADSS) optical fiber and its accessories. e) Training of Engineers / linesmen, both in supplier’s premises and at site, in the installation, operation and maintenance of the optical fiber cables. f) The estimated fiber optic cable length requirements are indicated in the BoQ and reflected in the Price Schedule. Note: The Contractor shall be paid for the actual quantity supplied and installed at site. The measurement for quantity to be paid will be based on horizontal route length of the line and the price quoted by the Bidder shall accordingly consider sag, unequal support heights, wastage, splicing, looping etc. g) The color-code for 24 core ADSS OFC cable shall be as follows: i) The core backbone OFC shall be identified by using Black color coatings ii) All OFC cables shall be embossed with name as directed by the competent authority. h) The existing OPGW aerial optical fiber cable laid on 440KV / 220KV transmission lines laid by APTRANSCO also will be used to connect to the State / District rings on a long haul to an extent of around 900 Kms wherever necessary as per field conditions. The details / location of such OPGW cable will be provided by the Authority during the execution of the works. Wherever required, optical line amplifiers shall be installed on the same cable at the appropriate distances considering the line losses. 1.3 Core Backbone – Mesh Topology a) The core backbone mesh topology shall be constructed using over-head 24 Core Optical Fiber Cables (ADSS). b) The Core shall utilize a 1300 Gigabit IPMPLS Network. c) The core architecture shall be formed in full mesh topology with three (3) fibers cut redundancy. d) 2 cores in each tube shall be redundant for future scalability and maintenance activity. e) The maximum fiber distance between two POPs / Optical line Amplifier , as measured by optical time domain meter (OTDR) shall not exceed 70 KMs. f) The core switches shall be installed at District POP locations, shall maintain a switching backplane of 1.3 Tbps. 20 g) Loop of 10 meters of OFC shall be left on pole in every 1 Km distance. h) There shall not be more than 35 Splice Joint closures installed between two (2) POP’s / optical amplifiers, during hand over of Network to client. i) All the 24 cores shall be spliced &Joined in the Core Backbone ring. j) A Splice Joint Closure shall be installed on the Poles k) The color code shall be uniformly followed across the Core ring, zonal aggregation ring & mandal ring l) As per network design & route map given in this document. 1.4 Zonal Aggregation Backbone – Ring Topology a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) The Aggregation rings shall be constructed using 24 Core Optical Fiber Cables (ADSS). The Aggregation ring shall utilize a 80 Gigabit IPMPLS technology. The Aggregation architecture shall be formed using ring topology. 2 of the cores in each tube shall be redundant for future scalability and maintenance activity and these cores Zonal Aggregation Backbone ring and the same shall not be used for any other purpose apart from the stated. The maximum fiber length for aggregation ring, as measured by optical time domain meter (OTDR) shall not exceed 70 KMs. A loop of 10 meters of OFC shall be left on pole in every 1 Km distance. There shall not be more than 35 Splice Joint closures installed between two aggregations POP’s during hand over of Network to client. All the 24 cores shall be spliced & joined in the Zonal Aggregation Backbone ring A Splice Joint Closure shall be installed on the Poles The color code shall be uniformly followed across the Core ring, zonal aggregation ring & mandal ring As per network design & route map as given in this document. 1.5 Access Network – Ring / Spur Topology a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) The Access ring shall be constructed using a 24 Core Optical Fiber Cables (ADSS). The Access ring shall utilize a 10 Gigabit IPMPLS technology. The Spur to a single PoP shall utilize 2 Gigabit IPMPLS technology. 2 cores in each tube shall be redundant for future scalability and maintenance activity. The connectivity to Mandal POPs to be done by using separate cores of access ring OFC and the same shall not be used for connecting users. Not more than combination of 5 locations of Mandal locations should be on one ring. Such Cores shall terminate on a layer 3 switch in Mandal level offices / Sub-Stations. The maximum fiber distance between two access switches, as measured by optical time as measured by optical time domain meter (OTDR) shall not exceed 25 KMs. A loop of ten (10) meters of OFC shall be left in every 500 mtr of distance. All the 24 cores shall be spliced & joined in the Access ring A Splice Joint Closure shall be installed on the Poles. OLT switches will be deployed for providing connectivity to users. The color code shall be uniformly followed across the Core ring, zonal aggregation ring & mandal ring As per network design & route map as given in this document. Fiber cores which were used in core ring / zonal ring / Access ring and spares provided shall not be left free without splicing & joining enroute PoP. Rest of the unutilized cores at the PoPs shall be left free for future usage. 21 1.6 Establishment of PoP at specified Locations 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.2.1 1.6.3 1.6.3.1 1.6.4 1.6.4.1 1.6.5 1.6.5.1 Point of Presence (PoP) shall be strategically located at various points across the state that are predefined and shall be made available to establish the required infrastructure to enable networking services A total of 10 District PoPs These 10 PoPs are high level 100 Gigabit aggregation PoPs. A civil infrastructure of approximately 1000 SFT shall be provided to erect the required racks, air-conditioning, and redundant power supply, networking equipment and working space. Electricity connection shall be provisioned. A proper earthing needs to be provided. A total of 49 Zonal PoPs These 49 PoPs at the Zonal Aggregation Points of 20 Gigabit aggregation PoPs. A rack/s, redundant power supply and networking equipment, proper earthing needs to be provided. A total of 605 Mandal PoPs These 605 PoPs are located at the Mandal Aggregation Points of 2 Gigabit. A rack/s, redundant power supply and networking equipment, proper earthing needs to be provided. A total of 1784 Substation/Access PoPs These 1784 PoPs are located at the Substations. A rack/s, redundant power supply and networking equipment, proper earthing needs to be provided. Note: Contractor shall be responsible for commissioning of the entire network. 1.7 GPON Network 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 Provision of GPON Last mile connectivity Enable Triple Play with data, voice & video Enable IP MPEG4 Streaming Enable Digital QAM Integration for the LCOs at 630 PoPs and distribution to the rest of 1784 PoPs 1.8 Network Operating Centre (NOC) & Headend Installation NOC requirements        NOC to be established at Visakhapatnam in a space provided by the Authority complying the best-in-class tier2 standards. NOC act as centralized management on full-network resource and service inventory to improve utilization of in-service resources. Provide key correlation analysis for network fault processing to improve network fault processing efficiency Provide the function of automatic service design and resource distribution. Provide performance & trend development analysis of network equipment and impact range of network fault and supply end-to-end service quality management & control, which control network & service quality continuously and enhance customer satisfaction Provide FOA (Field Operation Assistance) for field engineers. Contractor needs to survey the site; design the layout of the site including all the standard furnishings etc. to make the NOC operations. The complete BOQ of the work to be done at NOC needs to be submitted along with the design and approval to be taken from the Authority before start of the work. 22 Key functions  Centralized Operation  Network performance engagement  Planning and Engineering  Service management  Service provisioning  NOC Operation  Spare Management Field Operation  Connectivity  IT and Security  Provisioning on Field. Core Infrastructure Requirements  MUXs / DWDM / OTN Transmission Infra  Capable of connecting to 2 International Internet Gateways  Capable of connecting to 2 National Internet Exchange Gateways  Setup IPV6 Network  ISP Peering & Up Stream Routers  Caching Servers  BRAS ( Broadband Remote access server)  CDN & Video streaming system  Access Controller for Wifi Hot Spots  Core Switches for traffic aggregation  NMS (Network management system) for unlimited number of users / equipment’s to be monitored.  OSS & BSS – A multi-tenant system to be designed with 20,00,000 subscribers for 1st year that can be enhanced to 50,00,000 subscribers over a period of 3 years. However the licenses need to be supplied for unlimited number of users.  Network inventory & GIS management system ISP peering and Upstream Infrastructure  Peering & Upstream Routers & Switches to be used the cross connects need to be extended from Meet me room till Network Rack Core Routers  2 Core routers operating in High Availability mode Core Switches  2 Core Switches which will be connected on mesh mode to have high availability.  All the Servers ( BSS/OSS, CRM, Mail Server , Web Server), BRAS & FW devices will be connected to these switches . Core Infrastructure Connectivity  All the servers will be kept in DMZ zone behind Firewalls Fire walls  4 FWs to be kept and all should be in HA mode, all the servers WEB, Mail , OSS/BSS, CRM, NMS can be kept on DMZ zone. Local peering  Has to integrate peering with Google, Akamai etc 23   100Gig of domestic BW to be planned initially and can be expanded to 300Gig as per requirements. All the expansions on Multiple of 100 Gig Authentication, Authorization & Accounting (AAA) Authentication • Refers to confirmation that a user who is requesting a service is a valid user. • Accomplished via the presentation of an identity and credentials. • Examples of credentials include passwords, one-time tokens, digital certificates, and phone numbers (calling/called). Authorization • Refers to the granting of specific types of service (including "no service") to the users based on their authentication. • May be based on restrictions, for example, time-of-day restrictions, or physical location restrictions, or restrictions against multiple logins by the same user. • Examples of services include IP address filtering, address assignment, route assignment, encryption, QoS / differential services, bandwidth control/traffic management, etc. Accounting • Refers to the tracking of the consumption of network resources by users. • Typical information that is gathered in accounting include the identity of the user, the nature of the service delivered, when the service began, and when it ended. • Used for management, planning, billing, etc. Digital Headend for Cable TV  Establishing required infrastructure for a 250 Channel Digital Headend and integration of DRM  Capable of both SD & HD streaming  Installation of Antenna farms  Establishment of Edgecoms in Mandal PoPs  Integration of video streams on GPON interface B. Network Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Scope of Work for O&M for 1 year 1.1. Operations & Maintenance for the entire scope of work i. ii. iii. iv. The Contractor shall undertake the operations and maintenance of the aerial fiber network infrastructure for a period of one (1) year period commencing immediately after the operational acceptance. Operational Acceptance shall be given on successful completion of full acceptance test (FAT). During this period, the Contractor shall replace or repair all defective parts and shall be responsible for maintaining an operational system to achieve the availability of 99% uptime of NOC & related Software Applications and a 98% uptime per PoP ( to be monitored on monthly basis). The Contractor shall deploy sufficient skilled man power for the maintenance & operations of the entire system defined in the scope. The Contractor maintenance engineer shall report to the site for restoration of the system within 12 hrs at the District Aggregation PoPs and 24 hrs for the rest of the PoPs, including travel time in case of complete breakdown of the link. Contractor shall submit a comprehensive maintenance strategy for the maintenance of the system. 24 v. For this period which commences immediately after operational acceptance, the actual outage frequency and the availability achieved during the period shall be calculated periodically, jointly by the Contractor and the Client. vi. During this period, the spare parts, test equipment and tools supplied by the Contractor to Client under the present procurement including items in both the “Mandatory” and “Recommended” lists, shall be issued as required by the Contractor. Only these supplied items and no additional items, with the exception of general purpose toolkits, shall be used by the Contractor for all its testing and preventive & restorative maintenance activities. vii. If any additional test equipment or spare parts are required or found to be required, these additional items shall be provided by the Contractor, within a reasonable time, up to the expiry of this period, at no additional cost to Client. viii. Further, in such case the list of “recommended” spare parts and test equipment and tools & tackles shall be reviewed to identify further spares and test equipment requirement, which shall have to be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to Client. ix. During the entire project O&M duration, the cost of diesel required for running the DG Set at various PoPs across the state needs to be borne by the contractor. x. The recurring cost of electricity shall be borne by the designated Government authority. xi. All the UPSs shall be on line and SNMP enabled. xii. During O & M period the contractor shall also manage the NOC and other software deployed at NOC / Data Centre including the Cloud Infrastructure Setup there. The scope shall also include creation of various application instances of OSS / BSS solutions for ISPs, LCOs, MSOs etc. and providing them with web based access including training the requisite assistance for the use of software. xiii. Contractor also needs manage and maintain the Headend and other infrastructure provided. xiv. The operations and maintenance of the assets / the network infrastructure of this project shall be carried out under the control, guidance, superintendence and as per the directions of the Authority. xv. The Bidder needs to include in its solution all the requisite networking, security and other components required to secure the IAAS or PAAS offering so that any vulnerability to the system is avoided. The Authority will get the security audit of the entire infrastructure done from a third party and if vulnerability is observed, the same needs to be closed by the bidder at no additional cost to the Authority any time during contract duration (implementation period + O&M + DLP) xvi. The bidder is responsible for supply, installation and operations of entire network, accessories, network equipment's including related NOC, OSS / BSS solution, cloud services and Cable TV head end on turnkey basis. For making the entire solution operational as per the tender document requirements if some additional equipment's / services need to be provided, the same needs to be considered by the bidder in its proposal and need to be provided to the Authority. If some item is missed by the bidder in its proposal and the same is required, it needs to be provided by the bidder at no additional cost so that the implemented solution meets the project requirements. xvii. OSS / BSS software provided for the project need to be perpetual in nature and for unlimited user licenses and bidder should not provide any user restriction on the said licenses. xviii. The solution proposed for OSS / BSS which are required to be provide on cloud ( as IAAS or PAAS) to various ISPs/ Telecom services providers / MSOs should be capable to provide the said services to minimum 4000 such users from day one. Bidder need to size the entire requisite infrastructure to support this requirement C. Intersection of Phase –I & Phase –II AP Fiber Grid Project is planned to be implemented in two phases. Phase-I of the Project is planned to be implemented first which intends to create overhead fiber network across AP State. The fiber will be laid overhead and using the network of electricity poles across the State. As per the 25 estimate done by GoAP the approximate length of fiber to be laid as part of this project is 22,500 Kms. For this project GoAP through INCAP has floated RFP to select an implementation agency also referred as ‘contractor’ to lay the fiber network, create requisite number of PoPs, supply and install the networking equipments, set up NOC at central location, implement OSS and BSS software, set up of cable TV head end and operations / maintenance of the same for one year duration post Go Live. Phase-II of the project involves laying of underground Optic Fiber Network across State under National Optic Fiber Network (NOFN) / Bharat Net Scheme of Government of India. RFP for this project will be floated at a later date by an authorized Government agency. Once Phase-II project is implemented Phase-I project shall work as extended network as well as back up network at few locations for Phase-II project. In this document, the details of Phase-I project are mentioned in detail and only Phase-I project is in the scope of the contractor. Areas of Intersection Points of Phase I and Phase II projects include but not limited to: Intersection at PoP Level State PoP District PoP Mandal PoP State PoP created for Phase I Project may co-host one of the State PoP to be built for Phase-II. Space and other planning details (DG/power backup, entry/exit pointe etc.) to be considered for accommodating future needs Phase-I Project district PoP to be located at a government building in the DHQ. Phase-II project PoPs may also be collocated in the same PoP. Space and other planning details (DG/power backup, entry/exit pointe etc.) to be considered for accommodating future needs Zonal PoP (Mandal locations) that are created in Phase-I Project will be located at electrical Sub stations and will be kept in outdoor / indoor enclosure. Depending on final locations for Phase-II PoPs, Phase-I PoPs can be either physically shifted to Mandal offices and collocated in same space or these may continue at sub stations but horizontal fiber to be laid to connect this PoP with Phase-II PoP. Additional Mandal PoPs that are created under Phase-I at sub stations can continue initially as additional access points for LCOs / ISPs etc. In phased manner they may be shifted to Mandal PoPs to have easy management. NOC Intersection NOC For Phase-I project it is planned to have a monitoring and broadcasting NOC. This NOC may be set up at the same location where the NOC for Phase-II is planned or should be designed in such a manner that it can be moved or act as a backup/secondary NOC. Equipment Intersection In case of a technology refresh for the project, vendors may also consider suitable equipment to manage both projects bandwidth requirements. Intersection of Phases at Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Stage In future, O&M activities of both Phase I and PhaseII could potentially be managed by a single vendor. 26 Intersection with underground fiber project (Phase II) Approach In line with the vision of the project, an underground fiber network is being proposed to be built with the involvement and assistance of Government of India under the National Optic Fiber Network/BharatNet Project. The contractor will need to ensure that the Aerial Fiber Project allows for integration with Phase II wherever possible keeping in view the key objectives of Phase II project: i. To create a state-wide optical fiber-based Network Infrastructure with the features of being a state-wide integrated infrastructure, scalability, capacity, Assured QoS. ii. Provide connectivity from State to District to Mandal to Gram Panchayat with “enter anywhere, exit anywhere” capabilities for service providers with PoPs at District, Mandal and Gram Panchayat levels covering both urban and rural areas iii. Adequate network capacity to carry traffic as per the outlined project vision with aim of providing infrastructure as a service to last mile service providers iv. Carrier grade capabilities and reliability v. Provisioning and delivery of one hour of free Wi-Fi services every day at each Gram Panchayat for use by local population vi. Provide horizontal connectivity to government institutes at District, Mandal and Gram Panchayat level as below a. 25 Government institutes at each District b. 10 Government institutes at each Mandal c. 3 Government institute at each Gram Panchayat d. As part of the above mentioned horizontal connectivity provision, connectivity to all educational, healthcare and skill development institutes run by Central and State Governments shall be provided free of charge on an on-going basis. vii. Existing Telecom Infrastructure to be used to the extent permissible by the defined parameters of network reliability and capacity. viii. Setup of central network monitoring and management facility that would also integrate with National NOC being built under the BharatNet project ix. Implement Business Models to ensure maximum usage of network infrastructure by other service providers for delivery of digital services to citizen x. Operate, Manage and Upgrade the network infrastructure periodically to ensure that network capacity, uptime and performance are maintained at desired levels xi. Creation and management of content and services in a PPP Model to trigger extensive usage of the broadband. Note: The solution proposed by the bidder should be built on open and interoperable standards and protocols. The solution should be able to integrate with the technologies that will be procured by the Authority for AP Fiber underground project (Phase-II project). The bidder needs to provide open protocols free of cost if the protocols provided by the bidder are not of open standards. 27 2. Instructions to Bidders A. GENERAL The applicants shall necessarily pay the following fee and submit EMD as stipulated below failing which their bids shall summarily be rejected. i) Tender Fee: The bidder is required to submit a Demand Draft of INR 25,000 + INR 3500 (VAT), in favor of VC & MD, INCAP, Hyderabad drawn on any Nationalized / Scheduled Bank and payable at Hyderabad, towards cost of the tender fee along with the bid. The Demand Draft should be valid for a period of 120 days from the date of its receipt. A scanned copy of the tender fee is required to be uploaded on the e-Procurement portal as per the format. Any bid submitted without Tender Fee will be rejected. ii) E.M.D shall be paid in the form of Demand Draft in favor of VC & MD, INCAP, Hyderabad or Unconditional and irrevocable Bank Guarantee in favor of VC & MD, INCAP, Hyderabad obtained from Nationalized / Scheduled Commercial Bank, for Rs. 3,29,00,000/- along with bid documents. A scanned copy of the EMD is required to be uploaded on the e-Procurement portal as per the format. Any bid submitted without EMD will be rejected. Eligibility Criteria: The Applicants have to fulfill all the eligibility criteria stipulated as below. The Price bid of only those applicants who satisfy all the eligibility conditions and who score the minimum stipulated marks or more in the evaluation of technical bid will be considered. Important Note: To avoid conflict of interest, Telecom Service providers, Internet Service providers, organisations engaged in providing cable TV services and their subsidiaries will not be eligible to bid for this project either as prime bidder or as consortium member S. No A 1 Criterion Documentary Proof to be submitted Criterion to be met by General Eligibility The bidder should be either a In case of Single Bidder: company (single legal entity) or a consortium of companies. Copy of valid Certificate of Bidder in case of single entity incorporation issued by competent bidding The company shall be an authority in India incorporated entity under the (OR) Companies Act 1956 / 2013. In case of Consortium: All the Consortium members In case of consortium, the applicant Copy of valid certificate of individually and jointly, in consortium shall submit a valid incorporation issued by competent case the bidder is a agreement among the members. authority in India by each of the consortium consortium members The maximum number of members allowed in a consortium is four (4) Valid agreement on INR 100/- Stamp 28 including Lead member. All the Paper concluded among all the consortium members shall be jointly members of the consortium duly & severally liable. stamped and signed by the Authorized Signatories of the companies under consortium dated prior to the submission of bid. The agreement shall clearly specify the details of Lead member and other consortium members and outline the financial strengths, technical strengths and the role and responsibility of each of the members of the consortium. Copy of a valid Certificate of incorporation issued by competent authority in India (for each of the members in case of consortium) 2 The bidder should be registered under the Companies Act, 1956 / 2013 and should have been in operational existence with relevant experience for at least the last three (3) financial years Bidder, in case of single entity bidding. Copy of audited annual accounts for the last 3 financial years i.e., FY OR 2012-13, FY 2013-14 & FY 2014-15 All the members of the Note: In case the final audited annual Consortium individually, in accounts reports are not available for case the bidder is a FY 2014-15, the provisional consortium financial statements of FY 2014-15 duly certified by the statutory auditor of the company shall be submitted. Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 3 Certified copy of valid service tax OR The bidder should have valid service and VAT registration certificates tax and VAT registration in India issued by competent authority in All the members of the India Consortium individually, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 4 B The bidder should not have been OR blacklisted by any Govt. department Self-declaration by the bidder duly or any PSU in India as on the date of signed by the authorized signatory All the members of the bid submission Consortium individually, in case the bidder is a consortium Financial Capacity Eligibility 29 Average annual turnover of the bidder for the last three financial years should be at least INR 350 crores from activities related to provision of IT Systems Integration services / IT services / Network services / Telecom services / Fiber cable laying services / NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV Headend Services in India 5 In case the bidder is a consortium, the sum of the average annual turnover of all the consortium members for the last three financial years from activities related to provision of IT Systems Integration services / IT services / Network services / Telecom services / Fiber cable laying services / NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV Headend Services in India shall be at least INR 350 crores and; The average annual turnover of the lead member for the last three financial years from activities related to provision of IT Systems Integration services / IT services / Network services / Telecom services / Fiber cable laying services / NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV Headend Services in India shall be at least INR 100 crores. Certificate from statutory auditor of the Bidder mentioning the turnover from the activities related to provision of IT Systems Integration services / IT services / Network services / Telecom services / Fiber cable laying services / NMS/OSS/BSS services / Cable TV Headend Services in India in the last three financial years. If the final audited accounts for FY 2014-15 are not available, then the data based on the provisional accounts certified by the statutory auditor of the company will be considered. Other consortium members’ annual average turnover from the relevant activities shall not be less than INR 50 Crores individually in the last three financial years. 30 Bidder, in case of single entity bidding OR The members of the consortium individually and jointly with the provision that the average annual turnover of the lead member for the last three years from the activities mentioned shall be at least INR 100 crores while that of the other members individually shall not be less than INR 50 crores. Bidder, in case of single entity bidding The bidder should have positive networth of at least INR 100 crores as on 31st March, 2015. 6 C OR The members of the In case the bidder is a consortium, Certificate from Statutory Auditor of consortium jointly / the combined networth of all the the Company stating the networth of individually with the entities shall be at least INR 100 the Bidder as on 31st March, 2015. provision that the combined crores as on 31st March, 2015. The networth of all the members networth of the lead member of the shall be INR 100 crores as on consortium shall be at least INR 50 31st March, 2015. The crores. networth of the lead member of the consortium shall be at least INR 50 crores. Technical Capacity Eligibility Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 7 The bidder should have the experience of laying / pulling and installing optical fiber cable (OFC) for a length of at least 1500 Kms in India after 1st April, 2005 8 The bidder should have experience of setting up and maintaining atleast one Network Operating Centre services with atleast 50 clients on WAN in India after 1st April, 2005 9 The bidder should have experience in implementing Operating Support System & Business Support System (OSS / BSS) in communications / internet service sectors in India serving a subscriber base of atleast 50,000 after 1st April, 2005 Certified copy of the relevant work OR order(s) and certificate(s) with details from the client(s) stating that the The members of the work(s) has been completed consortium jointly on cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding Certified copy of the relevant work OR order(s) and certificate(s) with details from the client(s) stating that the The members of the work(s) has been completed consortium jointly on cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding Certified copy of the relevant work OR order(s) and certificate(s) with details members of the from the client(s) stating that the The consortium jointly on work(s) has been completed cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 10 The bidder should have experience in setting up and maintaining Wide Area Network / Points of Presence and its related electronics equipment in at least 50 different locations in India after 1st April, 2005 OR Certified copy of the relevant work order(s) and certificate(s) with details The members of the from the client(s) stating that the consortium jointly on work(s) has been completed cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium 31 Bidder, in case of single entity bidding 11 The bidder should have experience of setting up and managing operations of atleast one Cable TV Headend of minimum 200 channels in India after 1st April, 2005 OR Certified copy of the relevant work order(s) and certificate(s)with details The members of the from the client(s) stating that the consortium jointly on work(s) has been completed cumulative basis, in case the bidder is a consortium 32 Exit Management 1.1. This Clause sets out the provisions, which will apply when the contract has expired or when the contract is determined. 1.2. In the case of termination during the project implementation or maintenance phase, the Parties shall agree at that time whether, and if so during what period, the provisions of this clause shall apply. 1.3. The Parties shall ensure that their respective associated entities carry out their respective obligations set out in this clause. 1.4. Transfer of Assets a) The Contractor shall hand over all material with Contractor store to the Authority without any costs. In case of contract being terminated by the Authority, the Authority reserves the right to ask the Contractor to continue running the project operations for a period of 6 months after termination orders are issued. The other liquidated damages and SLA would be applicable during this period. b) Upon service of a notice under this Article the following provisions shall apply: c) Payment to the outgoing Contractor shall be made to the tune of last set of completed services / deliverables, subject to SLA requirements. d) The outgoing Contractor will pass on to the Authority and / or its nominated agency, the subsisting rights in any products on terms not less favourable to the Authority / its nominated agency, than that enjoyed by the outgoing Contractor. 1.5. Cooperation and Provision of Information During the exit management period: a) The Contractor will allow the Authority access to information reasonably required to define the then current mode of operation associated with the provision of the services to enable the Authority to assess the existing services being delivered; b) Promptly on reasonable request by the Authority, the Contractor shall provide access to and copies of all information held or controlled by them which they have prepared or maintained in accordance with this contract relating to any material aspect of the services (whether provided by the Contractoror SubContractors appointed by the Contractor). The Authority shall be entitled to get a copy of all such information. Such information shall include details pertaining to the services rendered and other performance data. The Contractor shall permit the Authority or its nominated agencies to have reasonable access to its employees and facilities as reasonably required to understand the methods of delivery of the services employed by the Contractorand to assist appropriate knowledge transfer. 1.6. Confidential Information, Security and Data a) The Contractor will promptly on the commencement of the exit management period supply to the Authority the following: b) Information relating to the current services rendered and Purchased and performance data relating to the performance of Sub-Contractors, if any, in relation to the services; c) Documentation relating to Project’s Intellectual Property Rights; d) Documentation relating to sub-Contractors(if any); e) All current and updated data as is reasonably required for purposes of the Authority or its nominated agencies transitioning the services to its replacement Bidder in a readily available format nominated by the Authority; f) All other information (including but not limited to documents, records and contracts) relating to the services reasonably necessary to enable the Authority or its nominated agencies, or its replacement Bidder to carry out due diligence in order to transition the provision of the Services to the Authority or its nominated agencies, or its replacement Bidder (as the case may be). 33 g) Before the expiry of the exit management period, Contractor shall deliver to the Authority all new or up-dated materials from the categories set out in Schedule above and shall not retain any copies thereof, except that the Contractor shall be permitted to retain one copy of such materials for archival purposes only. 1.7. Employees a) Promptly on reasonable request at any time during the exit management period, the Contractor shall, subject to applicable laws, restraints and regulations (including in particular those relating to privacy) provide to the Authority a list of all employees (with job titles) of the Contractor dedicated to providing the services at the commencement of the exit management period. b) Where any national, regional law or regulation relating to the mandatory or automatic transfer of the contracts of employment from the Contractor to the Authority, or a replacement Bidder ("Transfer Regulation") applies to any or all of the employees of the Contractor, then the Parties shall comply with their respective obligations under such Transfer Regulations. c) To the extent that any Transfer Regulation does not apply to any employee of the Contractor, department, or its replacement Bidder may make an offer of employment or contract for services to such employee of the Contractor. 1.8. Transfer of Certain Contracts On request by the Authority the Contractor shall effect such assignments, transfers, licenses and sublicenses as the Authority may require the same in the name of the Authority or its nominated agency in relation to any equipment lease, maintenance or service provision contract between Contractor and third party licensor, vendors, and which are related to the services and reasonably necessary for the carrying out of replacement services by the Authority or its replacement Bidder. 1.9. Right of Access to Premises a) At any time during the exit management period, where Assets are located at the Contractor's premises, the Contractor will be obliged to give reasonable rights of access to (or, in the case of Assets located on a third party's premises, procure reasonable rights of access to) the Authority and/or any replacement Bidder in order to make an inventory of the Assets. b) Contractor shall also give the Authority or any of its nominated agency or any replacement Bidder right of reasonable access to the Contractor's premises and shall procure the designated Govt. authority or any of its nominated agency and any replacement Bidder rights of access to relevant third party premises during the exit management period and for such period of time following termination or expiry of the Contract as is reasonably necessary to migrate the services to the Authority, or a replacement Bidder. 1.10. General Obligations of the Contractor a) The Contractor shall provide all such information as may reasonably be necessary to effect as seamless a handover as practicable in the circumstances to the Authority or its replacement Bidder and which the Contractor has in its possession or control at any time during the exit management period. b) For the purposes of this Schedule, anything in the possession or control of any Contractor, associated entity, or sub-Contractor is deemed to be in the possession or control of the Contractor. c) The Contractor shall commit adequate resources to comply with its obligations under this clause. 1.11. Exit Management Plan a) The Contractor shall provide the Authority with a recommended exit management plan ("Exit Management Plan") which shall deal with at least the following aspects of exit management in relation to the Contract as a whole and in relation to the Project Implementation, and the Operation and Management SLA. b) A detailed program of the transfer process that could be used in conjunction with a replacement Bidder including details of the means to be used to ensure continuing provision of the services throughout the 34 c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) transfer process or until the cessation of the services and of the management structure to be used during the transfer; plans for the communication with such of the Contractor's sub-Contractors, staff, suppliers, customers and any related third party as are necessary to avoid any material detrimental impact on the Authority’s operations as a result of undertaking the transfer; (if applicable) proposed arrangements for the segregation of the Contractor's networks from the networks employed by the Authority and identification of specific security tasks necessary at termination; Plans for provision of contingent support to the Authority and replacement Bidder for a reasonable period after transfer. The Contractor shall re-draft the Exit Management Plan annually thereafter to ensure that it is kept relevant and up to date. Each Exit Management Plan shall be presented by the Contractor to and approved by the Authority or its nominated agencies. In the event of termination or expiry of Contract, and Project Implementation, each Party shall comply with the Exit Management Plan. During the exit management period, the Contractor shall use its best efforts to deliver the services. Payments during the Exit Management period shall be made in accordance with the Terms of Payment Schedule. This Exit Management plan shall be furnished in writing to the Authority or its nominated agencies within 90 days from the date of issue of LOA to the Selected Bidder. Other Instructions: 1.12 The Contractor shall be responsible for the operations and maintenance of the entire fiber network infrastructure under this project for a period of one (1) year from the operational acceptance date after completion of all the project works (which is scheduled at 9 months from the date of entering into contract agreement). The operations and maintenance of the project assets and infrastructure shall be undertaken as per the directions / superintendence and control of the Authority concerned. 1.13 After the completion of the stipulated operations and maintenance period of one (1) year from the operational acceptance (Project Go-Live) date, the Contractor shall provide Operations & Maintenance services / support for the project on demand, for a further extended period on mutually agreed terms and conditions with the Authority in-charge of the project at that time. In case the Authority decides to extend / continue the O&M support by the contractor for a specified period beyond the initially stipulated time period of 1 year, the Authority’s decision shall be binding on the contractor. In such case, the O&M costs chargeable by the contractor per annum shall not exceed 10% of the original project contract value. 1.14 While INCAP issues the tender notice and handles the tendering process, the agreement with the successful bidder can be entered into by either INCAP or any other Govt. department / agency / Govt. corporation as the case may be. In such case, the Authority which signs the agreement will administer the contract and will be the incharge Authority for overseeing the implementation and management of this project. 1.15 In case the Authority hands over assets / infrastructure and the administration and control mechanism of the project to any other department / agency of the government at any stage, the Contractor shall honor all the prevailing contractual terms and agreements including signing of the agreement under this project, to be subsequently enforced by the new authority / agency. 1.16 In case of any disputes / legal issues arising out or in any way connected with any provision of this tender or with any clause of the agreement with the successful bidder, the cases shall be deemed to have arisen in Hyderabad and shall be subject only to the courts under the jurisdiction of the Honorable High Court of Judicature at Hyderabad for the states of Telangana and Andhra Pradesh. 35 1.17 Contractor need to take OEM support for all equipments and other assets for at least six months beyond the contract expiry period / extended contract expiry period. This will be verified by the Authority during the contract period and accordingly final payment shall be made to the contractor. The OEM support will be required for all Networking, IT hardware, Software, TV Head end and Non IT components such as UPS and DG Set etc. 1.18 After the expiry of the contract the transition of the project shall be done to the Authority / replacement vendor selected by the Authority. Transition period will be three months beyond expiry of the contract period. During the first 1.5 months of transition period the contractor will run the operations and replacement vendor shall work as support vendor for the project. During the next 1.5 months, the replacement vendor shall run the operations and the contractor shall provide secondary support. During transition the contractor shall provide all requisite support to the replacement vendor including compliance to the directions issued by the Authority. 2.1 Conditions precedent to signing of contract with the successful bidder i) The bidder should possess the following key / critical equipment (either owned or leased) S. No. Equipment Type and Characteristics Minimum required Nos. i) OTDR 10 ii) Optical Loss Test Set 20 iii) Optical Fiber Splicing Machine (Fusion) 20 iv) Optical Power Meters 50 v) Optical Attenuators 50 vi) OFC Splicing Kits 50 vii) Fiber Uncoiling Tools & Kits 50 viii) Transportation Vehicles 50 ix) Headend Test Setup for CATV 1 x) OSNR Tester 2 xi) Optical Spectral Analyzer (OSA) 1 The bidder has to submit any one of the following: a) Self certification issued by the Company regarding owning of the equipment. b) A declaration on non-judicial stamp paper worth Rs 100/- along with sufficient proof of document in support of owning such as invoice /Certificate of registration by competent authority in support of the critical equipment. c) In case the bidder proposes to procure the equipment on lease, he has to submit the lease deed on Rs. 100 non-judicial stamp paper along with proof of owning of equipment by the lesser. The lease agreement must be concluded for the specific work only and with specific required critical equipment. The lease deed shall be valid till the agreement period. ii) The successful bidder shall engage the following set of minimum no. of key personnel exclusively for undertaking works related to this project Key Personnel a. Project Director b. Project Manager c. District Implementation Lead 36 :1 :1 : 13 d. Quality Reviewer e. Test Manager f. Technical Expert :1 :1 : 3 (PG in Networking with atleast 15 years of experience) :10 (Graduation in Networking with at least 5 yrs of experience) g. Network Engineers Bidder should submit an appropriate project plan detailing the roles and responsibilities of individual / teams during the execution and maintenance phases of the project. 2.2 Quality Assurance: i) ii) iii) iv) Factory Acceptance Tests shall be conducted as per relevant Standards and Codes on randomly selected final assemblies of all equipment to be supplied. Field Acceptance Testing: The field installation test shall be performed for all equipment at each location. Third-Party-Testing: The manufacturer shall submit detailed Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) covering Tests to be carried out, Test Procedure, Acceptance Criteria, Sampling Plan, and extent of inspection by manufacturer and Client Representative / Third party Inspection (TPI) Agency w.r.t. Witness/Review. The bidder shall submit quality plan. 2.3 Excess tenders: i) Tenders with a price bid which is in excess of more than 5% of the estimated contract value will not be accepted by the e-procurement system. ii) For tenders up to 25% less than the estimated contract value of work, no additional security deposit is required. For tenders which are less by more than 25% of the estimated Contract Value of work, the difference between the tendered amount and 75% of the estimated contract value, shall be paid by the successful bidder at the time of concluding agreement as an additional security to fulfill the contract through a Bank Guarantee or Demand Draft on a Nationalized Bank/Scheduled commercial bank in the prescribed format valid till completion of the work in all respects iii) If the percentage quoted by a bidder is found to be either abnormally high or within the permissible ceiling limits prescribed but under collusion or due to unethical practices adopted at the time of tendering process, such tenders shall be rejected. iv) A bidder submitting a Tender which the tender accepting authority considers excessive and or indicative of insufficient knowledge of current prices or definite attempt of profiteering will render himself liable to be debarred permanently from tendering or for such period as the tender accepting authority may decide. 2.4 One Tender per Bidder: Each Bidder shall submit only one Tender for the work. A Bidder who submits more than one Tender will cause disqualification of all the Tenders submitted by the Bidder. 2.5 Cost of Tendering The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his tender and the tender inviting authority will in no case be responsible and liable for those costs. 2.6 Site Visit The Bidder, at the Bidder’s own responsibility and risk is advised to visit and examine the site of work and its surroundings and obtain all information that may be necessary for preparing the Tender for entering into a contract, for implementation of the work. The costs of visiting the site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense. 37 B. TENDER DOCUMENT 1. Contents of Tender document One set of Tender document comprises of the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) inclusive of eligibility criteria Scope of the Work Instructions to Bidder Conditions of Contract Technical Bid Price Bid a) Schedule A (Bill of Quantities) b) Schedule B 7) Technical Specifications & features 8) Formats for Securities and Statements and other forms of tender 2. Clarification on Tender Document A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification on tender documents may contact the Chief General Manager (Technical), INCAP, Hyderabad. 3. Amendment to Tender Documents i. Before the last date for submission of Tenders, the tender Inviting Officer may modify any of the contents of the tender notice, tender documents by issuing amendment / addendum. ii. Any addendum / amendments issued by the Tender Inviting Officer shall be part of the tender document and it shall be communicated through on line at e-market place i.e., www.eprocurement.gov.in iii. To give prospective Bidders reasonable time to take an addendum into account in preparing their bids, the Tender Inviting Officer may extend if necessary, the last date for submission of tenders. iv. The Authority reserves the right to reject any tender or all the tenders without assigning any reason there for. Any bidder shall have no cause olfaction or claim against the INCAP or its officers, employees, successors or assignee for rejection of his tender. 4. The VC & MD reserves the right to annul the tender process at any stage without assigning any reasons thereof. 38 C. PREPARATION OF TENDERS 1. Language of the Tender 1.1 All documents relating to the tender shall be in the English Language only. 2. Bid Offer 2.1 Bill of Quantities called Schedule “A” and the bid offer accompanies the tender document. It shall be explicitly understood that the Tender Inviting Officer shall not be responsible for the correctness or completeness of the schedule ‘A’ and the schedule ‘A’ is liable to alterations by omissions, deductions or additions at the discretion of the Authority or as set forth in the conditions of the contract. The Schedule “A” shall contain the various items and estimated quantities related to the work. The bidder has to quote clearly the item wise rates in Schedule-A. Further the bidder shall clearly state their offer to execute the work at certain specific percentage of excess or less or at par of the ECV indicated in Schedule-B as price bid at the space provided therein. 2.2 The bid offer shall be for the whole work and not for individual items / part of the work 2.3 The price quoted by the bidder for individual items in Schedule-A and also the overall price bid as a percent of ECV in schedule-B shall be inclusive of (i) All duties, taxes, charges and other levies payable by the Contractor as per State / Central Government rules, including VAT & Service Tax, etc and (ii) towards warranty and the cost of operations and maintenance of the assets and the fiber network infrastructure created under this project for a period of 1 year reckoned from the operations acceptance date (Project Go-Live) date after completing / commissioning all the works. 2.4 The tendered contract amount as computed based on overall tender percentage is subject to variation during the performance of the Contract in accordance with variation in quantities etc. 2.5 The service charges payable to MD, APTS, Hyderabad are as indicated below. a) It is mandatory for all the participant bidders from 1st January 2006 to electronically pay a prescribed non-refundable Transaction fee to M/s. APTS, the service provider through "Payment Gateway Service on E-Procurement platform". The Electronic Payment Gateway accepts all Master and Visa Credit Cards issued by any bank and Direct Debit facility/Net Banking of ICICI Bank, HDFC, Axis Bank to facilitate the transaction. This is in compliance as per G.O.Ms. 13 dated 07.05.2006. b) Corpus Fund: As per GO MS No.4 user departments shall collect 0.04% of ECV (estimated contract value) with a cap of Rs.10,000/- (Rupees ten thousand only) for all works with ECV upto Rs.50 Crores and Rs.25,000/(Rupees twenty five thousand only) for works with ECV above Rs.50 Crores, from successful bidders on e-procurement platform before entering into agreement / issue of purchase orders, towards e-procurement fund in favor of Managing Director, APTS. There shall not be any charge towards e-procurement fund in case of works, goods and services with ECV less than and upto Rs.10 lakhs. The above fee is payable by the successful bidder through a D.D. drawn in favor of Managing Director, APTS, Hyderabad at the time of conclusion of the agreement. 39 3. Validity of Tenders 3.1 Tenders shall remain valid for a period of not less than 120 days from the last date for receipt of Tender specified in NIT. 3.2 During the above mentioned period no plea by the bidder for any sort of modification of the tender based upon or arising out of any alleged misunderstanding of misconceptions or mistake or for any reason will be entertained. 3.3 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original time limit, the Tender Inviting Officer may request the bidders to extend the period of validity for a specified additional period. Such request to the Bidders shall be made in writing. A Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his E.M.D. A Bidder agreeing to the request will not be permitted to modify his Tender, but will be required to extend the validity of his E.M.D. for a period of the extension. 4. Tender Fee: The bidder is required to submit a Demand Draft of INR 25,000 + 3500 (VAT), in favor of VC & MD, INCAP drawn on any Nationalized / Scheduled Bank and payable at Hyderabad, towards cost of the tender fee along with the bid. The Demand Draft should be valid for a period of 120 days from the date of its receipt. A scanned copy of the tender fee is required to be uploaded on the e-Procurement portal as per the format. Any bid submitted without Tender Fee will be rejected. 5. Earnest Money Deposit 5.1 The DD/BG towards Earnest Money Deposit equivalent to 1% of ECV shall be from a Nationalized Bank or any scheduled commercial bank valid for a period of 120 days from the last date for the submission of bids. Xerox copy of the DD/BG is to be scanned and uploaded along with the Bid. The successful bidder shall invariably furnish the original DD/BG towards EMD to the Tender Inviting Authority before entering into agreement either personally or through courier or post and the receipt of the same within the stipulated date shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder. 5.2 The Department will not take any responsibility for any delay in receipt/non-receipt of original DD/BG towards EMD, from the successful bidder before the stipulated time. If any successful bidder fails to submit the original Hard Copies of uploaded DD/BG towards EMD within the stipulated time or if any variation is noticed between the uploaded documents and the hard copies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be suspended from participating in the tenders on e-Procurement platform for a period of 3 years. 5.3 The e-Procurement system would deactivate the user ID of such defaulting successful bidder based on the trigger/recommendation by the Tender Inviting Authority in the system. Besides this, the Department shall invoke all processes of law including criminal prosecution of such defaulting bidder as an act of extreme deterrence to avoid delays in the tender process for execution of the development schemes taken up by the Government. The information to this extent may be displayed in the e-procurement platform website. 5.4 The EMD of Bidders will be returned no sooner the tenders are finalized or end date of the Tender validity period whichever is earlier. 5.5 The 1% E.M.D. paid by the successful Bidder at the time of submission of hard copies of Tender documents through Demand Draft/ BG will be discharged and the successful Bidder shall furnish Bank Guarantee with in 7 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance from the Authority to the value of five percent (5%) of the contract price valid for a total period of 9+12+12+3=36 months. 5.6 The earnest money deposited by the successful bidder will not carry any interest and it will be dealt with as provided in the conditions stipulated in the tender. The E.M.D. given in the form of Bank Guarantee on a Nationalized / Scheduled commercial Bank shall be valid for the duration of contract period plus defect liability period of two years and in case any valid extension of contract period is granted, the validity of BG shall also be extended for the corresponding period. The Bank Guarantee on Nationalized / Scheduled commercial Bank furnished by the bidder towards additional security amount shall be valid till the work is completed in all respects. 40 5.7 The E.M.D. shall be forfeited a) if the Bidder withdraws the Tender during the validity period of Tender. b) in the case of a successful Bidder, if he fails to sign the Agreement within the stipulated time. 5.8 During the investigation of Tenders, if it is found that the Contractor is either modifying or withdrawing his Tender at his instance within the validity period of the tender i.e., 3 months, the EMDs deposited by the Contractor will be forfeited to the Government. Besides this, the Authority shall invoke all Processes of law. 5.9 If any successful bidder fails to submit the original hard copies of uploaded certificates / documents, DD/BG towards EMD within the stipulated time or if any variation is noticed between the uploaded documents and the hard copies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be suspended from participating in the tenders on e-procurement platform for a period of 3 years. The e-procurement system would deactivate the user ID of such defaulting successful bidder based on the trigger/recommendations by the Tender Inviting Authority in the system. Besides this, the Department shall invoke all processes of law including criminal prosecution of such defaulting bidder as an act of extreme deterrence to avoid delays in the tender process for execution of the development schemes taken up by the Government. 6. Signing of Tenders 6.1 In case the tender is submitted by a single bidder, it shall be signed by an authorized member of the firm, who shall also sign his own name, and the name and address of each member of the firm shall be given. If the tender is made by a consortium it shall be signed by a duly authorized officer who shall produce with his tender satisfactory evidence of his authorization. Such tendering entity may be required before the contract is executed, to furnish evidence of its corporate existence. Tenders signed on behalf of G.P.A. holder will be rejected. 6.2 The Tender shall contain no alterations or additions, except those to comply with instructions issued by the Tender Inviting Officer, or as necessary to correct errors made by the Bidder, in which case all such corrections shall be initialed by the person signing the Tender. 6.3 No alteration which is made by the bidder in the contract form, the conditions of the contract, the drawings, specifications or statements / formats or quantities accompanying the same will be recognized; and if any such alterations are made, the tender will be void. 41 D. SUBMISSION OF TENDERS 1. Submission of Tenders 1.1 The bidders who are desirous of participating in e-procurement shall submit their Technical bids, price bids etc., through online in the standard prescribed forms in the tender documents, displayed at e market place. The bidders should upload the scanned copies of all the relevant certificates, documents etc., in the e market place in support of their Technical bids. The bidders shall sign on all the statements, documents, certificates, uploaded by them, owning responsibility for their correctness/authenticity. 1.2 Furnishing of hard copies by the bidders before opening of the Price bids is dispensed with. 1.3 The Technical bid evaluation of the bidders will be done based on the certificates / documents uploaded through online only towards qualification criteria furnished by them. 1.4 All the bidders shall invariably upload the scanned copies of DD/BG in e- Procurement system and this will be the primary requirement to consider the bid as responsive. The Department shall carry out the Technical bid evaluation solely based on the uploaded certificates/documents, DD/BG towards EMD in the e-procurement system and open the price bids of the responsive bidders. The Department will notify the successful bidder for submission of original hard copies of all uploaded documents, DD/BG towards EMD prior to entering into agreement. 1.5 The successful bidder shall invariably furnish the original DD/BG towards EMD, certificates/documents of the uploaded scanned copies to the Tender Inviting Authority before entering into agreement either personally or through courier or post and the receipt of the same within the stipulated date shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder The Department will not take any responsibility for any delay in receipt/non-receipt of original DD/BG towards EMD, certificates/documents, from the successful bidder before the stipulated time. On receipt of documents, the Department shall ensure the genuinity of the DD/BG towards EMD and all other certificates / documents uploaded by the bidder in e-Procurement system in support of the qualification criteria before concluding the agreement. 1.6 If any successful bidder fails to submit the original Hard Copies of uploaded certificates/Documents, DD/BG towards EMD within the stipulated time or if any variation is noticed between the uploaded documents and the hard copies submitted by the bidder, the successful bidder will be suspended from participating in the tenders on e-Procurement platform for a period of 3 years. The e-Procurement system would deactivate the user ID of such defaulting successful bidder based on the trigger/recommendation by the Tender Inviting Authority in the system. Besides this, the Department shall invoke all processes of law including criminal prosecution of such defaulting bidder as an act of extreme deterrence to avoid delays in the tender process for execution of the development schemes taken up by the Government. 1.7 The bidder shall mandatorily pay the transaction fee to APTS through the electronic payment Gateway. 1.8 The bidders shall furnish a declaration in online stating that the soft copies uploaded by them are genuine. Any incorrectness/deviation noticed will be viewed seriously and apart from cancelling the work duly forfeiting the EMD, criminal action will be initiated including suspension of business. Important Note: The Bidder shall authenticate the bid with his digital certificate for submitting the bid electronically on eprocurement Platform and the bids not authenticated by Digital certificate of the bidder will not be accepted on the e-procurement platform. 2. Last date / time for Submission of the Tenders 2.1 Tenders must be submitted not later than the date and time specified in NIT. In the event of the specified date / time for the submission of bids declared as holiday, the bids will be received on the next working day. 2.2 The Authority may extend the dates for issue and receipt of Tenders by issuing an amendment in which case all rights and obligations of the Authority and the Bidders will remain same as previously. 42 3. Late Tenders 3.1 Any Tender received after the last date / time prescribed in NIT will summarily be rejected. 4. Modification to the Tender 4.1 No Tender shall be modified after the last date / time of submission of Tenders. 43 E. TENDER OPENING AND EVALUATION 1. Tender opening (a) The Technical bids of those bidders who meet the eligibility criteria will be opened on line by the authorized officials of INCAP, Hyderabad at the time and date as specified in the tender documents. All the statements, documents, certificates, DD/BG etc., uploaded by the bidders will be downloaded for Technical evaluation. The clarifications / particulars, if any, required from the bidders will be obtained by addressing the bidders. The Technical bids will be evaluated against the specified parameters / criteria and the technically qualified bidders will be identified. The result of Technical bid evaluation will be displayed on the e market place. If the Office happens to be closed on the date of opening the tender, the opening of tenders gets automatically postponed to the next working date, the time being unaltered, unless extended on online through corrigendum. (b) The Technical bids satisfying the qualification requirements as specified in this document will be evaluated by a Tender Evaluation Committee. The price bids of those who obtain the minimum stipulated score or more in technical evaluation will be opened at the time as specified in this document and will be evaluated by the tender evaluation committee. The result of the technical and financial evaluation will be placed before a tender approval committee for finalization of the tender. 2. Clarification on the Technical Bid (a) The tender opening authority may call upon any bidder for clarification on the statements, documentary proof relating to the Technical bid. The request for clarification and response thereto shall be in writing and it shall be only on the qualification information furnished by the bidder. The clarification called for from the bidders shall be furnished within the stipulated time, which shall not be more than a week. (b) The bidder if so desirous shall agree in writing to furnish the clarification called for within the stipulated time and will be liable for disqualification and rejection of his tender in the event of failure to do so. 3. Examination of Technical Bids and Determination of Responsiveness (a) Authorized officials of INCAP, Hyderabad will evaluate whether each of the Bidders is satisfying the eligibility criteria prescribed in the tender document and declare the qualified Bidder. (b) Authorized officials of INCAP who are delegated with the powers will open and evaluate the tenders as per the qualification criteria. Before recommending / accepting the tender, the tender opening authority may verify the correctness of certificates submitted to meet the eligibility criteria. (c) The method for evaluation of the technical bid and the qualifying score has been detailed in para 7 hereunder. 4. Price Bid Opening: a) Only the Price Bids of qualified Bidders whose Technical Bids are found satisfying the eligibility criteria and also obtain the stipulated marks or more after technical evaluation shall be opened. b) The Price Bid of the Unqualified Bidders will not be opened and thereafter E.M.D. will be returned to the bidders. c) Tenders shall be scrutinized in accordance with the conditions stipulated in the Tender document. In case of any discrepancy or non-adherence of the stipulated conditions, the Tender Evaluation Committee shall reject the tender which will be binding on the Bidder concerned. In case of any ambiguity, the decision taken by the Tender Evaluation Committee on tenders shall be final. 44 5. Evaluation and Comparison of Price Bids and selection of the successful bidder a) The officials concerned of the Authority will evaluate and compare the price bids of all the qualified Bidders and place it before the Tender Evaluation Committee. The committee after evaluating shall place its recommendations before a Tender Approval Committee. The bidder who scores the highest combined marks based on technical evaluation and financial evaluation and who satisfies all the stipulated criteria will be selected after due process and the selected bidder will be issued LOA. b) In case two or more bidders get the same combined mark, the bidder who quoted the lowest price in price bid under schedule-B shall be selected. In case the lowest evaluated price also happens to be the same, the bidder who has the highest networth as on 31st March, 2015 will be selected c) The method of awarding marks under technical evaluation and financial evaluation and the selection criteria has been detailed in para 7 hereunder. 6. Process to be Confidential a) Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of Tenders and recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other persons not officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful Bidder has been announced. Any effort by a Bidder to influence the processing of Tenders or award decisions may result in the rejection of his Tender b) No Bidder shall contact the Authority or any officials concerned with finalization of tenders on any matter relating to its Tender from the time of the Tender opening to the time the Contract is awarded. 7. Method of Technical & Financial Evaluation and Award of Marks and Selection of Bidder Technical evaluation and score: S. No. PAST TECHNICAL EXPERIENCE OF THE BIDDER Maximum Score Experience in laying / pulling and installing Optical Fiber Cable in India after 01-04-2005: 1 2 a 20 Marks 1,500 Km to 3,000 Km b 25 Marks 3,001 Km to 5,000 Km c 30 Marks > 5,000 KM Experience in setting up and maintaining NOC in India after 01-04-2005: a 1 NOC 10 Marks b 2 - 4 NOC 15 Marks c > 4 NOC 20 Marks 30 20 Experience in implementing OSS / BSS in communications and internet service sectors serving a subscriber base in India after 01-04-2005: 3 a b 50,000 – 1,00,000 customers 1,00,001 – 1,50,000 customers 5 Marks 7.5 Marks c > 1,50,000 customers 10 Marks 45 10 Experience in setting up and managing Wide Area Network / Points of Presence and its related electronics equipment in India after 01-04-2005: 4 a b c 50 - 100 locations 101 – 200 locations > 200 locations 10 Marks 15 Marks 20 Marks 20 Experience in setting up and maintaining Cable TV Headend with a minimum of 200 channels in India from 01-04-2005: 5 a b c 1 – 2 locations 3 – 4 locations > 4 locations 10 Marks 15 Marks 20 Marks TOTAL SCORE 20 100 Note: 1. Minimum total marks required for technical qualification is 60. Only those bidders who score minimum qualifying marks i.e. 60 marks or more out of 100 as detailed above will be eligible for price bid opening. 2. For each of the projects quoted above, the bidder has to provide all citations for each category along with the copy of work order / certificate of completion confirming completion / Go Live / commissioning of the work(s) from the Client(s) concerned. The bidder also needs to provide details like name of the client(s) for the works referred above, address, phone number and email id of Clients. The Authority reserves the right to verify the authenticity of the documents. 3. In case the bidder is a consortium, the experience jointly / cumulatively of all the members of the consortium will be considered for evaluation / scoring. The bid proposal will be evaluated using the following criteria. S. No. 1 2 Description Details Only the bidders who meet the eligibility criteria shall be eligible for technical evaluation. Stage-I :  Technical Bid Minimum absolute technical score to qualify for price bid evaluation is 60 Price bids of only those bidders who Stage-II: obtain the minimum absolute technical  Price Bid score of 60 or more will be opened. Technical Bid Evaluation In the first stage only the technical bids would be evaluated and score will be calculated as described below: The total technical score of the bid would comprise of scores from the Technical Bid evaluation by the Tender Evaluation Committee (TEC) as per the criteria mentioned in this RFP. Every technical bid shall be awarded an absolute technical score of ‘T1’ marks out of a total of 100 marks. Minimum absolute technical score to qualify for price bid evaluation is 60 out of 100 marks. TEC’s decision in this regard shall be final & binding and no further discussion/interface will be held with the bidders whose bids are technically disqualified /rejected. Evaluation of Technical Proposals by TEC shall not be questioned by any of the Bidders. TEC may ask Bidder(s) for additional information to verify claims made in Technical Bid documentation from the Bidder on the already submitted Technical Proposal at any point of time before opening of the Price bid. 46  Technical Score Formulation: The highest evaluated absolute Technical score (Tmax) will be given the maximum technical score (Tn) of 100 points. The technical scores (Tn) of the other bidders will be computed as per the formula for determining the technical scores as given below: Tn = 100 x (T1 / Tmax) Where, Tn = normalized Technical score for the bidder under consideration, T1 = Absolute Technical Score for the bidder under consideration, Tmax = Maximum absolute Technical Score obtained by any bidder Price Bid Evaluation The Price bids of those bidders who qualify the technical evaluation will only be opened. The Price Bids of the technically qualified bidders will be evaluated as per the evaluation criteria explained below.  Financial Score Formulation: The lowest evaluated absolute Financial quote (Fmin) will be given the maximum financial score (Fn) of 100 points. The financial scores (Fn) of the other Financial quotes will be computed as per the formula for determining the financial scores given below: Fn = 100 x (Fmin / F1) Where, Fn = normalized financial score for the bidder under consideration, F1 = absolute financial quote for the bidder under consideration, Fmin = minimum absolute financial quote obtained from any bidder Note: Financial quote refers to the price for the entire project contract quoted by the bidder under Schedule-B of the Price bid. To facilitate evaluation of the price bid and financial score formulation, the (%) percentage on ECV quoted by the bidder as price bid under schedule-B will be converted to absolute amount based on the ECV. Final Evaluation of the Proposal Proposals will be ranked according to the combined normalised technical (Tn) and financial (Fn) scores using the weights. Where: T = 0.30, the weight given to the Technical Score; F = 0.70, the weight given to the Financial Score; T+F=1 The combined technical and financial score (S) = Tn x T + Fn x F The bidder who scores the highest combined technical and financial score as detailed above will be considered for selection and award of the contract. Normally there would be no post-tender negotiations. In case negotiations are warranted, it would be only under exceptional circumstances and the Authority shall reserve the right to negotiate with the bidder (s) whose proposal has been ranked first by the committee on the basis of Joint Technical and Financial Evaluation. If the Authority is unable to finalize a service agreement with the bidder ranked first, the Authority may proceed to the next ranked bidder, and so on until a contract is awarded. The Authority reserves the right to present a contract to the bidder selected for negotiations. A contract will be awarded to the responsible, responsive bidder whose proposal conforms to the RFP and is, in the opinion of the Authority, the most advantageous and represents the best value to the project, price and other factors considered. 47 F. AWARD OF CONTRACT 1. Award Criteria a) The Authority will award the contract to the successful bidder whose tender is selected by the Tender Approval Committee constituted by the Government b) The Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any Tender or all tenders and to cancel the Tendering process, at any time prior to the award of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected Bidder or Bidders or any obligation to inform the affected Bidder or Bidders of the reasons for such action. 2. Notification of Award and Signing of Agreement a) The Bidder whose Tender has been selected/accepted will be notified of the award of the work by the Authority prior to expiration of the Tender validity period. This letter (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract called “Letter of Acceptance”) will indicate the sum that the Government will pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion, and maintenance of the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the Contract (hereinafter and in the Contract called the “Contract Amount”). b) When a tender is to be accepted the successful bidder shall attend the office of the Authority on the date fixed in the Letter of acceptance. Upon intimation being given by the Authority, of acceptance of his tender, the bidder shall make payment of the balance E.M.D., and additional security deposit wherever needed by way of Demand Draft or unconditional and irrevocable Bank Guarantee obtained from a Nationalized / Scheduled commercial Bank with a validity period of 36 months (9+12+12+3), and sign an agreement in the form prescribed by the Authority for the due fulfillment of the contract. Failure to attend the Authority’s office on the date fixed, to enter into the required agreement shall entail forfeiture of the Earnest Money deposited. The written agreement to be entered into between the Contractor and the Authority shall be the foundation of the rights and obligations of both the parties and the contract shall not be deemed to be complete until the agreement has first been signed by the Contractor and then by the proper officer authorized to enter into contract on behalf of the Authority. c) The successful bidder has to sign an agreement within a period of 7 days from the date of receipt of communication of acceptance of his tender. d) If the selected bidder backs out at the time of agreement, penalty of forfeiture of EMD will be imposed and business of the agency with all the Departments in A.P will be suspended for one year. 3. Security Deposit (a) Within 7 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance from the Authority, the successful tenderer shall furnish the Authority, a Security Deposit in the form of Demand Draft or a Bank Guarantee which shall be to the value of five percent (5%) of the contract price valid for a total period of 9+12+12+3=36 months. (b) The Bank Guarantee shall be issued by any Scheduled Bank / Nationalized Bank located in India, as chosen by the Tenderer. (c) Within 7 days of receipt of Letter of Acceptance from the Authority, if the tender of the successful tenderer is less by more than 25% of the estimated cost of the work to be executed, the tenderer shall furnish extra deposit in the form of a Bank Guarantee or Demand Draft for the difference between the tender amount and the 75% of the estimated value of the work. 48 (d) The Security Deposit for the work shall be returned to the Contractor at the end of Defect Liability Period, subject to the satisfactory performance of the contract in all respects, less dues owing from the Contractor. (e) Failure of the successful tenderer to comply with the above clauses shall constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the EMD. 4. Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices The Government requires that the bidders / suppliers / Contractors under Government financed contracts, observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of such contracts. In pursuance of this policy, the Government a) define for the purposes of the provision, the terms set forth below as follows: (i) “corrupt practices” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of anything of value to influence the action of a Government official in procurement process or in contract execution: and (ii)“fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the Government and includes collusive practice among Bidders (prior to or after Tender submission) designed to establish in Tender prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive the Government of the benefits of free and open competition. b) Will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder recommended for award has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the contract in question. c) Will blacklist / or debar firm, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, if at any time determines that the firm has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for, or in executing a Government Contract. d) The Bidders shall be aware of the provisions stated in the General Conditions of Contract. 49 3. CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT A. GENERAL 1. Interpretation: 1.1 In interpreting these Conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, male also means female, and viceversa. Headings have no significance. Works have their normal meaning under the language of the contract unless specifically defined. The Authority will provide instructions clarifying queries about the conditions of Contract. 1.2 The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the following order of priority: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 1.3 Agreement Letter of Acceptance, notice to proceed with the works Bill of quantities (Price-bid) Technical bid Conditions of contract Specifications Any other document listed as forming part of the Contract. To avoid conflict of interest, Telecom Service providers, Internet Service providers, organisations engaged in providing cable TV services and their subsidiaries will not be eligible to bid for this project either as prime bidder or as consortium member 2. Delegation: 2.1 The Authority may delegate any of its duties and responsibilities to other officers / agencies and may cancel any delegation by an official order issued. 3. Communications: 3.1 Communications between parties, which are referred to in the conditions, are effective only when in writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is delivered (in terms of Indian Contract Act) 4. Personnel: 4.1 The Contractor shall provide and employ on the site only such technical assistants as are skilled and experienced in their respective fields and such supervisory staff as are competent to give proper supervision to the work. The Contractor shall provide and employ skilled, semiskilled and unskilled labour as is necessary for proper and timely execution of the work. 4.2 The Contractor shall employ the required Key Personnel named in the Schedule of Key Personnel to carry out the functions stated in the Schedule or other personnel approved by the Authority. Unless otherwise specifically agreed between the parties and except in the case of retirement, resignation, death, medical incapacity of the Key Personnel, the Contractor shall not replace any Key Personnel. The Authority will approve any proposed replacement of Key Personnel only if their qualifications, abilities, and relevant experience are substantially equal to or better than those of the personnel listed. 4.3 Failure to employ the required Technical personnel by the Contractor, action will be taken as per contract conditions. 4.4 The Technical personnel should be on full time and available at site whenever required by the Authority to take instructions. 50 4.5 The names of the Technical personnel to be employed by the Contractor should be furnished in the statement enclosed separately. 4.6 In case the contractor is already having more than one work on hand and has undertaken more than one work at the same time, he should employ separate Technical personnel on each work. The Technical resources deployed shall be dedicated in nature. 4.7 If the Authority asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of Contractor's staff or his work force stating the reasons the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the site forthwith and has no further connection with the work in the contract. The Contractor shall provide a qualified replacement for such staff. 5. Contractor’s Risks: 5.1 All risks of loss or damage to physical property and of personnel injury and death, attributable to the Contractor’ negligence or willful default in the performance or non performance of the obligations under the Contract are the responsibility of the Contractor and the Contractor undertakes to indemnify Authority from and against all losses arising on account thereof. Upon prompt written notification by the Authority, the Contractor will defend such claim at its expense and will pay any costs or damages that may be finally awarded against the Authority. 5.2 The indemnities set out in Clause 5.1 shall be subject to the following conditions: a) the Authority as promptly as practicable informs the Contractor in writing of the claim or proceedings and provides all relevant evidence, documentary or otherwise; b) the Authority shall, at the cost of the Contractor, give the Contractor all reasonable assistance in the defense of such claim provided that the Indemnified Party may, at its sole cost and expense, reasonably participate, through its attorneys or otherwise, in such defense; c) if the Contractor does not assume full control over the defense of a claim as provided in this clause, the Contractor may participate in such defense at its sole cost and expense, and the Authority will have the right to defend the claim in such manner as it may deem appropriate, and the cost and expense of the Authority will be reimbursed by the Authorit y; d) the Authority shall not prejudice, pay or accept any proceedings or claim, or compromise any proceeding or claim without the written intimation of the Contractor; e) all settlement of claims subject to indemnification under this clause will be i. entered into only with the consent of the Authority, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld and include an unconditional release to the Indemnified Party from the claimant or plaintiff for all liability in respect of such claim.; and ii. include any appropriate confidentiality agreement prohibiting disclosure of the terms of such settlement f) the Authority shall account to the Contractor for all awards, settlements, damages and costs (if any) finally awarded in favour of the Authority which are to be paid to it i n connection with any such claim or proceedings; g) the Contractor shall take steps that Authority may reasonably require to mitigate or reduce its loss as a result of such a claim or proceedings; h) In the event that the Contractor is obligated to indemnify the Authority pursuant to this clause, the Contractor will, upon payment of such indemnity in full, be subrogated to all rights and defenses of the Authority with respect to the claims to which such indemnification relates. 5.3 The liability of the Contractor (whether in contract, tort, negligence, strict liability in tort, by statute or otherwise) for any claim in any manner related to the contract, including the work, deliverables or services covered under this RFP, shall be the payment of direct damages only which shall in no event in the aggregate exceed tender contract value payable under this Agreement. 51 6. Insurance: 6.1 The Contractor shall provide insurance for an assured amount not less than 75% of the tender contract value in the joint names of the Authority and the Contractor, to cover from the 15th day of signing of the agreement to the end of the Defects Liability Period for the following events which are part of the Contractor’s risks.     loss of or damage to the Works, NOC, PoPs and Materials; loss of or damage to the Equipment; loss of or damage to any property in connection with the Contract; and injury to or death of any person(s) employed for the project. 6.2 Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of the Authority. 7. Route Survey: 7.1 The Contractor should validate the design documents submitted as part of this bid, and submit compliance / deviation summary of the implementation sites, in due agreement with the Authority. Price Bid should be inclusive of conveyance and all other charges etc. 8. Force Majeure 8.1 If, at any time, during the continuance of this contract, the performance in whole or in part by either party of any obligation under this contract is prevented or delayed by reasons of any war or hostility, acts of the public enemy, civil commotion, sabotage, fires, floods, explosions, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, lockouts or act of God (hereinafter referred to as Force Majeure Events) provided notice of happenings of any such eventuality is given by either party to the other within 21 days from the date of occurrence thereof, neither party shall by reason of such event be entitled to terminate this contract nor shall either party have any claim for damages against other in respect of such non-performance or delay in performance, and deliveries under the contract shall be resumed as soon as practicable after such an event come to an end or cease to exist, and the decision of the Purchaser as to whether the deliveries have been so resumed or not shall be final and conclusive. Further that if the performance in whole or part of any obligation under this contract is prevented or delayed by reasons of any such event for a period exceeding 60 days, either party may, at its option, terminate the contract 8.2 Following events shall not be considered as Force Majeure Event: Cyclones that are not above the speed of 100 kms/hours. 8.3 Provided, also that if the contract is terminated under this clause, the Authority shall be at liberty to take over from Contractor at a price to be fixed by the Authority, which shall be final, all unused, undamaged and acceptable materials, bought out components and stores in course of implementation which may be in possession of Contractor at the time of such termination or such portion thereof as the Authority may deem fit, except such materials, bought out components and stores as the Contractor may with the concurrence of the Department elect to retain. 9. The works to be Completed by the Scheduled Completion Date: 9.1 The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and shall carry out the Works in accordance with the programme submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the approval of the Authority and complete the work by the Scheduled Completion Date. The Authority reserves the right to impose 52 Liquidated Damages and forfeit the bid security, in case of failure of Contractor to complete the work by the Scheduled Completion Date due to reasons attributable to the Contractor. 10. Safety: 10.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site. 11. Access to the Site for the Contractor 11.1 The Authority shall give access of the site to the Contractor. If access to a part site is given, the Authority will ensure that the part site so given access is amenable to carry out the work at site by the Contractor. 12. Access to the Site for the Authority 12.1 The Contractor shall provide the Authority access to the site and to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is intended to be carried out. 12.2 At any time during the exit management period, where assets are located at the Contractor's premises, the Contractor will be obliged to give reasonable rights of access to (or, in the case of assets located on a third party's premises, procure reasonable rights of access to) the Authority and/or any replacement Bidder in order to make an inventory of the assets for such period of time following termination or expiry of the contract as is reasonably necessary to migrate the services to the Authority , or a replacement Bidder 13. Instructions: 13.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Authority and comply with all the applicable local laws where the Site is located. 14. Settlement of disputes: 14.1 If any dispute or difference of any kind whatsoever shall arise between the Authority and the Contractor in connection with, or arising out of the contract, of the execution of the works, whether during the progress of the works or after their completion and whether before or after the termination, abandonment or breach of the Contract, it shall in the first place, be referred to and settled by the Authority who shall, within a period of thirty days after being requested by the Contractor to do so, give written notice of his decision to the Contractor. Upon receipt of the written notice of the decision of the Authority. The Contractor shall promptly proceed without delay to comply with such notice of decision. 14.2 If the Authority fails to give notice of his decision in writing within a period of thirty days after being requested or if the Contractor is dissatisfied with the decision of the Authority , the Contractor may within thirty days after receiving such decision of the Authority, appeal to the Secretary, IT, E&C Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh who shall afford an opportunity to the Contractor to be heard and to offer evidence in support of his appeal, the Secretary, IT, E&C Department shall give notice of his decision within a period of thirty days after the Contractor has given the said evidence in support of his appeal, subject to arbitration, as hereinafter provided. Such decision of the Secretary, IT, E&C Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh in respect of every matter so referred shall be final and binding upon the Contractor and shall forthwith be given effect to by the Contractor, who shall proceed with the execution of the works with all due diligence whether he requires arbitration as hereinafter provided, or not. If the Secretary, IT, E&C Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh has given written notice of his decision to the Contractor and no claim to arbitration has been communicated to him by the Contractor within a period of thirty days from receipt of such notice, the said decision shall remain final and binding upon the Contractor. If the Secretary, IT, E&C Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh shall fail to give notice of this decision, as aforesaid, or if the Contractor be dissatisfied with any such decision, then and in any such case the Contractor within thirty days after the expiration of the first named period of thirty days as the case may be, require that the matter or matters in dispute be referred to arbitration by an arbitrator appointed by mutual consent of both the parties. The agreement to appoint an arbitrator will be in accordance with the Arbitration & Conciliation Act, 1996. 53 B. TIME FOR COMPLETION 15. Program: 15.1 The scheduled time period for completion of the works is “Nine (9)” months from the date of entering into agreement with the Contractor. Keeping in view the implementation plan & timelines, the work should be programmed so as to achieve the milestones as mentioned there in. 15.2 After signing the agreement, the Contractor shall submit a detailed work plan, implementation schedules to complete the works within 9 months from the date of signing of the agreement. The Contractor shall forthwith begin the work after signing agreement and shall regularly and continuously proceed with them. 15.3 Stipulated Rate of progress : i) Work program for achieving the milestones as per implementation plan & timelines is given below S. No. Project Deliverable / Milestone Timelines (D + n) in Calendar Weeks 1 Team Mobilization & Project Inception Report 2 Route Survey & Network Validation 3 Commissioning of Network Operating Centre, Headed and all other components of NOC D + 16 Commissioning in the ‘first’ 2 identified Districts (at least 95% PoPs) and providing service to the first customer D + 18 Commissioning in ‘additional’ 5 identified Districts (at least 95% PoPs) D + 26 6 Commissioning in the remaining 6 Districts (at least 95% PoPs) D + 34 7 Commissioning of all balance PoPs in the State D + 37 8 Completion of any left over works and Project Go-Live D + 39 4 5 D+2 D+4 D – Date of Agreement Note: The commissioning means completion of Fiber laying, setting up of the PoP, deployment and installation of network equipment and all related activities and certification by the Project Monitoring Agency (PMA). 15.4 The Contractor shall commence the works on site within the period specified under paras 15.1 to 15.3 above after receipt by him a written order to this effect from the Authority and shall proceed with the same without delay, except as may be expressly sanctioned or ordered by the Authority, or be wholly beyond the Contractor’s control. 15.5 The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for special or temporary way leases required by him in connection with access to the site. The Contractor shall also provide at his own cost any additional accommodation outside the site required by him for the purposes of the work. 54 15.6 Delays and extension of time: If at any time during the performance of the contract, the Contractor encounters condition impending timely performance of service, the Contractor shall forthwith notify to the Authority in writing the fact of the delay, it’s likely duration and its cause(s). Upon receipt of such notification, reasonable extension of time maybe allowed by the Authority or by the officer competent at its discretion to sanction the extension, for unavoidable delays, such as may result from causes, which in the opinion of the Authority and are undoubtedly beyond the control of the contractor. Extension will not be given except in exceptional circumstances. Whenever authorized alterations or additions made during the progress of the work are of such a nature in the opinion of the Authority as to justify an extension of time in consequence thereof, such extension will be granted in writing by the Authority when ordering such alterations or additions. 16. Implementation Program: 16.1 The Contractor shall furnish immediately after signing the agreement a program showing the sequence in which he proposed to carry out the work, monthly progress expected to be achieved, also indicating date of Implementation, Testing and Commissioning. The schedule should be such that it is practicable to achieve completion of the whole work within the time limit fixed and in keeping with the milestone program specified in Para 16 above and shall obtain the approval of the Authority. Further rate of the progress as in the program shall be kept up to date. In case it is subsequently found necessary to alter this program, the Contractor shall submit sufficiently in advance the revised program incorporating necessary modifications and get the same approved by the Authority. No revised program shall be operative without approval of the Authority. 16.2 The Authority shall have all times the right, without any way violating this contract, or forming grounds for any claim, to alter the order of progress of the works or any part thereof and the Contractor shall after receiving such directions proceed in the order directed. The Contractor shall also report the progress to the Authority within 7 days of the Authority’s direction to alter the order of progress of works. 16.3 The Contractor shall give written notice to the Authority whenever planning or progress of the works is likely to be delayed or disrupted unless any further drawings or order including a direction, instruction or approval is issued by the Authority within a reasonable time. The notice shall include details of the drawing or order required and of why and by when it is required and of any delay or disruption likely to be suffered if it is late. 17. Speed of Work: 17.1 The Contractor shall at all times maintain the progress of work to conform to the latest operative progress schedule approved by the Authority. The contractor should furnish progress report indicating the program and progress once in a fortnight indicating the stage reached in the design, ordering of material, manufacture, delivery and supervision of erection of all components of plant. All variances from the agreed schedule are to be promptly reported. The Authority may at any time in writing direct the contractor to slow down any part or whole of the work for any reason (which shall not be questioned) whatsoever, and the contractor shall comply with such orders of the Authority. The compliance of such orders shall not entitle the contractor to any claim of compensation. Such orders of the Authority for slowing down the work will however be duly taken into account while granting extension of time if asked by the contractor for which no extra payment will be entertained. 55 17.2 Delays in Commencement or progress or neglect of work shall lead to forfeiture of earnest money, Security deposit and withholding of amounts: If, at any time, the Authority is of the opinion that the Contractor is delaying Commencement of the work or violating any of the provisions of the contract or is neglecting or delaying the progress of the work as defined by the tabular statement, he shall so advise the Contractor in writing and at the same time demand compliance in accordance with conditions of Tender notice. If the Contractor neglects to comply with such demand within seven days after receipt of such notice, it shall then or at any time thereafter, be lawful for the Authority without prejudice to other remedies available under the contract take suitable action in accordance with conditions of contract including forfeiture of security deposit, imposition of liquidated damages and/or terminate the contract in full or in part. 18. Suspension of works by the Contractor 18.1 If the Contractor suspends the works, without sanction of the Authority or in the opinion of the Authority neglect or fail to proceed with due diligence in the performance of his part of the Contract as laid down in the Schedule rate of progress, or if he continues to default or repeat such default, the Authority shall take appropriate penal action. 18.2 If the Contractor stops work for 28 days and the Stoppage has not been authorized by the Authority may at its option terminate the Contract. 18.3 If the Contractor has delayed the completion of works the Authority may take such recourse as available under the contract. 19. Extension of the Intended Completion Date 19.1 The Authority may extend the Intended Completion Date if a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for Completion to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date. 19.2 The Authority shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date within 21 days of the Contractor asking the Authority concerned for a decision upon the effect of a Variation and submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the new Intended Completion Date. 20. Delays Ordered 20.1 The Authority may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any activity within the Work. 21. Early Warning: 21.1 The Contractor is to warn the Authority at the earliest opportunity of specific likely future events or circumstances that may adversely affect the Execution of Works. 21.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Authority in making and considering proposals for how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the work and in carrying out any resulting instruction of the Authority . 22. Management Meetings: 56 22.1 The Authority may require the Contractor to attend management meetings from time-to-time. The business of a management meeting shall be to review the progress and installation related issues of the project and programme for remaining work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early warning procedure. Additionally, the Contractor shall also be required to attend any other meetings from time to time as advised by the Authority. 57 C. Inspection, Testing & Installation 23. Identifying Defects 23.1 The Authority or the authorised official / agency can check the Contractor’s work and notify the Contractor of any Defects that are found. Such checking shall not affect the Contractor’s responsibilities. The Authority may instruct the Contractor to verify the Defect and to uncover and test any work that the checking authorityconsiders may be a Defect. 23.2 Access to the Contractor's works shall be granted to the Authority at all reasonable times for the purpose of ascertaining quality and progress 24. Tests 24.1 If the Authority instructs the Contractor to carry out any test to check whether any work has a Defect, the Contractor shall pay for the test and any samples. 25. Correction of Defects 25.1 The Authority or the authorised official / agency may give notice to the Contractor of any Defects before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins from the Project Completion Date. The defects liability period shall be extended for as long as defects remain to be corrected by the Contractor. 25.2 Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct and make good the notified defect within the time span specified by the Authority's notice without any cost to the Authority. 26. Uncorrected Defects 26.1 If the contractor has not corrected the defect within the time specified in the Authority's notice, the Authority shall get it rectified at the risk and cost of the Contractor. 26.2 The Authority may introduce O.K. cards and prescribe the formats there of. O.K. cards shall relate to all major components of the work. The Contractor / his authorized representative shall be required to initiate and fill in and present the O.K. card to the construction staff that would check the respective items and send to the quality control staff for final check and clearance / O.K. Any defects pointed out by the construction supervision staff or by the Quality Control staff shall promptly be attended to by the Contractors and the fact of doing so be duly recorded on the back of O.K. card. 26.3 The Authority may also introduce check lists which shall be kept in Bound registers by the supervision staff. The Contractor may be required to fill up these lists in the first instance and shall be subsequently checked by the authorised officials / agency. 27. Quality Control In addition to the normal inspection by the regular staff in-charge of the work, the work and the final bills of the Contractor including all supporting vouchers, abstract, etc. will also be inspected by the Authority and any other agency or party approved by the Authority (department QC, third party QC,PMC, PMA etc.) as the case may be and during inspections by the State or District level Vigilance Cell Unit if any substandard work or excess payments are noticed with reference to measurement books etc., action will be taken based on their observations and the Contractor shall be liable to refund the amount of over-payment 58 and it shall be lawful for the Authority to recover the same from the Contractor in the manner legally permissible and these will be effected by the Authority 28. Inspections i) In addition to the quality assurance inspections of the concerned, the Contractor is required to cooperate and extend all facilities for the routine / regular / surprise, quality control inspections of the Authority or any authorized official agency. ii) In the case of various appurtances in addition to the required quality assurance inspections and tests by the Authority and its subordinate officials at factory and at site as the case may be, the Contractor is required to cooperate and extend all facilities for the routine / regular / surprise, quality control inspections and tests and progress monitoring, by the Authority or any authorised official / agency for the quality check inspections and tests by third party personnel if any engaged by the Authority. If such inspections involve the inspecting personnel visits to the various manufacturing units at different stages based on need, the cost of said inspections shall be borne by agency. The Contractor shall test all the materials as per agreement specifications and results shall be recorded duly signed by the Contractor or his representative. In addition to above, after the supply of materials to site, the Authority is at liberty to recheck the materials supplied at the cost of the Contractor and results shall be binding. If any non-compliance to the specifications is noticed, the entire lot will be rejected and payment made if any will be recovered from the Contractor. 59 D. Cost Control 29. Bill of Quantities (BoQ): 29.1 The Bill of Quantities will contain the requisite items and their estimated quantities for the project work to be done by the Contractor. The estimated Bill of Quantities for this work has been specified in Schedule – A of the price bid document. 29.2 30. Changes in the Quantities 30.1 The Contractor is bound to execute all supplemental works that are found essential, incidental and inevitable during execution of project works. 30.2 The payment of rates for any supplemental items beyond the quantities estimated in the BoQ will be regulated as under: For quantities in excess of the estimated BoQ, the PMA or any authorized official / agency shall validate the requirements and necessity of variations in quantity or extra items after due diligence, based on site conditions and work contingencies. The recommendations of the PMA or any authorized official / agency of the Authority will be submitted to the Authority for its consideration and necessary approval. For variation in quantities upto 25% excess or less of the estimated quantity in BoQ, the unit rates quoted by the bidder in his price bid under Schedule-A shall be applicable. Beyond this, the Contractor is eligible for variation in quantities and the price there of as per mutually agreed terms and conditions. 31. Extra (New) Items 31.1 Extra items of work shall not vitiate the contract. The reimbursement for extra items shall be validated by PMA and cleared by the Authority. The Contractor shall be bound to execute extra items of work as directed by the Authority. The rates for extra items shall be worked out as per mutually agreed terms and conditions. For new items which are beyond the scope of the BoQ, the PMA or any authorized official / agency shall validate the requirements and necessity of such new / extra items after due diligence, based on site conditions and work contingencies The Contractor shall submit in writing well in advance at least 14 days before the Authority a statement of extra items if any that they need to initiate during the course of project works. 31.2 31.3 32. Payment Certificates 32.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Authority monthly statements of the estimated value of the work completed less the cumulative amount certified previously. The value of work executed shall be determined by the Authority. The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the Bill of Quantities completed. The Authority may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information. 32.2 32.3 32.4 60 33. Payments 33.1 Payment Schedule Clause No. M1 Payment Milestone Fiber Procurement Placement & Order Field Validation of the network route / design / architecture M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 Payment as a percentage of the Total contract value Commissioning of the NOC Setup, Headend and all other components of NOC at identified location in Visakhapatnam Commissioning of atleast 95% of PoPs & network in the first two identified districts Commissioning of atleast 95% of PoPs & network in the next five identified districts Commissioning of 95% of PoPs & network in the remaining six districts 5% 1. Proof of the placement of OFC purchase order for the entire project, 2. Letter of acceptance from the Department on validation of: a. Route Map b. Network Design c. Network Architecture 15% Commissioning Reports issued by the Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification / testing (PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the date of submission of claims) 15% Commissioning Reports issued by the Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification / testing (PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the date of submission of claims) 20% Commissioning Reports issued by the Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification / testing (PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the date of submission of claims) 25% Commissioning Reports issued by the Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification / testing (PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the date of submission of claims) 10% Commissioning Reports issued by the Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) after due verification / testing (PMA shall issue such report within 7 days from the date of submission of claims) 10% Letter of acceptance from the Department on approved O&M Report Commissioning of all the PoPs and any leftover works End of O&M Phase Documents to be submitted 61 Note: In case of any variations / extra items, such claims will be considered only with reference to the entire project BoQ and the procedure as defined in Section 30 shall be followed. Payments will be made to the Contractor under certificates, within 21 days from the date of certification by the PMA or any authorized official / agency. 34. Certificate of Completion of works 34.1 Certificate of Completion of works 34.1.1 When the whole of the work has been completed and has satisfactorily passed any final test that may be prescribed by the Authority, the Contractor may give a notice to that effect to the Authority accompanied by an undertaking to carry out any rectification work during the period of maintenance, such notice and undertaking shall be in writing and shall be deemed to be request by the Contractor for the Authority to issue a Certificate of completion in respect of the Works. The Authority shall, within twenty one days of the date of delivery of such notice either issue to the Contractor, a certificate of completion stating the date on which, in his opinion, the works were completed in accordance with the Contract or give instructions in writing to the Contractor specifying all the Works which, in Authority opinion, required to be done by the Contractor before the issue of such Certificate. The Authority shall also notify the Contractor of any defects in the Works affecting completion that may appear after such instructions and before completion of the Works specified there in. The Contractor shall be entitled to receive such Certificate of the Completion within twenty one days of completion to the satisfaction of the Authority of the Works so specified and making good of any defects so notified. 35. Taxes included in the bid The price bid quoted by the Contractor should be inclusive of Value Added Tax (VAT) and any other taxes / duties / charges that are payable to the Central / State Governments or Statutory / Local bodies at the prevailing rates as applicable on all materials that the Contractor will have to purchase for performance of this contract. 36. Liquidated Damages 36.1 If for any reason, which does not entitle the Contractor to an extension of item, the rate of progress of works, or any section is at any time, in the opinion of the Authority too slow to ensure completion by the prescribed time or extended time for completion, the Authority shall so notify the Contractor in writing and the Contractor shall there upon take such steps as are necessary and the Authority may approve to expedite progress so as to complete the works or such section by the prescribed time or extended time. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for taking such steps. If as a result of any notice given by the Authority under this clause the Contractor seeks the Authority permission to do any work at night or on Sundays, if locally recognized as holidays, or their locally recognized equivalent, such permission shall not be unreasonably refused. 36.2 If the Contractor fails to complete whole of the works or any part thereof or section of the works within the stipulated periods of individual milestones (including any bonafide extensions allowed by the competent authority without levying liquidated damages), the Authority, may without prejudice to any other method of recovery will deduct at the rates as specified below, subject to a maximum of 10% of the contract value. The payment or deductions of such damages shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to complete the works, or from any other of his obligations and liabilities under the contract. 62 36.3 Quantum of Liquidated Damages as assessed below shall be levied by the Authority. The decision of the Authority thereon shall be final and binding on the Contractor. Further, the same shall not be challenged by the Contractor before Arbitration tribunal. This issue shall stand specifically excluded from the purview of the arbitration clause and as such shall not be referred to arbitration. Reference Targeted time schedule Milestone 1: Commissioning of the NOC setup & commissioning of at least 95% POPs in the first 2 identified districts and commencing of service to the first customer. D+18 weeks Milestone 2: Commissioning all PoPs and related works in all Districts. D+37 weeks Milestone 3: Completion of all project works and Project Go-Live D+39 weeks Rate for Liquidated Damages INR 10,00,000/- per day until the defined milestone-1 is achieved INR 10,00,000/- per day until the defined milestone-2 is achieved. INR 10,00,000/- per day until the defined milestone-3 is achieved. D: Date of Agreement 37. Securities 37.1 The Security Deposit and Additional Security (for discount tender percentage beyond 25%) shall be provided to the Authority not later than the date specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall be issued in an amount and form and by a bank acceptable to the Authority. The Security Deposit shall be valid until a date 90 days from the date of expiry of Defects Liability Period and the additional security shall be valid until a date 90 days from the date of issue of the certificate of completion. 38. Cost of Repairs 38.1 Loss or damage to the Works or material between the Start Date and the end of the Defects Correction Period shall be remedied by the Contractor at the Contractor’s cost if the loss or damage arises from the Contractor’s acts or omissions. 63 E. COMPLETING THE CONTRACT 39. Completion 39.1 The Contractor shall request the Authority to issue a Certificate of completion of the contract and the Authority will do so upon deciding that all the works related to the project/contract are completed. 40. The contract completion period will be 12 months after the completion of the project works under Warranty / Operations & Maintenance. 40.1 The Authority shall take over the Site and the Works within seven days of the authorized official / agency issuing a certificate of Completion. 41. Final Account 41.1 The Contractor shall supply to the Authority a detailed account of the total amount that the Contractor considers payable under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Authority shall issue a Defects Liability Certificate and certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within 56 days of receiving the Contractor’s account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Authority shall issue within 56 days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary. If the final account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the Authority shall decide on the amount payable to the Contractor and issue a payment certificate within 56 days of receiving the Contractor’s revised account. 42. Termination 42.1 The Authority may terminate the Contract if the Contractor causes a fundamental breach of the Contract. 42.2 Fundamental breaches of Contract include, but shall not be limited to the following. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) The Contractor stops work for 28 days when no stoppage of work is shown on the current program and the stoppage has not been authorized by the Authority. The Contractor has become bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than for a reconstruction or amalgamation. The Authority gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a fundamental breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time determined by the Authority; and The Contractor does not maintain safety, security measures as required The Contractor has delayed the completion of works by the number of days for which the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be paid as defined. If the Contractor, in the judgment of the Authority has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for or in the executing the contract. If the Contractor having been given by the Authority a notice in writing to rectify, reconstruct or replace any defective work or that the work is being performed in an inefficient or otherwise improper or un-workman like manner shall omit to comply with the requirement of such notice for a period of fifteen (15) days thereafter. If the Contractor persistently neglects to carry out his obligations under the contract and/ or commits default in complying with any of the terms and conditions of the contract and does not remedy it or take effective steps to remedy it within fifteen (15) days after a notice in writing is given to him in that behalf by the Authority. 64 i) j) If the Contractor being a company passes a resolution or the court shall make an order that the company shall be wound up or if a receiver or a manager on behalf of a creditor shall be appointed or if circumstances shall arise which entitle the court or the creditor to appoint a receiver or a manager or which entitle the court to make a winding up order. If the Contractor assigns, transfers, sublets (engagement of labour on a piece-work basis or of labour with materials not to be incorporated in the work, shall not be deemed to be subletting) or otherwise parts with or attempts to assign, transfer, sublet or otherwise parts with the entire works or any portion in contravention to the provisions of this tender. For the purpose of this paragraph: “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting of anything of value to influence the action of a public official in the procurement process or in contract execution. “Fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation of facts in order to influence a procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detrimental to the Government and includes collusive practice among Bidders (prior to or after Tender submission) designed to establish Tender prices at artificial noncompetitive levels and to deprive the Government of the benefits of free and open competition. 42.3 Notwithstanding the above, the Authority may terminate the contract as per the conditions of contract, in the interest of public convenience. 42.4 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe and secured leave the Site as soon as reasonably possible. Upon such termination on the ground of fundamental reaches committed by the Contractor, Performance Guarantee under the contract shall be liable to be forfeited and shall be absolutely at the disposal of Authority. 42.5 In the event of above courses being adopted by the Authority for fundamental breaches committed by Contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained by him by reasons of his having purchased or procured any materials or entering into any engagements or made any advances on account or with a view to the execution of the work or the performance of the contract. And in case action is taken under any of the provision aforesaid, the Contractor shall not be entitled to recover or be paid any sum for any work thereof or actually performed under this contract unless and until the Authority has certified in writing the performance of such work and the value payable in respect thereof and Contractor shall only be entitled to be paid the value so certified. 43. Property 43.1 All materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works and Works are deemed to be the property of the Authority. The title of ownership of supplies furnished by the Contractor shall not pass on to the Authority for any supplies / material till all the supplies / material are finally accepted by the Authority after commissioning and issue of certificate(s). However, the Authority shall have the lien on all such supplies/material as soon as any advance progressive payment is made by the Authority to the Contractor for such Supplies/material and the Contractor shall not subject these supplies/material for use other than those intended under this Contract. 43.2 43.3 65 F. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 44. Availability of access to electrical poles, site at NOC, Substations and POPs: a) The Contractor will be provided right of way & the requisite access to the electrical assets such as electrical poles, substations, distribution / transmission structures, as needed to pull aerial optical fiber cable and the requisite space to set up Points of Presence (PoPs) at identified substations and other identified locations where PoPs are to be set up. b) Requisite space for Network Operating Centre at Visakhapatnam will be provided by the Authority. c) The Authority will facilitate provision of necessary electrical connections with requisite loads and the electrical connection charges and consumption charges will be borne / reimbursed by the Authority. d) The field works such as pulling / installing the fiber over the electrical poles and setting up PoPs at substations shall be carefully executed by the contractor or his employees as per the guidance of the local electricity department officials, duly following the prescribed safety / security measures. 45. Compliance with Labour Regulations 45.1 During continuance of the contract, the Contractor and his sub-Contractors shall abide at all times by all existing labour enactments and rules made there under, regulations, notifications and bye laws of the State or Central Government or local authority and any other labour law (including rules), regulations, bye laws that may be passed or notifications that may be issued under any labour law in future either by the State or the Central Government or the local authority and also applicable labour regulations, health and sanitary arrangements for workmen, insurance and other benefits. Salient features of some of the major labour laws that are applicable to construction industry are given below. The Contractor shall keep the Authority indemnified in case any action is taken against Department by the competent authority on account of contravention of any of the provisions of any Act or rules made thereunder, regulations or notifications including amendments. If the Authority is caused to pay or reimburse, such amounts as may be necessary to cause or observe, or for non-observance of the provision stipulated in the notifications/bye laws/Acts/Rules/regulations including amendments, if any, on the part of the Contractor, the Authority shall have the right to deduct any money due to the Contractor including his amount of performance security. The Authority shall also have right to recover from the Contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the loss or damage suffered by the Authority . The employees of the Contractor and the Sub-Contractor in no case shall be treated as the staff of the Authority at any point of time. 46. Liabilities of the Contractor 46.1 Accident Relief and workmen compensation: The Contractor should make all necessary arrangements for the safety of workmen on the occurrence of the accident, which results in the injury or death of any of the workmen employed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall within 24 hours of the happenings of the accident and such accidents should intimate in writing to the officials of the Authority the act of such accident. The Contractor shall indemnify the Authority against all loss or damage sustained by the Authority resulting directly or indirectly from his failure to give intimation in the manner aforesaid including the penalties or fines if any payable by the Authority as a consequence of Authority failure to give notice under workmen’s compensation Act or otherwise conform to the provisions of the said Act with regard to such accident. 66 46.2 In the event of an accident in respect of which compensation may become payable under the workmen’s compensation Act VIII 23 whether by the Contractor or by the Authority it shall be lawful for the Authority to retain such sum of money which may in the opinion of the Authority be sufficient to meet such liability. The opinion of the Authority shall be final in regard to all matters arising under this clause. 46.3 The Contractor shall at all times indemnify the Govt. of A.P. against all claims which may be made under the workmen’s compensation act or any statutory modification thereafter or rules there under or otherwise consequent of any damage or compensation payable in consequent of any accident or injuries sustained or death of any workmen engaged in the performance of the business relating to the Contractor. 47. Contractor’s Staff, Representatives and Labour 48. (a) The Contractor shall, at all times, maintain on the works, staff of qualified Engineers, and Supervisors of sufficient experience of similar other jobs to assure that the quality of work turned out shall be as intended in the specifications. The Contractor shall also maintain at the works, a Work Manager with sufficient status, experience and office and duly authorize him to deal with all aspects of the day-today work. All communications on any commitments from the Work Manager shall be considered as binding on the Contractor. (b) The Contractor shall at all times submit details of skilled and unskilled labour and equipment employed to the Authority in prescribed proforma as he may require to assess and ensure the proper progress of work. Accommodation and food The Contractor should arrange accommodation he needs, at his own cost. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for supply of food grains, fuel and other provision to his staff and labour including controlled commodities. 49. Relationship Contractor shall have to furnish information along with tender, about the relationship he is having with any official of the Authority 50. Protection of adjoining premises The Contractor shall protect adjoining sites against structural, decorative and other damages that could be caused by the execution of these works and make good at his cost any such damages. 51. Work during night or on Sundays and holidays The works can be allowed to be carried out during night, Sundays or authorized holidays in order to enable him to meet the schedule targets and the work shall require almost round the clock working keeping inview: (i) The provisions of relevant labour laws being adhered to (ii) Adequate lighting, supervision and safety measures are established to the satisfaction of the Authority and (iii) The construction programme given by the Contractor and agreed upon by the Authority envisages such night working or working during Sundays or authorized holidays. 67 52. Layout of material stacks The Contractor shall deposit materials for the purpose of the work on such parts only of the ground as may be approved by the Authority before starting work. A detailed survey, clearly indicating position and areas where materials shall be stacked and sheds built is to be conducted by the Contractor at his own cost and only after obtaining necessary approval of the plan for use of sites by the Authority, the Contractor can use the sites accordingly. 53. Plant and Equipment 53.1 The Contractor shall have sufficient plant, equipment and labour and shall work such hours and shifts as may be necessary to maintain the progress on the work as per the approval progress Schedule. The working and shifts hours shall comply with the Govt. Regulations in force. 53.2 It is expressly and clearly stated that Contractor shall make his own arrangements to equip himself with all machinery and special tools and plant for the speedy and proper execution of the work and the department does not undertake responsibility towards their supply. 54. Inconvenience to public The Contractor shall not deposit materials at any site, which will cause inconvenience to public. The Authority may direct the Contractor to remove such materials or may undertake the job at the cost of the Contractor. 55. Conflict of interest Any bribe, commission, gift or advantage given, promised or offered by on behalf of Contractor or his partner, agent or servant or any one on his behalf to any officer, staff, representatives of the Authority , or any persons on their behalf, in relation to the obtaining or to execution of this, or any other contract with the Authority shall in addition to any criminal liability, which it may occur, will lead to the cancellation of this contract and the Authority is not liable for any loss or damage to the Contractor resulting from any such cancellation. The Authority shall then be entitled to deduct the amount, so payable from any money, otherwise due to the Contractor under this or any other contract. 56. Contract documents and materials to be treated as confidential All documents, correspondences, decisions and orders, concerning the contract shall be considered as confidential and/or restricted in nature by the Contractor and he shall not divulge or allow access to them by any unauthorized person. 57. General obligations of Contractor 57.1 The Contractor shall, subject to the provision of the contract and with due care and diligence, execute and maintain the works in accordance with specifications and drawings. 57.2 The Contractor shall promptly inform the Authority of any error, omission, fault and such defect in the design of or specifications for the works which are discovered when reviewing the contract documents or in the process of execution of the works. 57.3 Pending finalization of disputes, the Contractor shall proceed with execution of work with all due diligence. 68 58. Security Measures 58.1 Security requirements for the work shall be in accordance with the Government’s general requirements including provisions of this clause and the Contractor shall conform to such requirements and shall be held responsible for the actions of all his staff, employees and the staff and employees of his sub-Contractors. 58.2 All Contractors’ employees and representatives shall wear identification badges provided by the Contractor. Badges shall identify the Contractor and his employees and shall be worn at all times while at the site. 58.3 All vehicles used by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with Contractor’s name. 58.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and security of the works for the duration of the contract and shall provide and maintain continuously adequate security personnel to fulfill these obligations. The requirements of security measures shall include, but not limited to maintenance of order on the site, provision of all lighting, fencing, guard flagmen and all other measures necessary for the protection of the works within the colonies, camps and elsewhere on the site, all materials delivered to the site, all persons employed in connection with the works continuously throughout working and non-working period including nights, Sundays and holidays for duration of the contract. 58.5 Separate payment will not be made for provision of safety / security services. 59. Firefighting measures 59.1 59.2 The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate firefighting equipment and take adequate fire precaution measures for the safety of all personnel and temporary and permanent works and shall take action to prevent damage to destruction by fire of trees shrubs and grasses. Separate payment will not be made for the provision of fire prevention measures. 60. Sanitation The Contractor shall implement the sanitary and watch and ward rules and regulations for all forces employed under this contract and if the Contractor fails to enforce these rules, the Authority may enforce them at the expenses of the Contractor. 61. Training of personnel: The Contractor shall provide free of any charge vocational technical training with adequate facilities to identified government officers, students, engineers, supervisors, foremen, skilled workmen etc. not exceeding fifteen in number at a time on the Contractor’s work at identified locations as directed by the Authority. The salaries, allowances etc. of the trainers will be borne by the Authority and the training schemes will be drawn up by the Authority in consultation with the Contractor. 62. Ecological balance: 62.1 The Contractor shall maintain ecological balance by preventing de-forestation, water pollution and defacing of natural landscape. The Contractor shall so conduct his implementation as to prevent any unnecessary destruction, scarring, or defacing of the natural surroundings in the vicinity of the work. In respect of the ecological balance, Contractor shall observe the following instructions. 62.2 Where unnecessary destruction, scarring, damage or defacing may occur, as result of the operation, the same shall be repaired, replanted or otherwise corrected at the Contractor’s expense. 69 62.3 All trees and shrubbery which are not specifically required to be cleared or removed for construction purposes shall be preserved and shall be protected from any damage that may be caused by the Contractor’s construction operation and equipment. The removal of trees and shrubs will be permitted only after prior approval by the competent authority. Trees shall not be used for anchorages. 62.4 The Contractor’s activities shall be performed by methods that will present entrance or accidental spillage of solid matter contaminants, debris and other objectionable pollutants and wastage into river. Such pollutant and waste include earth and earth products, garbage, industrial wastes, radio-active substances, mercury, oil and other petroleum products, aggregate processing, mineral salts and thermal pollution. Pollutants and wastes shall be disposed off in a manner and at sites approved by the competent authority. 62.5 In conduct of activities and operation of equipment the Contractor shall utilize such practicable methods and devices as are reasonably available to control, prevent and otherwise minimize the air pollution. The excessive omission of dust in to the atmosphere will not be permitted during the manufacture, handling and storage of necessary material and the Contractor shall use such methods and equipment as a necessary for collection and disposal or prevention of dust during this operation. The Contractor’s methods of storing and handling material shall also include means of eliminating atmospheric discharges of dust, equipment and vehicles that give objectionable omission of exhaust gases shall not be operated. 62.6 Separate payment will not be made for complying with the provisions of this clause and all cost shall be deemed to have been included in the unit rates and prices included in the contract. If any provision is not complied with within a reasonable time even after issue of a notice in this respect, the necessary operations would be carried out by the Authority at the cost of the Contractor. Orders of the Authority in this respect would be final and binding on the Contractor. 63. Possession prior to completion The Authority shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed part of work or works or any part thereof either temporarily or permanently. Such possession or use shall not be deemed as an acceptance of any work either completed or not completed in accordance with the contract except where expressly otherwise specified by the Authority. 64. Access to the Contractor’s books Whenever it is considered necessary by the Authority to ascertain the actual cost of execution of any particular extra item of work or supply material or of extra items or claims, he shall direct the Contractor to produce the relevant documents such as payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials and any or all data relevant to the item or necessary to determine its cost etc. and the Contractor shall when so required furnish all information pertaining to the aforesaid items in the mode and manner that may be specified by the Authority. Notwithstanding anything contained in this Clause, the Contractor shall have no obligation to produce any internal costing mechanisms or any internal financial or commercial data. Further, the Contractor shall not be required to provide any data relating to its other customers, or any personnel or employees not related to this project. 65. Drawings to be kept at site One copy of the drawings furnished to the Contractor shall be kept by the Contractor on the site and the same shall at all reasonable time be available for inspection and use by the Authority or any authorized officials/agency. 70 66. Income tax 66.1 During the currency of the contract deduction of income tax at applicable rate shall be made from the gross value of each bill of the contract The Contractor’s staff, personnel and labour will be liable to pay personnel income taxes in respect of their salaries and wages as are chargeable under the laws and regulations for the time being in force, and the Contractor shall perform such duties in regard to such deductions thereof as may be imposed on him by such laws and regulations 66.2 67. Supply of material 67.1 67.2 67.3 The Contractor has to make his own arrangements for procurements, supply and use of materials. All materials so procured should conform to the relevant specifications indicated in the bidding documents. The Contractor shall follow all regulations of the Authority / Government of India in respect of import licenses etc., if the procurement of the materials is through imports and he shall be responsible for the payment of applicable duties and taxes, port clearances, inland transportation etc. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for adequate storage of the materials The Contractor shall test all the materials as per the agreement specifications and the results shall be recorded duly signed by the Contractor or his representative 67.4 67.5 68. Defect liability period (DLP) 68.1 The defect liability period under this contract is 12 months from the Completion Date of the Project (P.C.D.) The Completion Date of the Project shall be reckoned as shown below: Project Completion Date (P.C.D.) = A period of 12 months of O&M from the date of the completion of works (which is scheduled for a period of 9 months from the date of concluding the agreement). i.e., P.C.D. = Date of Agreement + Works completion period + 12 months of O&M. = Date of Agreement + 9 months + 12 months D.L.P. = P.C.D. + 12 months 68.2 Obligations of Contractor during DLP 68.2.1 If any defect in the fiber network infrastructure equipment is noticed during the defect liability period, the contractor at his expense shall attend them along with the required men and material for rectification. 68.2.2 In case any defective material provided by the contractor is noticed by the Authority during the defect liability period, the contractor has to replace / repair the same at free of cost. 69. Action where no specifications are specified In the case of any class of work for which there is no such Specifications as referred to in contract, such work shall be carried out in accordance with the Bureau of Indian Standards Specifications. In case there are no such Specifications in Bureau of Indian Standards, the work shall be carried out in all respects in accordance with the instructions and requirements of the Authority . 71 70. Safety Code In respect of all labor directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performance of the Contractor’s part of this contract, the Contractor shall at its own expense arrange for the safety provisions as per all statutory provisions and necessary safety provisions. 71. Release of Information: The Contractor shall not, during or any time after the term of the contract, communicate or use in advertising, publicity, sales releases or in any other medium, photographs, or other reproduction of the work under this Contract or description of the site dimensions, quantity, quality or other information, concerning the Work unless prior written permission has been obtained from the Authority. 72. Compliance with Security Requirements: During the currency of the project contractor shall adhere and conform to the Network Security Policy of the Authority. If required the Authority may adopt the guidelines and standards for information security published by Government of India from time to time. Contractor need to ensure compliance of applicable provision of: a. The Information Technology Act, 2000” and amendments thereof and b. Guidelines and advisories for information/network security published by CERT-In/Department of Electronics and Information Technology (Deity) (Government of India) c. Network security related guidelines issued by the Department of Telecom. Security guidelines that are published and are applicable as on the date of bid submission need to be complied with by the contractor. In case there are any changes in the security guidelines from time to time in future after the commissioning of this project, the contractor shall be required to implement the same without any additional cost to the Authority to the extent the same can be complied with by change in processes or by change in configuration of existing equipment. 72 4. TECHNICAL BID Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the State of Andhra Pradesh Technical Experience of the Bidder (after 1st April, 2005) S. No Technical Category 1 Experience of laying / pulling and installing optical fiber cable (OFC) in India. 2 Experience of setting up and maintaining Network Operating Centre services on WAN in India 3 Experience in implementing Operating Support System & Business Support System (OSS / BSS) in communications / internet service sectors in India 4 Experience in setting up and maintaining Wide Area Network / Points of Presence and its related electronics equipment in different locations in India 5 Experience of setting up and managing operations of Cable TV Headend of minimum 200 channels in India Experience details (after 1st April, 2005) Necessary documentary proof submitted (Yes / No) Note: 1) Towards proof of the technical experience, the bidder shall enclose the relevant work order(s) / work completion certificate(s) from client(s) for each of the work(s) undertaken in India after 1st April, 2005 under each of the categories of works mentioned above. 2) Evaluation of the technical bid will be conducted as per the methodology explained in para 7 of TENDER OPENING AND EVALUATION section of this tender document. 3) The technical bids of only those bidders who satisfy all the stipulated eligibility criteria will be considered for evaluation. 4) The price bids of only those bidders, who get the qualifying score of 60 or more out of 100 marks in technical bid evaluation, will be considered for opening. 73 5. PRICE BID i. SCHEDULE - A Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh Bill of Quantities (BoQ) APPENDIX – 1 FIBER BOQ S.No. 1 1a. 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Unit of Unit Cost Measure Quantity in INR ment A. Optical Fiber Cable & Installation Supply of 24 Core Optical Fiber ADSS Cable as Kms 20,500 per specification - wind speed 100 Km/hour Supply of 24 Core Optical Fiber ADSS Cable as Kms 2,000 per specification - wind speed 150 Km/hour Universal Pole Accessories Pole 3,75,000 Supply of Joint Enclosure & Splicing Nos. 12,000 Installation of Aerial OFC as per standard Kms 21,000 practices B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Fiber Nos. 12 Distribution Management System Rack (42U Rack) Nos. 12 Air Conditioning (2 Ton) Nos. 24 UPS (5 KVA with 4hrs.backup) Nos. 12 Diesel Generator (15KVA silent DG) Nos. 12 Providing necessary civil, electrical and furnishing works required for the installation of electronics in Sqft. 12000 PoP Towards 3 Phase Electricity Wiring Charges per Connection 12 PoP To provide Earthing measures at each PoP as per standard practices Connection 12 Item description including Specification C. Supply, Installation & commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs Fiber Distribution Management System Nos. 49 Rack for Equipment Installations (42U Rack) : Nos. 49 Indoor Box with Forced Cooling Arrangement UPS (3KVA with 4hrs. backup) Nos. 49 Earthing Nos. 49 One time Electricity Wiring Charges Nos. 49 D. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs Fiber Distribution Management System Nos. 605 605 Rack (42U Rack) : Indoor Box Nos. UPS (1KVA with 4hrs. backup) Online, SNMP 605 Nos. Enabled 605 Earthing Nos. 605 One Time Electricity Wiring Charges Nos. 74 Amount 1 2 3 4 5 E. Sub Station Level PoP Fiber Distribution Box Nos. Indoor Enclosure Rack 12U Nos. UPS (1KVA with 2hrs. backup) Online, SNMP Nos. Enabled Earthing Nos. One Time Electricity Wiring Charges Nos. 1784 1784 1784 1784 1784 APPENDIX – 2 Electronic Components BOQ A. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP 1 2 2.1 Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District IP MPLS Nodes Optical Transmission Equipment (DWDM) Incl NOC District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks. Number of degrees – 2 ( way) – 40 channel Associated Planning Tool Nos. 10 Nos. 11 Nos. 9 Nos. 1 Nos. 1 Nos. 10 (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 2.2 District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks. Number of degrees – 4 ( way) Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 2.3 NOC DWDM – with 120X10G protected client incl SFP and 24 x 100G trunk.- 40 channel Number of degree – 4 (way) Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) Zonal DWDM – with 4x 10G protected Client & 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel Number of degrees – 2 ( way) 3 Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 4 Optical Line Amplifier for DWDM Network Nos. 20 5 CWDM Equipment Nos. 11 6 GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports Nos. 11 7 EQAM Converters With amplifier Nos. 11 75 1 1.1 1.2 2.1 B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs Zonal IP MPLS Nodes Nos. 49 Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl Nos. 47 SFP and 8 x 10G incl SFP Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl Nos. 2 SFP and 12 x 10G incl SFP Zonal Hub DWDM – with 4x 10G protected Client & 2x80G trunk port/s ,4 Channel Number of degrees – 2 ( way) Nos. 47 Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 2.2 Zonal Hub DWDM – with 6 x 10G protected Client & 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel Number of degrees – 2 ( way) Associated Planning Tool Nos. 2 (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 3 4 5 1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3 4 5 1 2 3 EQAM Converters With amplifier Nos. 49 CWDM equipment Nos. 49 GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports Nos. 49 C. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 2x10 G Nos. 488 Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 4x10G Nos. 83 GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports Nos. 571 GPON OLT 2x10G, 8 GPON ports Nos. 34 CWDM Equipment Nos. 605 EQAM Converters With amplifier Nos. 488 EDF amplifier Nos. 83 D. Sub Station Level PoP GPON OLT 2X1G(10 Km) sfp, 8 GPON ports Nos. 1,784 OLT EDF amplifier Nos. 1,784 CWDM Equipment Nos. 1,784 APPENDIX – 3 NOC BOQ 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 2 2.1 2.2 A. Network Operating Centre (Proposed to be located at Visakhapatnam) EMS, OSS, BSS, NMS Interfaces, GIS Interfaces and Fault Management and Video wall for NMS EMS Nos. 1 GPON EMS Nos. 1 OSS/BSS Nos. 1 Video wall for NMS Nos. 1 Electronics (IPMPLS - backbone for state HQ PoP with meetme room cross connects) Core IP MPLS Router Nos. 2 Core Switch Nos. 2 76 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 4 5 Firewall Nos. 4 Nos. Set 2 1 Set 1 Set 1 ISP peering Routers, Upstream Routers, BRAS, CGNAT (IPV4 & IPv6), CDN and Video streaming system, Caching system, Lawdull intercept system, Blade chassis, AAA servers, Storage. BRAS Router Server pool for OSS / BSS , Caching & Storage Civil and Electrical Infra with 20 KVA UPS (1+1), Silent DG of 45 KVA (1+1), Air conditioning and Earthing, Fire and Safety Facilities. IP Phones, Video conference equipment. CATV Headend with Antenna Farm ( 250 channel- 20 HD, 230 SD / MPEG 4) APPENDIX – 4 Miscellaneous 1 Lumpsum Any Costs towards miscellaneous items, etc Grand Total Amount Note: 1. The cells with Black Colour should not be filled 2. A separate excel file by the name “Price Bid BoQ Schedule A.xls” is placed in the e-procurement platform for quoting the unit rates. S.No. * Optional Items which are not part of Price bid Unit of Measurement Quantity Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos Nos 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit Cost in INR Optical SFP modules 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1gb -SR (300 mtrs) 1gb -LR (10 Kms) 1gb -ER (40 Kms) 1gb -ZR (80 Kms) 10gb -SR (300 mtrs) 10gb -LR (10 Kms) 10gb -ER (40 Kms) 10gb -ZR (80 Kms) 100gb -SR (300 mtrs) 100gb -LR (10 Kms) 100gb -ER (40 Kms) 100gb -ZR (80 Kms) *These are optional items only and the estimated costs of these shall not be considered under the price bid quote by the bidders. These are indicative only and the item rates quoted here will be utilized only in case these items are utilized as new / extra items due to work contingencies as per need. NOTE: 1) The rates to be quoted by the bidder as mentioned above shall be inclusive of warranty on material / equipment to be supplied / installed / commissioned and also shall be inclusive of cost towards the operation / maintenance of the network / assets for a period of 12 months reckoned from the Project Works Completion Date (i.e. Go-Live Date, which is targeted at 9 months from the date of signing the agreement) 77 2) The rates to be quoted by the bidder as mentioned above shall be inclusive of all the taxes / duties such as VAT, Excise Duty, Service Tax & Service charges etc. to be payable at the prevailing applicable rates by the bidder. There will not be any liability on part of the Authority to pay any taxes / charges as part of the project components or works as mentioned above. 3) The estimated quantities as mentioned above in the BoQ under Schedule – A are based on the network route / fiber grid architecture designed for this project. However, there may be variations in the exact quantities required at the time of work execution based on the local field conditions and work contingencies. In such case, the variations in quantities and the rates thereof will be dealt with as per the provisions contained in paras 29-31 under the section “3.D. COST CONTROL” of this tender document. 4) The rates quoted by the bidder as above in the BoQ under schedule-A will not be considered for evaluation purpose either technical or financial. These rates will be utilized only for the purpose of arriving at variation costs, as per need. 5) The total price bid, i.e., the sum of the amounts from all the items in the BoQ as per the rates quoted above under schedule-A shall match with the total price bid quoted under schedule-B. In case of any discrepancy, the price quoted in schedule-B shall prevail. In such case, the rates quoted in schedule-A will be adjusted proportionately. 78 PRICE BID ii. SCHEDULE - B Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh Estimated Contract Value (ECV): Rs.3,29,00,00,000/(Rupees Three Hundred and Twenty Nine Crores only) I/We ………………… do hereby express the willingness to execute the aforesaid work as per the conditions, standards, specifications, rules, regulations, etc., stipulated in this tender document at an overall percentage of ………………% (in figures) …………………………….(in words) excess / less over the estimated contract value (ECV) mentioned above. Important Note: The price quoted by the bidder for individual items under BoQ in Schedule-A and also the overall price bid as a percent of ECV in Schedule-B shall be inclusive of (i) All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the Contractor as per the prevailing State / Central Government rules, including VAT &Service Tax etc. and (ii) towards warranty and the cost of operations and maintenance of the assets and the fiber network infrastructure created under this project for a period of 1 year reckoned from the project works completion date (the project works completion date is targeted to be 9 months from the date of concluding the agreement). The tender will be awarded based on the methodology detailed in the section “2.E. TENDER OPENING AND EVALUATION” of this tender document. 79 6. Technical Documents to be submitted by the bidder in support of BoQ / Specifications 1) The bidder shall submit the following details related to each of the BoQ items in separate statements: a) OEM b) Make c) Model d) Detailed Part Numberwise Bill of quantity for each component 2) The bidder shall submit Manufacturer Authorization Form (MAF) for the following components in separate statements: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Optical Fiber cable UPS DG Set Networking components Software including OSS, BSS, NMS, OS, etc. Firewall Servers CATV Headend 3) The bidder shall also submit item-wise deviation, if any, from the stipulated technical specifications as mentioned in this tender document. In case no deviation statement is submitted, it shall be deemed that the bidder conforms to all the stipulated technical specifications for all items. 80 7. Checklist of Key Documents to be submitted by Bidder The following table provides an indicative list of documents to be submitted by the Bidder along with the Bid. This list is not exhaustive and the bidder has to carefully go through the tender document and ensure all requisite forms/documents are submitted. S.No. Documents to be Submitted 1. Bid Security (EMD) 2. Tender Fee 3. Permanent Account Number of Bidder ( Income Tax) 4. VAT Registration Number 5. Service Tax Registration Number 6. Certified copies of certificates / documents as per General Eligibility Criteria 7. Certified copies of certificates / documents as per Technical Eligibility Criteria 8. Certified copies of certificates / documents as per Financial Eligibility Criteria 9. Technical bid detailing the technical experience of the bidder in the stipulated categories and the supporting documents 10. Price bid under Schedule-A individual rates of BoQ 11. Price bid under Schedule-B 12. 13. 14. Details of Make, Model, Part number of the items under BoQ proposed to be utilized by the bidder in this project in a separate statement Manufacturer Authorization Forms for Fiber Optical Cable, UPS, DG Set, AC, Networking Components, Software, Firewalls, Servers and CATV Headend etc. Deviation Statement detailing the deviations, if any, from the stipulated Technical Specifications proposed to be adopted by the bidder for this project in a separate statement 81 Submitted (Yes / No) Technical Specifications and requisite Features / Characteristics of various components under the project. Note: a) Bidder must comply with all the technical specifications given in this tender document. Any deviations from the prescribed specifications shall be mentioned in the deviation statement format given in the “Forms of Tender” under Annexure II. b) All the equipment power supplies should be compatible with Indian standards and support 220 - 240V / 50Hz AC. c) The quantities mentioned are not fixed and may change during implementation phase depending on the cable laying routes. The Bidders shall consider this fact while submitting the bid. d) Vendor is expected to provide adequate Installation accessories and patch cords to terminate the interfaces in the FDF. Patch cords are required to be of 20Mtr length. APPENDIX – 1 FIBER BOQ Unit of Measurement (UOM) Quantity Kms 20,500 Supply of 24Core Optical Fiber ADSS Cable as per specification - wind speed 150 Km/hour Kms 2,000 2 Universal Pole Accessories Pole 3,75,000 3 Supply of Joint Enclosure & Splicing Nos. 12,000 4 Installation of Aerial OFC as per standard practices Kms 21,000 S.No. Item description including Specification A. Optical Fiber Cable & Installation 1 1a. Supply of 24Core Optical Fiber ADSS Cable as per specification - wind speed 100 Km/hour B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP 1 Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Fiber Distribution Management System Nos. 12 2 Rack (42U Rack) Nos. 12 3 Air Conditioning (2 Ton) Nos. 24 4 5 6 UPS (5 KVA with 4hrs. backup) Diesel Generator (15KVA silent DG) Nos. Nos. 12 12 Providing necessary civil, electrical and furnishing works required for the installation of electronics in PoP Sqft. 1000 per district 82 7 Towards 3Phase Electricity Wiring/Cabling Charges per PoP 8 To provide Earthing at each PoP as per standard practices Connection 12 Nos. 12 C. Supply, Installation & commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs 1 Fiber Distribution Management System Nos. 49 2 Rack for Equipment Installations (42U Rack) : Indoor Box with Forced Cooling Arrangement Nos. 49 3 UPS (3KVA with 4hrs. backup) Nos. 49 4 5 Earthing Nos. 49 One time Electricity Wiring/ Cabling Charges Nos. 49 D. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs 1 2 3 Fiber Distribution Management System Rack (42U Rack) : Indoor Box Nos. Nos. 605 605 UPS (1KVA with 4hrs. backup) Online, SNMP Enabled Nos. 605 4 5 Earthing Nos. 605 One Time Electricity Wiring/Cabling Charges Nos. 605 Nos. Nos. 1784 1784 1784 E. Sub Station Level PoP 1 Fiber Distribution Box 2 Indoor Enclosure Rack 12U 3 UPS (1KVA with 2hrs. backup) Online, SNMP Enabled 4 5 Nos. Earthing Nos. One Time Electricity Wiring/Cabling Charges Nos. 83 1784 1784 Appendix – 1 FIBER BOQ A Optical Fiber Cable & Installation A.1/ 1.a Fiber Specifications for 24 core ADSS cable S. No. Description 1 Fiber used should be complying as per ITU-T G.652 D. 2 Fiber Geometrical Parameters 2 (a) MFD at 1310 nm – 9.2 +/- 0.4 µm 2 (b) MFD at 1550 nm – 10.4 +/- 0.5 µm Core Diameter (Typical) - 8.6 µm Cladding Diameter - 125 +/- 1.0 µm Cladding Non-Circularity - 1% 2I 2 (d) 2I 2 (f) Core Clad concentricity error – 0.6 µm 2 (g) Diameter over primary coated with double UV cured acrylate – 245 μm ± 10 μm 2 (h) Coating / Cladding Concentricity < 12 3 Fiber Optical/Transmission Properties 3 (a) Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1310 nm < 0.34 dB/Km 3 (b) Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1490 nm < 0.24 dB/Km 3I Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1550 nm < 0.21 dB/Km 3 (d) Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) at 1625 nm < 0.24 dB/Km Maximum Attenuation (Fiber) between 1380-1390 nm < Attenuation at 1310 nm 3I (After Hydrogen Ageing) 3 (f) Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1310 nm < 0.36 dB/Km 3 (g) Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1490 nm < 0.26 dB/Km 3 (f) Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1550 nm < 0.23 dB/Km 3 (g) Maximum Attenuation (Cabled Fiber) at 1625 nm < 0.26 dB/Km 3 (h) Chromatic Dispersion (1285-1330)nm ≤ 3.5 3 (i) Chromatic Dispersion (1270-1340)nm ≤ 5.3 3 (j) Chromatic Dispersion at 1550nm ≤ 17.5 3(k) Chromatic Dispersion at 1625nm ≤ 22 3 (l) PMD (1310 nm & 1550 nm) < 0.3 ps/√Km 3 (m) LDV (1310 nm & 1550 nm) < 0.2 ps/√Km 3 (n) Zero Dispersion Slope < 0.092 ps/(nm.sq.km) 3 (o) Zero dispersion wave length range - 1300 – 1324 nm 3 (p) Cable cut off - 1260 nm Maximum 84 S. No. 4 Description Fiber Reliability Parameters Proof test strain level - 4 (a) 1% Test method – IEC-60793-1-30 Dynamic Tensile strength (Un-aged) - > 3.8 Gpa 4 (b) Test method – IEC-60793-1-31 Dynamic Tensile strength – (Aged) 4I - > 3.0 Gpa Test method – IEC-60793-1-31 Stripability Force to remove primary coating – 1.3 < F < 8.9 N 4 (d) Test method – IEC-60793-1-32 Dynamic Fatigue 4I > 20 Test method – IEC-60793-1-33 Fiber Curl 4 (g) 20 Test method – IEC-60793-1-33 Static Fatigue 4 (f) > > 4.0 mtrs Test method – IEC-60793-1-34 Macro bend 4 (h) Test method – IEC-60793-1-47 / FOTP – 62 Change in Attenuation when fiber is coiled with 100 turns on 30 + 0.1 mm radius mandrel. 4 (h)(i) < 0.05 dB/km at 1550 nm < 0.5 dB/km at 1625 nm Change in Attenuation when fiber is coiled with 1 turn on 32 + 0.5 mm diameter mandrel. 4 (h)(ii) < 0.5 dB/km at 1550 nm < 1.0 dB/km at 1625 nm 5 OFC CONSTRUCTION Cross sectional view: 5 (a) 85 S. No. Description 5 (b) Buffer tube: Four numbers of primary coated colored fibers shall be protected by loose packaging within a tube which shall be filled with thixotropic jelly. Color sequence of fibers inside tubes should be Blue, Orange, Green& Brown. 5I Central Strength Member: Solid FRP non – metallic strength member in the center of the cable core shall be provided. 5 (d) Cable Core: Primary coated fibers in loose tubes, stranded together around a central strength member (using reverse lay techniques), shall form the cable core. Color sequence of loose tubes around FRP should be Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate& White. 5I The main cable core containing fibers shall be wrapped by a layer of water swell-able tape. Aramid yarn reinforcement shall be done over water swell-able tape to provide sufficient tensile strength. 5 (f) A circular and uniform tough weather resistant polyethylene compound HDPE/MDPE material sheath/Jacket, black in color, (UV Stabilized) shall be provided over and above the reinforcement of Aramid Yarn. Thickness of outer sheath should be minimum 1.5 mm. 5 (g) Two ripcords shall be placed diagonally opposite to each other below the outer jacket to strip the HDPE outer jacket. 6 OFC MECHANICAL PARAMETERS Tensile Strength - 3000 N at maximum allowable 0.25 % Fiber strain 6 (a) Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E1 Crush resistance - 2500 N/100 MM X 100 MM 6 (b) Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E3 Impact Resistance – 50 N from 0.5 M 6I Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E4 Torsion - +/- 180 6 (d) Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2-E7 Cable Bending Test – 20 D, 4 Turns, 10 cycles 6I Test Method – IEC 60794-1-2 E11 Abrasion resistance - Needle – 150 gm, Dia – 1 mm, Weight – 500 gm 6 (f) No of cycles – 100, Duration 1 minute Test Method – IEC-60794-1-2-E2 Repeated Bending - 20D, 35 Cycles 6 (g) IEC 60794-1-2 E6 Drip Test – 30 cm, 70°C, 24hr 6 (h) IEC 60794-1-2-E14 Water Penetration test - 1m head, 3m samples, 24 hrs 6 (i) IEC 60794-1-2 F5 7 OFC Environmental Parameters 86 S. No. Description 7 (a) Installation - 7 (b) Operation - -10°C to + 60°C - 20°C to + 70°C 7I Storage & Transport - -20° to + 70°C 8 Optical Fiber Cable Loading Conditions 8 (a) Maximum Span length - 65 Meters 8 (b) Installation Sag - 8I 1.0 % Operational Sag - 1.5 % 8 (d) Wind Speed - 100 Km/hour or 150 km/hour 8I Ice loading - Nil 9 Optical Fiber Physical Parameters 9 (a) Cable Diameter - 10.4 +/- 0.5 mm 9 (b) Cable Weight - 77 +/- 10% kg/km Printing details : NAME OF MANUFACTURER SM G652 D 24 F ADSS Laser symbol Year of manufacturer length code Meter Marking 9I (White Hot Foil Embossing) Optical Fiber 9 (d) 2 F / Buffer tube Color - Blue, Orange, Green, Brown Loose tube 9I Number – 6 Color Sequence – Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate, White 9 (f) 10 Outer Sheath color - Black Optical Fiber Cable packing details 10 (a) Cable length in a drum – 2/4 +/- 5 % km 10 (b) Short length - MAX 5 % 10 I Order Tolerance - +/- 5 % 87 A.2 Universal Pole Accessories Tension Pole Assembly – Should Contain following          Twisted Link Stay Clamp Tension Hook Turn Buckle Extension Link Thimble Terminating Helix Jumper Cable Clamp Protective Helix Tension Hook: Dimensions in MM: L1 177 L2 75 L3 50 D 12 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) To be used here C-Bracket is available on pole for fitment of Tension Hook. HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 1 2 Description Body Nut Material Alloy Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised 88 Ref Spec IS:2004 IS:1363 Qty 3 4 5 Plain Washer Spring Washer Spilt Pin Mild Steel Galvanised Spring Steel Galvanised Stainless Steel TENSION HOOK NOT TO SCALE IS:2016 IS:3063 IS:549 Unit-MM TURN BUCKEL: Dimensions in MM: L1 L2 170 100 L3 140 D1 18 D2 18 D3 12 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) MIN Length : 290 MM MAX Length : 400 MM Range of ADL : 110 MM HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 1 2 3 Description Body Nut Bolt Nut Material Mild Steel Forged Glav Mild Steel Forged Glav Mild Steel Extension Link: Dimensions in MM: 89 Ref Spec IS:2004 IS:2062 IS:1363 Qty L1 465 T1 5 W1 14 W2 16 W3 30 D1 16 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 1 2 3 4 Description Strap Rivet & Washer Split Pin Bolt & Nut M16 Material Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Stainless Steel Mild Steel Galvanised Ref Spec IS:2067 IS:2016 IS:549 IS:1363 Qty Clevis Thimble: Dimensions in MM: L1 L2 L3 102 42 15 T1 4 T2 9 R1 23 R2 15 R3 8 W1 92 W2 40 W3 18 D1 16 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) FEROUS PARTS ARE HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 1 2 3 4 Description Clamp Rivet M16 x 45 Washer Split Pin Material Aluminium Alloy GDC Galv Steel Galv Steel Stainless Steel CLEVIS THIMBLE NOT TO SCALE Unit-MM Protective Helix (T): For Example Dimensions (For Cable Size, D – 14.4 MM) i. DIA OF EACH WIRE – 3.2 ± 0.1 90 Ref Spec IS:617 IS:2016 IS:2016 IS:549 Qty ii. NO OF SETS – 3 iii. NO OF WIRE PER SET – 5 iv. LENGTH OF HELIX – 1000 Dimension details for other cable size shall be indicated by the Manufacturer including the pitch of HELIX. Note: Ends of RODS shall be deburred Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) 1 Description Protective Helx Material Aluminium Alloy 6061 Ref Spec Qty Ref Spec Qty Terminating Helix: Dimensions for Example L1 1000 T1 2.2±0.1 D is DIA of each Wire ROD No. of Wires used – 5 Note: Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) Dimension details for differe Cable size to be decided AP type Test Approval For Example Cable Size Ends of RODA shall be Debur Length of Terminating Helx 1000MM Terminating Helix to be used with Thimble C DIA – 14.4 MM Description 1 DEADEHD GRIP Jumper Cable Clamp: Material Aluminised Steel Dimensions in MM: L1 L2 105 65 Dimensions in MM of Insert PAD: L 40 D1 17.5 D2 5-6 INNER DIA 15 W 35 OUTER DIA 30 91 Note: Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) Insert in TOW HALVES D to suit Cable DIA Ferrous Parts are HOT DIP GALVASIED as per IS:2629 1 2 3 Description STRAP Insert Wing Bolt Material Mild Steel GALY Polychloradprene Compounded Mild Steel GALY Ref Spec IS:2062 Qty IS:2062 Pole Mounted Stat Clamp (Tubular): Dimensions in MM: Pole Mouted Stay Clamp Tubular L1 210 L2 20 D1 150 D2 16 T1 5 W 30 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 1 2 3 4 5 Description Clamp Bolt & Nut M16 Rivet 16 Washer Split Pin Material Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Stainless Steel Pole Mounted Stay Clamp (Rail): 92 Ref Spec IS:2062 IS:1363 IS:2016 IS:2016 IS:549 Qty Pole Mounted Stay Clamp (Rail) L1 L2 L3 L4 270 170 251 151 L5 20 L6 32 L7 50 L8 120 T1 5 T2 20 D1 16 W1 60 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 Description Clamp Bolt & Nut M16 Rivet 16 Washer Split Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Material Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Stainless Steel Suspension Pole Assembly: Should Contain Following      Twisted Link Stay Clamp Protective Helix Suspension Set Vibration Damper Suspension Pole Assembly NOT TO SCALE Unit – MM Twisted Eye Link: 93 Ref Spec IS:2062 IS:1363 IS:2016 IS:2016 IS:549 Qty Dimensions in MM: L1 L2 W1 138 100 27 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 1 Description Link W2 38 Material Mild Steel DIA 18 Ref Spec IS:2062 Qty Protective Helix (S): For Example Dimensions (For Cable Size, D – 14.4 MM) i. DIA OF EACH WIRE – 3.2 ± 0.1 ii. NO OF SETS – 3 iii. NO OF WIRE PER SET – 5 iv. LENGTH OF HELIX – 1400 Dimension details for other cable size shall be indicated by the Manufacturer including the pitch of HELIX. Note: Ends of RODS shall be deburred Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) 1 Description Protective Helx Material Aluminium Alloy 6061 Armour Grip Suspension Set: 94 Ref Spec Qty For Example Dimensions:- Cable Size – 14.4 MM DIA Cable DIA L1 L2 L3 L4 Colour Code 14.4 115 200 800 1400 Brown DIA AGS ROD 4.25±0.1 Note: Dimensions for different Cable Sizes to be decided after TEST Approval insert Dimensions in MM Inner DIA AT – A- A – 22 AT – B-B -22 Outer DIA 33 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description Clamp Inserts) Suspen Clipper Strap AGS Helix Protective Helix Rivet M16 Flat Washer Split Pin Twisted Eye Material Aluminium Alloy GDC Polychloroprene Compounded Aluminium Alloy Aluminium Alloy6061 Aluminium Alloy6061 Mild Steel Galvanised Mild Steel Galvanised Stainless Steel Mild Steel Galvanised Ref Spec IS:617 IS:617 IS:2062 IS:2016 IS:2549 IS:2062 Spiral Vibration Damper: Dimensions in MM: L1 1346 GL 446 DL 900 95 D1 12±1 Qty Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) Description Material 1 Spiral Visration Damper Polyvinyl Cokpounded Ref Spec Qty Demountable Pulley : Dimensions in MM: L1 280 W1 50 W2 92 Note: - Tolerance shall be as per IS:2102 (Detail as per GR, Unless UNTILL Specified) FEROUS PARTS ARE HOT DIP GAVANISED as per IS.2629 Description Material 1 HOOK Galvanised Steel 2 BODY Galvanised Steel 3 SPOOL Aluminium Coated Neoprene DEMOUNTABLE PULLY NOT TO SCALE D 12 Ref Spec Unit-MM A.3 Supply of Joint Enclosure & Splicing       Features Standard fiber count 24 to 48 F Universal type i.e. suitable for all type of cable (ADSS OFC, Armoured and metal free cable) Provide scope for straight / branch joints Resistant to chemicals and corrosive atmosphere. Easy re-entry and closing with mechanical plastic clamp. Shall be water and air proof. 96 Qty      Ribs on the body for extra strength 6 Cable entry port & 1 oval port Suitable for cable size upto-30mm Mounting Bracket for erecting on pole vertically straight. Dome type   Dimensions Length-395mm ±5% Outer diameter-273mm ±5% A.4 Installation of Aerial OFC Refer Annexure IV : Implementation and safety Guidelines B Supply, Installation & commissioning of Fiber Distribution Management System B.1 Fiber Distribution System S. No. Description 1 Introduction: 1U Rack mount module shall provide management of optical fibers of a cable, with flexibility and reliability. It shall provide management of fibers in a consistent and structured manner. It should also facilitate reconfiguration and testing of fibers, cables and network. Communication equipment is to be placed at an indoor location. The location would have multiple cables converging and hence requires a system to handle the large number of fibers. These cables shall be routed through race ways either from the bottom (under floor) or overhead. Functional Requirements: The 1U Rack mount module shall be able to accommodate all types of optical fiber cable structures including ribbonised optical fiber cable having 12 fibers perribbon, adopting different construction practices. i.e. the Unitube, Multi loose tube design, Intrusion Proof Cable Design, besides Aerial & other Underground optical Fibers cables 2 2.1 2.2 The 1U Rack mount module provide positive Fiber management i.e. facilities to carry out the expansion, reconfiguration & maintenance etc. without disturbing or affecting the existing fibers already in use or inflicting any damage to pig tails, patch cords, optical fibers (individual & ribbon), optical fiber cables, fiber splices (individual & ribbon) during normal cable and element handling. It shall provide well engineered bend radius control throughout the system 2.3 The 1U Rack mount module provides slack storage space for input cable 2.4 The 1U Rack mount module shall have provision for slack management for storing the extra length of optical Fibers and ribbonised optical fibers & pigtails, which shall not experience bend below the critical bend radius. The module shall be easily opened and closed without any degradation in the performance of Fibers. The shelves should have slides upon which the Splice Tray Assembly & Patch Panel Identification mechanism of incoming and outgoing cables/pigtails/patch cords/ ribbon fibers and adaptors shall be provided. 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 3 3.1 The system shall be suitable for Optical Fiber Cables having single mode fibers (individual Fiber & Ribbon Fiber) as per ITU-T Rec. G.652D etc for transmission at wavelengths of 1310nm and 1550nm; and for up-up gradation at 1625 nm wavelength without modification. The components of module include splicing cum patching shelves, shall be provided as per the requirement at all fiber terminations Technical Requirements: a) Number of ports minimum 24 97 S. No. 3.2 Description b) Stackable splice tray. c) Cable entry from rear or sides. Radius controlled cable routing. d) Front Access to cable connectors. Dimensions Width: 485 mm ± 2 %. Depth: 300 mm ± 2 %. Height: 44 mm ± 2% 3.3. It shall be possible to fix the fiber splicing cum patching shelf on the 19” rack, with mounting screws and nuts.. 3.4 Splice Trays shall be easily flipped at an angle of 90 degrees based on the hinge clip. 3.4.1 The single fiber Splice Tray shall be able to accommodate 12 Fibers. This Splice Tray shall assemble with other hinging Splice Trays. 3.4.2 The fastening arrangements for entry of the fibers into the splice Tray shall be suited to secondary coated fibers and primary coated fibers in tubes, without there being any risk of bending loss or damage to the fibers or the secondary tubes. 3.4.3 It shall be possible to take any individual fiber out of the splice tray for repair during normal operation, without damaging the remaining fibers. 3.4.4 The splicing Tray shall be non-metallic and made of ABS Blend material 3.4.5 Single mode Fibers conforming to G652D and etc for transmission at 1310 nm and 1550nm wavelengths and for up-gradation at 1625 nm wavelength without any modification 3.5 Insertion Loss: 0.3dB Return Loss: >50dB for PC &>60dB for APC 3.5.1 1.5 meter length of individual connectorized 0.9mm fiber for mounting on the Patch Panel 3.6.7 Quantity of splice trays (Fiber organizer) Type of cable splice trays Fiber splice/tray12fiber 2 4 4.1 TESTS: Visual Test: The box shall be examined physically for the workmanship, design and technology employed. It shall be checked for any flaws, defects, and cracks visible to naked eye. 4.2 Variation in attenuation (Residual loss) Test Parameters: Wavelength of operation: 1310nm & 1550nm Change in attenuation: ±0.1dB Requirement: The fiber attenuation shall be measured, leaving the fiber un-looped, after the arrangement on the tray and stabilization time of one hour. 98 S. No. Description 4.3 Axial Tension (Sheath retention): Test Parameters: Tension applied longitudinally: 25N (2.54 Kg) Test time: 10 minutes Requirement: Variation in attenuation (Residual Loss, Fiber Organisation) shall be checked after the completion of test and the variation in attenuation shall be +0.1dB. There shall be no visible flaws or defects after the test. 4.4 Environmental cycle: Test Parameters: Lowest temperature: -15°C Highest temperature: -60°C Dwell Time: 4 hrs Transition time: 2hrs Cycle duration: 10 and 1/2 hrs. Number of cycles: 10 Requirements: The Variation in attenuation (Residual Loss, Fiber Organization) shall be checked after the completion of the test and it shall be limited to ±0.1 dB. There shall be no visible flaws or defects after the test B.2 Rack (42U Rack) S. No. Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Height 42 U Type Floor mount with caster wheels Wire managers Two vertical and four horizontal Power distribution (50 points – 5Amp sockets) power distribution Door Glass door in front with lock Fan trays With 4 fans Depth 1000 mm Metal Aluminum extruded profile Side panels Detachable side panels Width 19” equipment mounting, extra width is recommended for managing voluminous cables 21 22 23 Castors Suitable castors with brakes Should have provision to integrate the UPS. It should have integrated light for remote inspection, IP camera, motion sensor, temperature sensor, voltage sensor, smoke sensor and battery life / status option (This feature is applicable for Zonal and Mandal PoPs) 99 B.3 Air Conditioning (2 Ton Split) EER ( w/w) 2.7 Min Star Rating 3 Star & Above Power V/Hx/Ph 220 – 240V / 50Hz 1Ph Ton 2 Capacity (BTU/hr) 24000 Refrigerant R22 Air Flow Volume (m3/h) 1100 Power Consumption 2340 W Operation Current 10.8 A Capacity 24000 BTU Noise Level (Indoor) should be better than High 48 dB (A) Mid 45 dB (A) Low 42 dB (A) Outdoor 59 dB (A) Compressor High quality famous brand rotary type compressor Elegant panel design, with LED/LCD central Display Galvanized outdoor unit or plastic outdoor unit for anti-corrosion B.4 UPS (5KVA with 4hrs backup) – SNMP enabled S.No. Description 1 True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 2 UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter 3 Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life 4 True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 5 Type: Online 6 Capacity: 5 KVA, 3-Phase 7 Backup time: 4 hrs. 8 Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5% 9 Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V 10 Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V 11 Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz. 12 Input Power Factor: > 0.9 13 Output Power Factor: 0.8 lag to unity PF 14 Output Harmonic Distribution < 8% 15 Waveform: Pure Sine Wave 16 Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load 17 Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP 18 Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket 100 19 Battery Type: SMF-VRLA 20 Battery AH: 100 AH 21 No. of Batteries: 16 Nos. 22 DC voltage (input): 192V DC 23 VAH: 19200 VAH 24 Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero 25 26 Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes Inverter Efficiency: 90% 27 Overall Efficiency: 85% 28 Crest Factor: 3:1 29 Regulation: +/- 1% 30 Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz 31 Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s &Highspeed pulse blanking. O/P Over Load, O/P Over Voltage, O/P Under Voltage O/P Short Circuit, Battery Charging Current & Inverter Over Temperature B.5 Diesel Generator (15 KVA Silent DG) S.No. Description 1. Engine type: Multi cylinder, in accordance with IS 10002-1981 with latest amendments 2. Method of starting: Electric start 12 V DC 3. Type of fuel: High speed diesel 4. Rating Continuous: 20 BHP 5. Output: Minimum 18 BHP under NTP conditions 6. Rated Speed: 1500 RPM 7. Output: 15 KVA 8. P.F: 0.8 lag 9. Voltage: 220 V, 1 Phase, AC 10. Type: Continuous running duty type 11. Frequency: 50 Hz 12. Phase: 3-Phase B.6 Civil, electrical and furnishing works  Establishing a 1000-1500 Sft POP Room with the Air conditioning 101  False Ceiling, false flooring and creation of office space. Approximate area to be upgraded is 1000 sft which may vary from location to location with the minimum following qty. S.No. Description Quantities Civil works 1 False Ceiling (In Sq.Mtrs) 10 Suspended false ceiling using GI section as perimeter channels and intermediate supports with 12mm Gypsum board screwed to the bottom and finished to appear seamless, with 2 coats of plastic emulsion paint applied over the base primer. 2 Flooring (In Sq.Mts) 10 Flooring using first quality antistatic vinyl flooring in the NOC ROOM 3 3.1 Partitions for server Room 10 sq.mt size Full partitions (Upto ceiling height) Full Height : Semi glazed Partitions using medium gauge 62.5 X 37.1X1.5mm) power coated Aluminium Sections upto ceiling height (102pprox..300 cms), and 5mm plain/ground glass panels for the panels, and 12mm both sides pre-laminated particle board panels for bottom half and the portions above the door height. 4 Doors (Per unit) Semi glazed aluminium doors of 210 cms height, using 50X44.5X1.8mm, Powder coated aluminium 2 Sections with 5.mm plain/ground glass panels for the top portion, and 12mm both sides pre-laminated particle board panels for bottom half. Door to be fitted with good quality concealed door closer of Everite/Dyna make and lock 5 Tables 4Ft x @2 Ft size 4 6 Chairs 4 7 Visitor chairs 8 8 Half Cabins 4 Half Partitions upto 135cms height (in Sq.Mtrs) 2 Provisioning of Networking and electrical points 8 Biometric access control system to the server room with motion sensors and an IP Camera 1 8.1 9 10 B.7 Electricity Wiring Bidder shall draw the required Electricity power source from relevant Power Company by applying for the new connection, And Installing an appropriate rated power meter at the premises. The electrical wiring necessary for the PoPs / NOC to be provided by the Bidder as per the standard specifications of the electrical wiring stipulated with drawings to be approved by the Authority. At District level and at the NOC, the connection shall be 3-Phase whereas for Mandal & Zonal level single phase wiring shall be done. B.8 Earthing Excavation of earth pit ,putting CI pipe with flange on one end ( as per ISS 718/74) of dia 800 mm and 2.54 meters long inside the pit and back filling the pit with BH coke, salt and CI pipe.( In NON rocky Area) 102 S.No 1 Description CI PIPE 80 mm dia,3 mm thickness, 2.5 mtrs Length) Qty Unit 1 each 2 BH coke 40 Kg 3 Salt 20 Kg 4 Hume pipe of 600 mm dia 1 each 5 6 Earth pit size 0.9X0.9X2.75 Meters Earthing of CI earth pipes with 50X6 mm GI flat / 10 swg bare copper wire. 1 1 each each Construction of Earth Pit in rocky soil / Chemical Earth Pit Hard rocky soil, 300mm bore up to 10 ft. deep shall be made using earth auger or any other method. Sleeve the soil and remove the gravels and stones. If soil quality is good (without murum & rocks) then add some quantity of earth enhancement material in the soil for using as backfill. If the soil seems unusable (Containing large quantity of gravel, stones, murum, sand etc.)the replace the soil with black cotton soil. Insert the electrode at the centre of the earth pit and arrange to keep it vertical in the pit. Arrange for adequate quantity of water supply for the pit.(Approx. 600 litres). Fill the pit with the backfill material and keep on adding the earth enhancement material surrounding the electrode and simultaneously watering the pit. Chemical Earthing using Electrode of size 50 mm dia, 3 meter long connected with 32X4 mm GI internal strip complete with excavation, civil works, cast iron cover with back fill compound. The voltage between Neutral & Earth not to exceed 2 volts. GI Strip of size 25mm X 5mm including installation Back Fill Compound 40 kg C Zonal Hub Level PoPs C.1 Fiber Distribution Management System S. No. Description 1 2 3 Features Standard fiber count 24F Universal type i.e. suitable for all type of cable (ADSSOFC, Armoured and metal free cable) 4 5 6 7 8 9 Splices shall be securely housed. Power coated metal body Totally corrosion proof Dimensions Length-600mm Width-375mm 103 10 11 12 Height-175mm Cable entry port-6 Suitable for cable size upto-38mm C.2 Rack for equipment installations (42U Rack): Indoor box with forced cooling arrangement Refer to B.2 Specifications of Fiber BoQ C.3 UPS (3KVA with 4 hrs backup) – SNMP enabled S.No. Description 1. True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 2. UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter 3. Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life 4. True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Type: Online Capacity: 3 KVA Backup time: 4 hrs. Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5% Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz. Input Power Factor: > 0.9 Output Power Factor: 0.7 lag to unity PF Output Harmonic Distribution < 8% Waveform: Pure Sine Wave Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load 17. 18. Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Battery Type: SMF-VRLA Battery AH: 120 AH No.of Batteries: 8 Nos. DC voltage (input): 96V DC VAH: 11520 VAH Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. Inverter Efficiency: 90% Overall Efficiency: 85% Crest Factor: 3:1 Regulation: +/- 1% Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s, Fast acting fuses & High speed pulse blanking. Electronic over voltage/under voltage, output short circuit 104 32. LCD display: Output voltage, Output current, Output frequency, Input Voltage, Battery Voltage 33. 34. Load Test: At 100 % load on Resistive load THD: < 3% for Linear, < 5% for Non Linear Load 35. Certification: ISO 9001:2008, 14001: 2004 & 18001:2007 C.4 Earthing Refer to B.8 Specifications of Fiber BoQ C.5 Electricity Wiring Refer to B.7 Specifications of Fiber BoQ D Mandal Level PoPs D.1 Fiber Distribution Management System Refer to C.1 Specifications of Fiber BoQ D.2 Rack (42U Rack): Indoor Box Refer to B.2 Specifications of Fiber BoQ D.3 UPS (1 KVA with 4hrs backup) – SNMP enabled S.No Description 1. True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 2. UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter 3. Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life 4. True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 5. Capacity: 1 KVA 6. Backup time: 4 hrs. 7. Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5% 8. Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V 9. Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V 10. Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz 11. Input Power Factor: > 0.9 105 12. Output Power Factor: 0.7 lag to unity PF 13. Output Crest Factor 3:1 14. Output Harmonic Distribution < 8% 15. Waveform: Pure Sine Wave 16. Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load 17. Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP 18. Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket 19. Battery Type: SMF 20. Battery AH: 120AH 21. No. of Batteries: 3 Nos 22. DC voltage (input): 36V DC 23. VAH: 4320VAH 24. Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero 25. Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes 26. Inverter Efficiency: 90% 27. Overall Efficiency: 85% 28. Crest Factor: 3:01 29. Regulation: +/- 1% 30. Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz 31. 32. Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s, Fast acting fuses & High speed pulse blanking. Electronic over voltage/under voltage, output short circuit LCD display: Output voltage, Output current, Output frequency, Input Voltage, Battery Voltage 33. Load Test: At 100 % load on Resistive load 34. THD: < 3% for Linear, < 5% for Non Linear Load 35. Certification: ISO 9001:2008, 14001: 2004 & 18001:2007 D.4 Earthing Refer to B.8 specifications of Fiber BoQ D.5 Electricity Wiring Refer to B.7 Specifications of Fiber BoQ E Substation Level PoP E.1 Fiber Distribution Management System Refer to C.1 Specifications of Fiber BoQ 106 E.2 Indoor Enclosure Rack 12U S.No. Description 1 Height 12 U 2 Type Wall / floor mount 3 Wire managers One horizontal 4 Power (6 points – 5Amp sockets) power distribution 5 Door Glass door in front with lock 6 Fan trays With 1/2 fans 7 Depth 800 /1000 mm 8 Metal Aluminum / Steel 9 Side panels Detachable /non detachable side panels 10 Width 19” equipment mounting, extra width is recommended for managing voluminous cables 11 Should have provision to integrate the UPS. It should have integrated light for remote inspection, motion sensor, temperature sensor, voltage sensor, smoke sensor and battery life / status option (This feature is applicable for Zonal and Mandal PoPs) E.3 UPS (1 KVA with 2 hrs backup) – SNMP enabled S.No Description 1. True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 2. UPS should have IGBT based rectifier and inverter 3. Temperature compensated battery charging feature should be built-in for prolonged battery life 4. True On Line based UPS with double conversion technology 5. Capacity: 1 KVA 6. Backup time: 2 hrs. 7. Input Frequency: 50 Hz. +/- 5% 8. Input Voltage: 160 V – 270 V 9. Output Voltage: 230 V +/- 1% V 10. Output Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 0.2 Hz 11. Input Power Factor: > 0.9 12. Output Power Factor: 0.7 lag to unity PF 13. Output Crest Factor 3:1 14. Output Harmonic Distribution < 8% 15. Waveform: Pure Sine Wave 16. 17. Alarm: On Battery, Low Battery, UPS Over Load Computer interface: RJ45 with SNMP 18. Battery make: Panasonic / Southern / YUSA / Exide / CSB / Amarraja / Relicell/Rocket 19. Battery Type: SMF 20. Battery AH: As Required 21. No. of Batteries: As Required 22. DC voltage (input): As Required 107 23. VAH: 1200VAH 24. Transfer Time of the Battery : Zero 25. Over Load Capacity: 150% for 1 Minute, 125% for 10 Minutes 26. Inverter Efficiency: 90% 27. Overall Efficiency: 85% 28. Crest Factor: 3:01 29. Regulation: +/- 1% 30. Switching Frequency: Above 20 KHz 31. Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with MCB’s, Fast acting fuses & High speed pulse blanking. Electronic over voltage/under voltage, output short circuit 32. LCD display: Output voltage, Output current, Output frequency, Input Voltage, Battery Voltage 33. Load Test: At 100 % load on Resistive load 34. THD: < 3% for Linear, < 5% for Non Linear Load 35. Certification: ISO 9001:2008, 14001: 2004 & 18001:2007 E.4 Earthing Refer to B.8 specifications of Fiber BoQ E.5 Electricity Wiring Refer to B.7 Specifications of Fiber BoQ 108 Electronic Equipment specifications Overview S N O Product 1 Mandal IP-MPLS Node 2 Mandal IP-MPLS Node 3 Mandal IP-MPLS Node Point of Presence 4 Zonal IP MPLS Node 5 Zonal IP MPLS Node ( Vizianagar am, Srikakula m) 6 District IP MPLS Node- 24 port capable 7 District IP MPLS Node- 24 port capableVijayawad a 8 SUB Station Nodes Qty 488 34 83 47 Backpane throughput 62 GBPS Router Interfaces 12 x 1G (4 x 1G(10 Km) SFP and 4 Copper 1G) and 2 x 10G ( 40 Km) SFP EDF amplifier for CATV Controller/Swi tch fabric redundancy NA 4X1G Copper, 8 GPON 24 QAM NA NA Yes Yes 4 /8 Port NA Yes Yes NA Power Supply redundancy Operating temperatu re range 65 C 62 GBPS NA NA NA 62 GBPS 12 x 1G (4 x 1G(10 Km) SFP and 4 Copper 1G) and 4 x 10G ( 40 Km) SFP NA NA 4X1G Copper, 8 GPON 24 QAM NA NA Yes Yes 8 x 1G LX(10 Km) SFP and 4 x 10G ( 500 m), 4X10G ( 40 Km) SFP 10x10G ( 500 m) SFP protected client SFP and 2 x 100G trunk. – 4 degree,40 channel 4x 10G ( 500 M) SFP protected Client , 2X 100G trunk port Number of degrees -2 4X1G Copper, 8 GPON 24 QAM NA Yes Yes Yes NA 6x 10G ( 500 M) SFP protected Client ,100G trunk port Number of degrees -2 4X1G Copper, 8 GPON 24 QAM NA Yes Yes Yes 4x 10G ( 500 M) SFP protected Client , 2X 100G trunk port Number of degrees -2 4X1G Copper, 8 GPON 24 QAM NA Yes Yes NA 4x 10G ( 500 M) SFP protected Client , 2X 100G trunk port Number of degrees -2 4X1G Copper, 8 GPON 24 QAM NA Yes Yes NA NA 2X1G (10 Km) SFP , 8 GPON NA 4 /8 Port NA Yes Yes 120 GBPS 120 GBPS 3.2 TBPS 20 x 10G ( 500 m), 4x 10G ( 40 km) SFP, 10X1G (10 Km ) SFP, 10X1 G copper port 1 3.2 TBPS 20 x 10G ( 500 m), 4x 10G ( 40 km) SFP, 10X1G (10 Km ) SFP, 10X1 G copper port 208 4 40GBps NA 9 EQAM with amplifier 4 channel DWDM Parameters 2X10G (10km) SFP, 8 GPON 8 x 1G LX(10 Km) SFP and 4 x 10G ( 500 m), 8X10G ( 40 Km) SFP 2 GPON 40 channel DWDM Parameters 10x10G ( 500 m) SFP protected client SFP and 2 x 100G trunk. – 4 degree,40 channel 10x10G ( 500 m) SFP protected client SFP and 2 x 100G trunk. – 4 degree,40 channel NA 109 110X10G protected client 110X10G (500m ) SFP and 22 x 100G trunk. 110X10G protected client 110X10G (500m ) SFP and 22 x 100G trunk. 4X1G Copper ,8 GPON NA NA Yes Yes NA NOC 9 NOC Core Routers 2 3.2 TBPS 110x 10G ( 500m) SFP,14X10 G( 40Km)SFP 10 Noc Core switch 4 3TBPS 144 x 10G ( 500 m) incl SFP NA NA NA NA NA Yes Yes NA 11 BRAS 2 3.2 TBPS 24 x 10G (500 m) incl SFP NA NA NA NA NA Yes Yes NA 4 40 GBPS THROU GH PUT 4x10G (500m ) SFP, 12X 1 G copper ports NA NA NA NA NA Yes Yes NA 12 Firewall Note: All operating Voltage 210- 240V C State Ring Architecture District Nodes High end Zonal Node Srikakulam District Nodes Zonal Nodes NOC 4 Way District Node At Vijaywada 110 High end Zonal Node Vizainagaram APPENDIX – 2 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS BOQ S.No. Item description including Specification Unit of Measurement (UOM) Quantity A. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District Level PoP 1 2 Supply, Installation & Commissioning of District IP MPLS Nodes Optical Transmission Equipment (DWDM) Incl NOC Nos. 10 Nos. 11 Nos. 9 District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks – 40 channel Number of degrees – 2 (way) 2.1 Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) District DWDM – with 10x10G protected client incl SFP and 2 x 100G trunks – 40 channel Number of degrees – 4 (way) x 2.2 Associated Planning Tool Nos. 1 Nos. 1 Nos. 10 (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) NOC DWDM – with 120X10G protected client incl SFP and 24 x 100G trunk – 40 channel Number of degree – 4 (way) 2.3 Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 3 Zonal DWDM – with 4x 10G protected Client & 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel Number of degrees – 2 ( way) Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 111 4 Optical Line Amplifier for DWDM Network Nos. 20 5 CWDM Equipment Nos. 11 6 GPON OLT 4X1G, 8 GPON ports Nos. 11 7 EQAM Converter with Amplifier Nos. 11 Nos. Nos. 49 47 B. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Zonal Hub Level PoPs 1 Zonal IP MPLS Nodes 1.1 Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl SFP and 8 x 10G incl SFP 1.2 Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router - with 8 x 1G incl SFP and 12 x 10G incl SFP Nos. 2 Zonal Hub DWDM – with 4x 10G protected Client & 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel Nos. 47 Nos. 2 Number of degrees – 2 ( way) 2.1 Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) Zonal Hub DWDM – with 6 x 10G protected Client & 2x80G trunk port/s, 4 Channel Number of degrees – 2 ( way) 2.2 Associated Planning Tool (Line Amplifiers should be in built to support a loss <= 26db (Considering attenuation coefficient <= 0.3db per km)) 3 EQAM Converter with Amplifier Nos. 49 4 CWDM equipment Nos. 49 5 GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports Nos. 49 Nos. 488 C. Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Mandal Level PoPs 1.1 Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 2x10 G 1.2 Mandal IP MPLS Nodes- 4x10G Nos. 83 2.1 GPON OLT 4x1G, 8 GPON ports Nos. 571 2.2 GPON OLT 2x10G, 8 GPON ports 34 3 CWDM Equipment Nos. 605 4 EQAM Converter with Amplifier Nos. 488 5 EDF amplifier Nos. 83 Nos. 1784 D. Sub Station Level PoP 1 GPON OLT 2x1G(10 Km) sfp, 8 GPON ports OLT 112 2 3 EDF amplifier Nos. Nos. CWDM Equipment 1784 1784 A.1 District IP MPLS Nodes S.No. Parameter Minimum Required Specifications Should be chassis based & modular architecture for scalability with Redundant Route Processor,Power supply,Switching fabric Router should be provided with 1+1 route processor, 1+1 or 1+N switch fabric and 1+1 or 1+N power supply redundancy Should have two free payload slots for future expansion. All interfaces on the routers shall provide wire-rate throughput 1 Architecture The router shall support following type of interfaces – 100GE, 10GE, 1GE interfaces.; POS 10GE, 10GE WAN PHY The router 10 Gig interfaces for SR, LR & ZR are software configurable for LANPHY/WANPHY mode. The operating system of the router shall have CPU based architecture. The modular operating system shall run all critical functions like various routing protocol, forwarding plane and management functions in separate memory protected modules. Failure of one module shall not impact operations of rest of the OS.In service bug patching should be available The router along with respective line cards should be supplied with timing protocol support such as 1588v2 (with boundary clock as well as ordinary clock (master and slave) and syncE Should be supplied with necessary power cards, data cables, connectors, CD’s, manuals, bracket accessories, wire managers and other appropriate accessories Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 3.2 Tbps. The router should have capability of minimum 3.8 million IPv4 routes and 1.8 Million IPv6 routes The proposed router should have 12 GB DRAM and GB Flash , also should support 30GB storage in SSD the router should support minimum 1.8 million MAC address, minimum 125k Pseudowires. Router should have 125k multicast routes. The router should support 32 way BGP load balancing and 32 way ECMP 2 Performance Shall support online insertion and removal (OIR) that is non-disruptive in nature. Online insertion and removal of one line card shall not lead to ANY packet loss for traffic flowing through other line cards for both unicast and multicast traffic. In case of a line card or Route Processor failure on the router; the multicast and Unicast routing, multicast and Unicast distribution and multicast replication architecture of the router shall ensure no impact & zero packet loss of multicast video, audio & data traffic running on rest of the line cards in the system All the bandwidth services terminated on the router should be equally distributed amongst multiple line cards i.e. failure of a single line card should not impact any particular bandwidth service for more than 50%. 113 3 Protocol Support Should have IPv4 Routing ,Border Gateway Protocol , Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System [IS-IS], and Open Shortest Path First [OSPF]), BGP for IPv4 and Ipv6,MPBGP,Route Policy Language (RPL), Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)/Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), IPv6 Routing, and BGP Prefix Independent Convergence ,GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) Tunneling,Multicast routing protocols IGMPv1, v2 ,v3, PIM-SM (RFC2362) and PIM-SSM,MSDP,IGMP v2 snooping,DHCPv6 and OSPFv3 for IPv6,6PE & 6VPE,MPLS Provider /Provider Edge functionality. MPLS VPN, MPLS mVPN (Multicast VPN), Carrier Supporting Carrier (CsC), DiffServ Tunnel Modes, MPLS TE (Fast re-route), DiffServ-Aware TE, Inter-AS VPN,Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), VPLS ,VPWS,Ethernet over MPLS , CESoPSN and SAToP as per RFC 4553 Router shall support MPLS OAM, Ethernet OAM protocols - CFM (IEEE 802.1ag), Link OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and ITU Y.1731. The routers shall support both L2 and L3 services on all interfaces The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and Multicast traffic. The router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4. Configuration Roll Back to recover the mis-configured router to last good configuration Shall support the following: 4 QoS Features Traffic Classification using various parameters like source physical interfaces, source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination ports, IP Precedence, 802.1p, MPLS EXP, DSCP and by some well known application types through Application Recognition techniques. Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time application like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter,Congestion Management: WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing Shall support standards based RSVP for voice & video call admission control. Ability to configure hierarchical queues in hardware for IP QoS at the egress to the edge. Minimum 126k egress and 126k ingress hardware queues per line card. 5 Security Platform must support nested hierarchical QOS policies .Router should have 4 level of scheduling for HQOS. Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet, Source & Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range etc.,Time based ACL,AAA using radius or TACACS The routers shall provide hardware accelerated feature. This feature shall be available for all interfaces provisioned on the router with hardware acceleration. Should Support MD-5 route authentication for RIP, OSPF and BGP,URPF,DHCP snooping, control plane policing,SNMPv3 authentication, SSHv2 Should have to support Out of band management through Console / external modem for remote management. Event and System logging: Event and system history logging functions shall be available. The Router shall generate system alarms on events. Facility to put selective logging of events onto a separate hardware here the analysis of log shall be available. Operating temperature - 0 to 40 degrees 6 Management The proposed router should have 230v AC Power Supply redundant power supply modules, should be hot swappable The proposed routers should have capability to check quality of the video traffic transiting through the router. The video monitoring function shall work on both IP and MPLS enabled interfaces and it should be able to measure quality metrics such as delay, jitter, MPEG MDI (RFC 4445), Media Stop Event for uncompressed and compressed video formats (MPEG). 7 Interfaces The proposed router should support 24 x 10G interfaces with 20 nos. of SR optics & 4 nos. of ER optics 114 The proposed router should have 48 x 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Certifications The proposed router should be EAL 3 certified by common Criteria body A.2 / A3 Optical Transmission Equipment (DWDM) Consists of 100G trunk system, Client interface, Amplifier, ROADM and Planning Tool A.2.a: DWDM 100G trunk system S.No. Sub Category 1 Interfaces 2 100G performance specification Requirement The proposed DWDM trunk system should be populated with following ports: 2 x 100 G trunk ports (single or dual cards) 100G DWDM Transponder must use a coherent receiver with a receive and transmit DSP. The receive DSP performs compensation for Chromatic Dispersion (CD), Polarization impairments, performs carrier phase estimation and FEC decoding. The transmit DSP performs CD precompensation, Nyquist shaping and FEC coding. Vendor must develop the DSP ASIC for the coherent DWDM Transponder in-house The Coherent DWDM Transponder must support multiple trunk side bit rates and at a minimum 50G, 100G must be supported. The bit rate must be configurable through EMS/NMS software. The modulation scheme for 100G DWDM must be CP-DQPSK (Coherent Polarized Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) also called PMQPSK. The Coherent DWDM transmitter and receiver must support atleast 40 channels in the C-Band rom 1528.77 and 1566.72nm (C-Band – 50 GHz) / 4 Channel for A3 and B2 line items 3 100G performance specification The Coherent DWDM Transponder must have a grid-less laser i.e. tunable in increments of +/- 0.1 Ghz. The minimum back to back OSNR that is required for the 100G CP-DQPSK signal to operate at a BER of IE-15 @ 0.5nm RBW should be 5.5dB the maximum reach of the 100G CP-DQPSK DWDM signal for G.652 fiber with standard specifications of loss coefficient , CD , PMD should be 4800 km The maximum Chromatic dispersion tolerance for 100G CP-QPSK DWDM signal should be 80,000ps/nm The maximum polarization mode dispersion tolerance in DGD should be 180ps 4 100G standards compliance The Output Power range of the 100G transmitter should be in "+1dBm to 1.5dBm" The minimum required Optical Return Loss should be 27 dB Support for G.709, G.975, G.691, GR-253-Core-Issue04; G8021 115 5 100G laser safety 6 100G protection 100G OTN 7 8 9 10 100G OTN performance monitoring 100G performance monitoring 100G performance monitoring Support for Automatic Laser Shutdown and restart based on ITU-T G.664 (06/99) Support for LC duplex connectors with shutters Support for UL 60950-1 - Edition 2, March 2007 Vendor must support 100G DWDM interface protection with redundant interfaces on separate DWDM cards Support for G.709 Generic Communication Channel GCC ob the 100G DWDM interface The 100-Gbps DWDM Trunk provides support for both Transparent and Non-Transparent signal transport Performance Monitoring Calculation and accumulation of the Performance Monitoring data in 15minute to 24-hour intervals as per G.7710. Should support : OPT, LBC,OPR, RCD, PMD, OSNR A.2.b: Client Interface S.No. Sub Category Requirement 1 Interfaces 2 Interfaces The proposed DWDM Client card should be populated with following ports: 10x10 Gigabit Ethernet ports on a single slot The proposed DWDM system should also support the following Ports 2 x 10 GE,/2 x 40 GE/1 x 100GE interfaces on a single slot The 10G client interfaces must support the following protocols OC-192/STM-64 (9.95328 Gbps);10GE LAN PHY (10.3125 Gbps);10G FC (10.518 Gbps);8G FC;OTU-2;Standard G.709 (10.70923 Gbps);G.709 over clocked to transport 10GE as defined by ITU-T G; Sup43 Clause 7.1 (11.0957 Gbps) 3 4 5 6 7 10G protocol support 10G pluggables 10G pluggables 10G OTN FEC 10G laser safety For grey SFP+ , SR , LR , ER and ZR reaches must be supported 10G client traffic should be transported transparently 10G client interface must support ITU-T G.975 FEC coding; ITU-T G.975.1 (Sub-clause I.7) FEC coding Support for UL 60950-1 - Edition 2, March 2007 Support for IEC 60825-1: 2001 Ed.1.2 (incl. am1+am2) Safety of laser products Part 1: Equipment classification, requirements and users guide;IEC60825-2 Ed.3 (2004) Safety of laser products Part 2: Safety of optical fiber communication systems + A1:2006; Support for f21CFR1040 (2008/04) (Accession Letter and CDRH Report) Automatic Laser Shutdown and restart (ALS) according to ITU-T G.664 (03/06). Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff (Laser Notice No. 50) , June 2007 8 10G client protection 9 10G OTN 10 10G performance monitoring Vendor must support 10G client interface protection with redundant interfaces . Support for G.709 Generic Communication Channel GCC ob the 10G client interface Calculation and accumulation of the Performance Monitoring data in 15minute to 24-hour intervals as per G.7710 SONET PM should be available according to Telcordia GR-253 standard SDH PM should be available according to ITU-T G826 / ITU-T G.828 A.2.c: Amplifier: Coherent 116 S.No. Sub Category Requirement The amplifiers should have flexibility to be Software-configured as preamplifier, post-amplifier There shall be active control of express traffic to adapt instantly the amplifier-pair to wavelength count never being affected by any degradation arising out from rapid reconfigurations. Sudden addition/removal of channels at intermediate site must not affect whole transmission of DWDM signals. The optical amplifiers shall respond automatically to changes in the number of channels without the need for manual intervention or realignment. Integrated VOA shall allow the amplifier units to automatically compensate for variations in span-attenuation due to ageing and splicing etc. 1 General The adaptation response for restoration after ILA fault, fiber-plant restoration or change in power levels etc., shall be immediate. The In Post Amplifier and Pre Amplifier shall support in built optical spectrum monitoring device, which will not only apply the correction to channels to keep the spectrum flat, but also shall be used for the monitoring of optical monitoring as per ITU-T G.697. The optical amplifiers must implement the following mechanisms to maintain error free system operation under dynamic conditions: a) Fast gain control loop: to protect against short term transient conditions such sudden loss of channels. b) Slow output power control loop: to protect against long term conditions such fiber aging. should have a single stage amplifier with no DCU stage The proposed amplifiers should have a gain range of 24 to 32 db and the gain loss of 26 db should be sustained The amplifier must have an embedded gain-flattening filter 2 coherent amplifier features The amplifiers should support two modes of operation - constant gain and constant power - while also providing Amplified Spontaneous Emission (ASE) compensation in either modes The amplifier should provide fast-transient suppression to respond quickly to network changes without adding impairments and degradation. The amplifier must have programmable tilt using software-controllable variable optical attenuators (VOAs) The amplifier should have extensive optical monitoring with photo diodes, to provide nodal- and network-based automatic power-level management. Input power range (PIN) for single channel at -5dBm output power should be 0 t0 15 dBm input power range for Full-channel load or single-channel load at 20dBm output power should be –7 to 8 dBm Output power range :–5 to 20 dBm 3 coherent amplifiers specifications ns Output power shut-off threshold: 20.5 dBm Standard gain range (with controlled gain tilt):12 to 24 dB Extended gain range (with uncontrolled gain tilt): 24 to 27 dB Gain ripple at target gain tilt = 0 dB for a single amplifier: 0.5 to 1.2 dB Gain ripple at target gain tilt = 0 dB for six amplifiers in cascade: Up to 4 dB 117 Gain tilt error at target gain tilt = 0 dB: 1 dB ±0.5 dB Gain set resolution (constant gain mode): 0.1 dB Output power set resolution (constant power mode):0.1 dB Settling time for power and gain regulation (from 10 to 90% of final set point) : 5 ms to 1 sec Short-term stability range : Gain, output power, and gain tilt: ±0.1, ±0.1, and ±0.1 dB Maximum output power in amplifier-disable mode: –15 dBm Input reflectance: 40 dB;Output reflectance: 40 dB;Backward ASE power: "-25dB";Pump-power leakage: "-20dB" Total number of 40 channels supported should be 1528 to 1570 nm 4 Optical safety amplifiers should comply to the following :EN or IEC-60825-2 Third edition (2004-06); EN or IEC 60825-1 Consol. Ed. 1.2 - incl. am1+am2 (2001-08); 21CFR1040 (2004/04) (Accession Letter and CDRH Report); IEC-60825-2 Third edition (2004-06); ITU-T G.664 (2006) 5 Safety amplifiers should comply to he following :UL/CSA 60950 -1 First Edition (2003); GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 (Type 2 and Type 4 equipment); UL/CSA 60950 -1 First Edition (2003);IEC 60950-1 (2001/10)/Amendment 11:2004 to EN 60950-1:2001, 1st Edition (with all country deviations) A.2.d: ROADM: S.No. Sub Category Requirement ROADM should be able to handle 40 different wavelengths of C- Band in each direction The ROADM at ring junctions must support at minimum 4degrees The ROADM at other nodes must support at minimum 2 degrees The ROADM shall create a fully non-blocking multi-directional optical switching node with no limitations to the number of channels added or dropped or passed through from any direction. Restrictions on dropping if any should be clearly indicated 1 ROADM specification Each side of an ROADM node is to be split logically and physically, ensuring that there are no single points of failure that would cause add/drop traffic to be lost on multiple degrees. The ROADMs must have a OCM module for power monitoring The ROADMs must have per channel VOAs to equalize all the DWDM channels - added locally and expressed ROADM must be fully remotely configurable from the EMS/NMS Add/Drop channels shall be remotely selected.in a flexible way. It must be possible to upgrade in service from two directions to multiple directions without affecting existing infrastructure or traffic. 2 Functional View The network management interface should provide a node level view of the internal patch cord connections and the signal flow in the node for all directions 118 The network management interface should provide a network level view of the internal patchcord connections of all the nodes and the end to end signal flow in the network 3 4 5 Network Functional View Power Correction Node Setup In the above network level view, it should be possible to view at all points in the network , the following Power values in dBm;Span loss values in Db;Patchcord verification for all internal connections based on the power values;Individual circuit paths and associated parameters A mechanism should be available to monitor power at a network level and correct changes in power due to channel addition / deletion and fiber degradation The planning tool should be able to generate installation files that can be loaded onto the nodes in the network through the craft interface or management interface on the node The installation file should include pre-provisioning of equipment, side information, per channel output power required for ROADM VOAs & amplifiers, Loss of Power threshold at receive ports. 6 Network Alarm Correlation A mechanism should exist for all the alarms in the network to be correlated in case of failure of OMS/OTS link and only the source alarm must be raised as critical while all other alarms are suppressed. The solution must provide a distributed GMPLS control plane that leverages routing and signalling protocol extensions to performs path computation with optical feasibility analysis and allows dynamic wavelength circuit provisioning. The GMPLS control plane must provide Automatic DWDM network topology discovery The GMPLS control plane must provide dynamic restoration of the DWDM network in case of failures. The GMPLS control plane must provide Optical channel diversity based on LSP-ID and nodes, links, and Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLG). 7 Control Plane The GMPLS control plane must allow user to specify path constraints : include or exclude nodes and links in the working and protect DWDM circuits. An in-band control channel must be provided for the GMPLS control plane. The GMPLS control plane must support the following types of circuits :1+0 ( unprotected ), 1+R ( restoration enabled ), 1+1+R ( 50ms protection and restoration enabled ) The GMPLS circuits must support revert - manual and automatic The GMPLS control plane implementation must comply to the following standards :RFC 6205, RFC 3471, RFC 3472, RFC 3473(excluding sections 3.2,4.1,12), RFC 6163, RFC 2328, RFC 4202, RFC 4203, RFC 4208 A.2.e: Planning Tool: S.No. 1 Sub Category Design Requirement Distance and insertion loss of the network spans. Standard fiber types must be supported. 119 Type and number of services required in each network location Linear effects include noise accumulation, optical power budget, and chromatic dispersion effects. Connector loss , Fiber attenuation , Equipment insertion loss , Aging loss must be accounted for. Nonlinear effects include cross-phase modulation, self-phase modulation, and four-wave mixing. The planning tool should be able to create an optimal DWDM infrastructure capable of any-to-any service delivery for linear, ring, multi-tiring, and mesh networks. The planning tool must manage direct interconnection of DWDM interfaces. The Planner must accommodate third-party DWDM interfaces by allowing the user to input interface-specific parameters and then using this interface in the network design. 2 Features The planning tool must enable evaluation and definitions of changes requested to scale and evolve an existing network (delta planning). It should allow you to add and remove ROADM nodes from a design, add new services to the network, and change the flexibility associated with an existing or a planning design. Delta planning should give a complete set of reporting features to help determine what needs to be changed and where, at both the node and network levels which includes installation parameters , patch cord connections and BOM The output from Transport Planner provides content must contains 1. System performance reporting 2. Bill-of-materials (BoM) generation 3. Graphical layouts of racks and shelf configurations, 4. Optical connections between nodes, 5. Downloadable provisioning and configuration settings for each optical node. 6. Power consumption of each node with shelf and card wise breakup of data For each of the services defined at the network level, the Planner must provide the relevant optical parameters required to understand whether or not the traffic could be supported.This includes SOL / EOL OSNR , SOL /EOL OSNR Margin , SOL /EOL receive power , SOL/EOL power margin , residual CD , PMD , SNLE , MNLE and filtering penalty. 3 Design outputs The tool must provide a graphical layout of the racks, shelves, and units of each network location, so this information can be available during the planning or installation of the network. The Planner must provide a complete list of the optical path cords that have to be installed between the different units to allow the proper signal flow at the node and network levels. The planner must support situations in the field when the fiber parameters may differ from those considered in the original design. In this case, it should be possible to validate the design against the new fiber data without changing the overall BoM. Automatic data exchange between design and network. The planning tool should be able to generate provisioning files, which you then can use to configure the relevant optical parameters at the node level. In addition, you should be able to use the same file to pre-provision the individual cards in the nodes of the network, allowing you to make sure the installation in the field has been properly done, even before the first DWDM wavelength is provisioned across the nodes of the network. 120 The planning tool result must show a functional view of the nodes that indicates how cards are connected to each other and the signal flow through the node The planning tool should generate wavelength routing information in a table to show how wavelengths are routed across the network at both a quick glance and as a detailed report. The planning tool should generate link availability data of all links based on MTBF and MTTR A.4 Optical Line Amplifier for DWDM Refer A.2.c Specifications of Electronic BoQ A.5 CWDM Equipment S.No Product Description Features: CWDM should realize the multiplexing and de-multiplexing between 1550, 1490/1310nm 1 Low Insertion Loss Low PDL High Isolation Excellent Environment Reliability Applications: Line Monitoring WDM System 2 LAN Fiber Optical amplifier CATV System 3 Connector type Pigtail Parameter 2-4 Channel Mux Demux Channel Wavelength (nm) 1270~1610 Center wavelength Accuracy (nm) ±0.5 Channel Spacing (nm) 20 Channel Passband (@-0.5dB bandwidth (nm) >13 Insertion Loss (dB) ≤1.6 Channel Uniformity (dB) ≤0.6 4 Channel Ripple (dB) 0.3 121 Isolation (dB) 5 Adjacent >30 Non-adjacent >40 Insertion Loss Temperature Sensitivity (dB/C) <0.005 Wavelength Temperature Shifting (nm/C) <0.002 Polarization Dependent Loss (dB) <0.1 Polarization Mode Dispersion (PS) <0.1 Directivity (dB) >50 Return Loss (dB) >45 Minimum Power Handling (db) >26db Operating Temperature (C) Packaging -5~+75 1 to 8 (mux units) in a sigle box A.6 GPON OLT Refer C.2.1 / C2.2 Specifications of Electronic BoQ A.7 EQAM Converter with Amplifier Refer B.3 Specifications of Electronic BoQ B.1 Zonal IP MPLS Nodes B.1.1 / B.1.2 Zonal Hub IP MPLS Router 8x10G / 12x10G S.No. Parameter Minimum Required Specifications Router shall support redundant Data and control Plane. There should not have impact to Data Plane traffic during software upgrade. Smallest RU factor would be preferred. Router should have redundant controller cards and should support stateful switch over, nonstop forwarding, Non-stop routing and Graceful restart. Router should be CE2.0 and MEF14.0 certified. 1 Architecture Router shall support MEF for Ethernet based services like PW, VPLS or ATOM. In case of failure of any single route processor non of the line card traffic should be impacted Router shall support sync any configurations from previous modules to new modules with hotswap event occurred The Chassis should have one free slot for future expansion. The router shall support following type of interfaces – 10GE, 1GE interfaces; 10GE WAN PHY and 10G, Ch.STM1. Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 120Gbps. The router should have 4GB DRAM , Router shall support 170 Mpps forwarding performance for IPv4 & IPv6 performance 2 Performance Router shall support 16000 Mac addresses Router shall support 18000 IPv4 routes router shall support 8000 queues and 128 MPLS VPN's Router shall support aggregation of links. Minimum 8 link should be supported as part of 122 single aggregation. Router shall support IPSLA or equivalent and Y.1731 for performance monitoring. Router should support Redundant Power Supply and should also support On line insertion and removal of same. 3 High Availability Fan tray should be hot-swappable, and should be a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). The node can run indefinitely with a single fan failure. Shall Support hot-swappable for all modules. And secure normal operations when hot-swap event occurred All cards should be provided in redundancy and distributed on different slots. Router shall support MPLS-TE with FRR for sub 50 msec protection. 4 Protocol Support Router must support Traffic Engineering for node and link protection. Router shall support IPV4 and IPV6,IGMP V2/V3,MLD,IGMP and PIM,6PE and 6VPE mode for IPV6 transport over IPV4, ECMP,LDP,BGP Prefix independent control (EDGE and Core) for IPV4 and IPV6,BGP,IS-IS,OSPFv2and V3,RSVP,VRRP,Loop free alternate FRR (IPFRR) and Traffic Engineering. Router should support high availability for all BFD,BGP ,OSPF and IS-IS and no packet loss during controller switch over. Router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4 The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and Multicast traffic. Router shall support layer3 and layer2 MPLS VPN. Router shall support HQOS on all kind of interface in both ingress and egress direction. Similar QOS shall be supported for all type of interface including Bundled interfaces. 5 QoS Features Shall support Ingress classification, marking and policing on physical interfaces and logical interfaces using source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination ports, IP Precedence, MPLS EXP, DSCP,802.1p Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time application like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter. Congestion Management: WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet, Source & Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range etc. Should Support per-user Authentication, Authorization and Accounting through RADIUS or TACACS and SNMPv1/v2/V3 6 Security & Management 7 Operating Environmental Requirements 8 Interface The proposed router should support the following :- 8 x 10G interfaces loaded with 10G SR SFP+ Optics + 8x1Gig Interfaces loaded with 1 G LX SFP interfaces 9 Certifications The proposed router should be NDPP v1.1 certified by common Criteria body -40ºC to 65ºC operating temperature and 5 to 95%, non-condensing B.2.1 / B.2.2 Zonal Hub DWDM with 4x10G protected client & 2x100G trunk Ports Consists of 100G trunk system, Client interface, Amplifier, ROADM and Planning Tool Refer to A.2.a to A.2.e Specifications of Electronic BoQ B.3 EQAM Converters with Amplifier to 1550nm Video B.3.a - IP QAM 123 S. No. Description 1 Output 24 RF-QAM Channels or 12 DVB-T channels for both SD and HD programs 2 Support programs input from both ASI (four different sources) and GBE IP (up to 256 SPTS) 3 Support stream processing including PID remapping and EPG data insertion QAM RF Outputs 4 Physical Outputs Two connectors for RF Output Frequency Range 48 -862 MHz Output Frequency Step Size 50 KHz RF Channel 24 (6/7/8 MHz) QAM Modulation Mode 64/128 QAM QAM Type ITU-T J.83 Annex A/ C, Annex B (64/256QAM) Symbol Rate 1.0~6.9 MBauds Output Level 5 6 7 Effective, per channel 90~115 dBuV Combined, 24 channel 90~106dBuV MER ≥40dB (Equalized) BER GBE IP Input ≤5×10-9 (64QAM,6.875Msps) Interface 1 x 1000 Mbps per port IP Encapsulation MPEG TS over UDP/RTP MPEG TS MPTS and SPTS I/O Processing Up to 12 Sockets(MPTS), Addressing 256Sockets(SPTS) max at 72 Mbps per socket Unicast and Multicast Management IGMPv1, IGMPv2, IGMPv3 Forward Error Correction Re-multiplexing ProMPEG PID Re-mapping and Filtering MPTS Output Synchronization Routing Any Input to Any Output Redundancy Input Service Redundancy & IP Port Redundancy Management 8 Interface 1000Base-TX, RJ45 NMS 9 Web-based Management (future feature) Support SNMP 10 Physical & Environment Input Voltage 90 – 260 VAC Power Consumption Approx 100 W Rack Space 1 RU Dimension (WxHxD) 480mm x 44mm x 440mm Operating Temperature 0o to 50oC Storage Temperature -40o to 65oC Relative Operating Humidity <95% 124 B.3.b EDF Amplifier S.No. Description 1 Description Optic Operation wave length nm Min 1540 Typ 1550 Max 1564 2 3 Input power Range Output power per port (dbm) (dbm) 13 10 24 22 26 24 4 5 6 Gain fitness Noise figure Snmp network Management db db 4.5 RJ45 5.5 5.5 7 Communication interface RS232/Rj 45 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Power supply Power consume Operating temp Humidity Rack mountable - 1U Optic port Input port Output ports Rf Input impedance Rf Input return Loss 210-265v Ac 50 W 5-65 c 95 % 1 4/8 75ohms db Rf input level CNR Flatness Frequency range dBuV dB dB 47-750 MHZ 16( 47-550mHz) 14(55-750mhz) 78-88 51.5 (+-.75) B.4 CWDM Equipment Refer to A.5 Specifications of Electronic BoQ B.5 GPON OLT Refer C.2.1 / C2.2 Specifications of Electronic BoQ C.1.1 / C.1.2 Mandal IP MPLS Nodes S.No. Minimum Required Technical Specifications 1 Router should support have 62 Gbps of switching capacity 2 The Router shall be standalone fixed configuration Chassis or stackable system with redundant power supply. 3 A single point failure on the equipment shall not result in network or network management system downtime 4 Router should support Quality of service for marking, Prioritising and assuring bandwidth Guarantee. Classification can be done based on DSCP,Priority,IP addressand 802.1p. 125 5 Router should also support RSVP for end to end bandwidth guarantee. 6 Router should support modular QoS with Multilevel Priority Queue along with weighted fair queuing. 7 Router should also support Policy for control plane protection 8 The router should have 4Gb DRAM and 2GB flash 9 The router should support 12 Mb buffers 10 The Router should support multilevel priority scheduling for voice and video applications with minimal jitter, latency and packet loss. The Routershall support fault-tolerant connections to other network or shared media segment to protect against a primary link failure. If the primary link fails, the backup path shall be automatically activated to maintain network connectivity and throughput. The Router should support the following protocols: BGP,MPBGP,OSPF ,RFC 3107 ,OSPFv2 and v3,Loop free alternate ,IP FRR,6PE,6VPE,VPLS,Layer2 VPN,uRPF,PIMSM and PIM SSM. 11 12 13 The router should support fast convergence protocols like G.8032, IPFRR,MPLS FRR,BGP prefix independent convergence,VRRP or equivalent and BFD for Routing protocols. 14 The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and Multicast traffic. 15 The proposed router shall support 3 level H-QoS 16 The proposed router shall support Layer 2 and Layer 2 multicast 17 It shall support Ethernet Ring protection based on ITU-T G.8032 v2 18 It shall support the following protocols:- 19 The Router shall support both IPv4 and IPv6 20 The router should suport Internet Group Management Protocol versions 2 and 3 (IGMPv2 and v3) ,IP/MPLS,IP FRR,BGP PIC,MPLS LDP,MPLS TE 21 The Router should support layer 2 and layer 3 MPLS VPN. 22 Shall support Frame sizes from 64 bytes to 1600 and to 9216 bytes on all ports 23 Router shall work as DHCP relay agent 24 Router should support Eight No of hardware queues are required for per port for flow treatment of traffic,Policy Based QOS,WRED,WFQ,HQOS,Ethernet OAM and Y.1731 performance management 25 The router should support Zero touch provisioning for ease of management 26 The Router must support the following security features:- 27 Security through ACL filters for layers 2 and layer 3 traffic, MAC address limits and storm control for broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast,Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) with TACACS+ and RADIUS,URPF 28 Router should support 12 xGESFP and 2 x 10G Ports. Each loaded 4 x 1G Copper RJ 45 / Copper SFP port, 6 x 1G SFP ports loaded with 1G x LX SFP with 10 Kms range and 2 x 10G SFP with ER SFP+ with a range of 40 kms 29 Certifications: The proposed router should be NDPP v1.1 certified by common Criteria body C.2.1 / C.2.2 GPON OLT S.No. 1 Technical Specifications Generic Requirements 126 The FTTx solution should be based on GPON, XG-PON1 / Point-to-Point Active Ethernet . 2 Service Interfaces GPON, 2.5G downstream, 1.25G upstream. The equipment must be able to operate at the physical distance of 20 km and above (between OLT and ONU/ONT) without any additional amplification required. The OLT should support 1310 and 1490 nm wavelengths No . Of Subscribers per GPON port minimum is 128 (Splitting ratio 1:128) The system shall be support multiple GbE / 10xGbE network connections. The FTTx platform shall be modular, with minimum of 40Gbps switching capacity. The Interfaces for the offered FTTx systems shall be of “plug in type (PIU) SFP modules” 3 The offered OLTs/MDUs/HGWs shall be inter-operable with any third party ONTs as per the OMCI standards and must at least be certified by the Broadband Forum BBF.247. Inter-operability tests shall be done with different vendors Network management Unified Network Management system (NMS) shall be offered . The required NMS in addition to management of network elements shall be incorporated optionally with special network planning and management tools for managing all connections through the FTTx network and modelling, planning and span design for FTTx networks etc. Bidder shall offer Network Management System for the offered equipment to provide the capabilities for configuration, operation, monitoring, remote monitoring, fault localization, and data storage. 4 FTTx SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS compliant to the relevant ISO/ETSI industry quality standards (e.g. ISO 9000/9001), defining the quality system requirements for the design, development, production, delivery, installation and maintenance of product and services. The offered equipment shall be able to inter-work with the other user end equipment supplied by other vendors as per ITU-T specifications. The offered equipment shall support single fiber operation on standard SMF G.652, G.655 & G.657. The IGMP forwarding capabilities on OLT should be no less than 2000pps, The equipment shall support IPv4 and IPV6. The equipment shall detect the optical power transmission of every ONT, once that it detects some problems in the status of the optical transmission power. The system shall disable the defective ONT automatically in order to guarantee the normally use of the others. 5 The following VLAN Operations need to be supported: Mapping of subscriber VLAN to a common service VLAN Translate/re-write subscribers VLAN ID to another VLAN ID VLAN switching Mapping of the subscriber traffic based on the IEEE 802.1p priority tagging to a specific VLAN. Mapping of the subscriber traffic based on the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID to a specific VLAN Mapping of the subscriber traffic based on the combination of IEEE 802.1p and 802.1Q tagging to a specific VLAN 6 Subscriber Access methods supported DHCP,DHCP option 82/60/43/37/18,Static IP,PPPoE Shall support multiple service delivery of data, voice and video. Shall support IP policing at the network and subscriber end. shall support Ethernet 802.1p and IP TOS bit prioritization. The OLTs shall be able to support mobile traffic backhauling. 127 support for the Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS), 10 MHz, 1 pulse per second (1PPS), and time of day (TOD) interfaces. supports synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) and IEEE-1588 functionalities, and Shall act as the source for network clocking for TDM, SDH and SONET, SyncE, and GPS interfaces. In addition to the timing services The Equipment must support IP Multicasting to cater for interactive services such as broadcast IPTV, distance learning, etc. The detail implementation of multicasting mechanism must be explained. Static routing and Dynamic routing 7 QoS Features supported Trusted connectivity where the QoS setting / traffic prioritization configured by customer can be preserved. Un-trusted connectivity where the QoS setting / traffic prioritization configured by customer can be overwritten by the Equipment. The detail Downstream and Upstream QoS and traffic prioritization mechanism supported inclusive of the hardware queue available for each direction. A minimum of 8 hardware queues should be supported at both directions. The OLT should implement some queuing mechanism to manage the hardware queue such as SP, WRR, etc. Management System shall support bandwidth provisioning starting from 64 kbps granularity. Shall support Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBA) mechanism to allow optimum bandwidth utilization on each PON interface. The detail implementation and capability of DBA mechanism should be explained in detail. The offered NG-PON equipment shall support a complete T-Cont type (Type 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5) according to ITU-T G.983.4. The bidder shall explain the T-Cont types supported and typical usage of each of it respectively. Shall support basic OAM features such as loop back, remote diagnostic, CC and Link Trace complies with IEEE 802.1ag. Shall support port-mirroring function for trouble shooting, monitoring, and tracing purpose. The bidder shall explain the port-mirroring function mechanism in detail. 8 ITU-T / IEEE RELATED SPAECIFICATIONS Shall comply to ITU-T/IEEE recommendations. ITU-T G.652: Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber and cable. ITU-T G.757: Characteristics of a Bending Loss Insensitive Single Mode Optical Fiber and Cable for the Access Network ITU-T G.703: Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interface. ITU-T G.704: Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 Kbit/s hierarchical levels. ITU-T G.823: The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 Kbit/s hierarchy. ITU-T G.983.4: A broadband optical access system with increased service capability using dynamic bandwidth assignment. ITU-T G.984.1: GPON General Characteristics. ITU-T G.984.2: GPON Physical Media Dependent (PMD) layer specification. ITU-T G.984.3: GPON Transmission convergence layer specification. ITU-T G.984.4: GPON ONT management and control interface specification. ITU-T G.987.1: XG-PON, General requirements. ITU-T G.987.2: XG-PON, Physical media dependent (PMD) layer specification. ITU-T G.987.3: XG-PON, Transmission convergence (TC) specifications ITU-T G.988: XG-PON, ONU management and control interface (OMCI) specification ITU-T G.698.3: Seeded WDM-PON ITU-T G.8261: Timing and Synchronization aspects in packet networks. ITU-T G.8262: Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave lock. IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridges 128 IEEE 802.1ag Ethernet OAM IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802.1p VLAN prioritization IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol of at least 8 ports, based on port-based, address-based, and round robin IEEE 802.1p VLAN prioritization. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging. IEEE 802.3 10 Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802.3u 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet IEEE 802.3ad Ethernet Link Aggregation IEEE 802.3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3x Flow Control IETF RFC 2131: DHCP IETF RFC 2132: DHCP Options and BOOTP Tenderer Extensions IETF RFC 2236: Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2. IETF RFC 2933: Internet Group Management Protocol Management Information Base IETF RFC 3046: DHCP Relay Agent Info Option (Option 82) IETF RFC 3376: Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3 Any other standards inter-related with all the above Specifications and any other standards deemed necessary by the bidder. 9 OLT Hardware features The OLT shall be rack mountable and meet ETSI standards for indoor equipment requirement. The OLT shall be designed to Operate at 210- 250 V ac Dual Redundant Power supplies Operatim temp 0 to 65 centigrade Fan is required for cooling the OLT to force airflow. The OLT shall provide one craft port for local configuration access. The OLT shall support one 10/100M Ethernet port for linking with EMS. The 10 equipment must support a minimum splitting ratio of 32 splits or more. Physical interfaces supported/loaded Supporting Ethernet interfaces towards the FTTx network is the mandatory requirement. The offered OLT should support 4 GPON interfaces, 4 x 1G SFP interfaces ,4 x 10 G SFP+ interfaces The offered OLT should be expandable to support additional 4 x GPON interfaces . C.3 CWDM Equipment Refer to A.5 Specifications of Electronic BoQ C.4 EQAM Converter with Amplifier Refer to B.3 Specifications of Electronic BoQ 129 C.5 EDF Amplifier Refer to B.3.b Specifications of Electronic BoQ D.1 OLT Refer to C.2.1/C.2.2 specifications of Electronic BoQ D.2 EDF Amplifier Refer to B.3.b Specifications of Electronic BoQ D.3 CWDM Equipment Refer to A.5 specifications of Electronic BoQ APPENDIX – 3 NOC BOQ S.No. Item description including Specification Unit of Measurement (UOM) Quantity A. Network Operating Centre (Proposed to be located at Visakhapatnam) 1 EMS, OSS, BSS, NMS Interfaces, GIS Interfaces and Fault Management and Video wall for NMS Set 1 1.1 1.2 EMS GPON EMS Nos. Nos. 1 1 1.3 OSS/BSS Nos. 1 1.4 Video wall for NMS Nos. 1 Electronics (IPMPLS and DWDM, Raman amplifiers for 100G Backbone and total capacity of 1.3Gbps) for State HQ POP with Meetme roomcross connects. Set 1 2.1 Core IP MPLS Router Nos. 2 2.2 Core Switch Nos. 2 2.3 Firewall Nos. 4 Set 1 Nos. 2 2 3 3.1 ISP peering Routers, Upstream Routers, BRAS, CGNAT(IPV4&IPv6), CDN and Video streaming system, Caching system, Lawful intercept system, Blade chassis, AAA servers, Storage. BRAS Router 130 3.2 4 5 Server pool for OSS/ BSS , Caching & Storage Civil and Electrical Infra with 20KVA UPS(1+1), Silent DG of 45 KVA(1+1), Air conditioning and Earthing, Fire and Safety Facilities. IP Phones, Videoconference equipment. CATV Headend with Antenna Farm ( 250 channel- 20 HD, 230 SD / MPEG 4) Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 A. Network Operation Center EMS & NMS 1.1 EMS Software S.No Technical Specifications 1 The EMS shall support capability for monitoring and configuration of DWDM based Optical and IP/MPLS network through NOC 2 EMS shall support single management system for optical and IP/MPLS network to provide ease of operation. 3 EMS shall be capable of providing the FCAPS functionality to the network. EMS shall provide all necessary information to NMS on standard interfaces. 4 EMS for Network Elements shall support northbound open interfaces such as SNMP/JAVA/CORBA/XML for integration with the NMS. 5 The EMS system shall support SNMPv1, v2 & v3. 6 EMS shall support client–server based architecture. Client being GUI/web browser based access with secure interface to the server. 7 EMS should allow the user to zoom down to the port level of any given card /equipment. 8 EMS should support Scheduler to handle administrative operations to be performed repeatedly at a particular time of day. Such as: NE configuration backup, software image download, operator login/logout attempts, etc. 9 EMS must support below network element software management:- 10 a. Loading of new software images. b. Management of multiple versions of software . c. Installation of software updates. d. Software download status reporting. e. Administrator authorization for the loading of software f. Coordination for the software download to multiple end element based on a single software source. g. Version control for all network . h Administrator authorization for the loading of software 11 The EMS GUI should allow authorised personnel to create and activate end-to-end services. 12 The EMS should be able to provision, configure and manage network for DWDM and IP/MPLS 13 EMS should allow service and equipment provisioning. 14 The Management System shall be able to auto-discover the Network elements and the corresponding connections between them. 131 15 The EMS should support provision of creation, addition, deletion, updation and viewing capability of the managed network 16 The system should support health monitoring of all modules and indicate health of the system and connectivity. 17 The Management System shall support the provisioning of :All equipment parameters. Threshold Crossing Alert(TCA) Alarm Severity Alarms should be categorised into different categories e.g. Emergency/Critical, Flash/Major, Immediate/Minor, Priority/Warning, Deferred/Informative depending upon the severity of the alarm. 18 19 EMS should be able to display the Network Elements and the links in different colours depending upon their status for healthy, degraded and critical alarm conditions. 20 Dashboard should indicate the number of active alarms with filtering options based on the period, duration, severity, event type and location. 21 The NMS system should support email or SMS feature for informing user 22 All failure and restoration events should be time-stamped. 23 The GUI shall provide the ability to create, delete and modify topology views of the network. 24 EMS should be based on operations 25 EMS Should support editing that provides the ability to view, edit, and delete all aspects of a device’s configuration. 26 EMS should support audit logs 27 EMS Should support rapid deployment of DWDM based Optical and IP/MPLS network. 28 EMS Should support APIs for customization and integration. 29 The system should be able to create performance reports and Alarm reports. These reports shall be HTML or pdf which can be dynamically generated and sent over e-mail. 30 The system should allow creation of group profiles with multiple users as member and should facilitate with similar access policy and permission. 31 The EMS should support RADIUS/TACACS based access control open, secure, and scalable software for optimizing network infrastructure and Other Requirements related to EMS and NMS: EMS and NMS requirements The NMS + EMS interface combined must provide accurate accounting of bandwidth consumption delayed by at most 4 hours, at least on a rolling 4 hour basis. Consumption accounting data must be accurate to within 5% and must be split into intra-AP (AP grid) consumption, out of grid - in India consumption and international bandwidth consumption. This data must be made available by Mac and by static IP address on a defined, authenticated REST API for use by BSS. EMS should also have the facility to monitor the UPS. Consumer SLAs that need to be supported by the System 1. Consumers include both households and businesses 2. Ability to enroll, conclude payments, provision and activate the connection including the CPE hardware with running WiFi within 4 hour of first on-site visit. On-site visit assumes Fiber is already present to house kerb, corner or floor and person has visited the home/ business. 3. Average end-to-end activation (as defined above) time of 48 hrs from time of confirmed order from consumer in areas where fiber is already at the kerb, corner or the floor 132 4. Average end-to-end activation time of 96 hours from time of confirmed order from consumer in areas where fiber has at least reached the nearest street intersection or the building assuming poles exist to pull fiber on from the relevant intersection to the unit and right of way is clear in the building 5. V2: Pro-active alerts to consumers if the sub-network or port serving them has gone down along with an expected ETA based on prior data instantly and estimate ETA after analysis within 1 hour of outage. 6. V2: Pro-active alerts to consumers and businesses who subscribe to business quality service when outage is imminent or under threat based on level of alerts desired by consumer Note, in the above SLAs, Saturday, Sunday, Government holidays and local holidays are excluded but these should be clearly listed on the Fiber Grid and ISP website. Performance SLA: Each consumer bill must also include the in-state latency, jitter and packet loss experienced by the consumer from their GPON port onwards. Any consumer whose experience does not meet the stated criteria shall not be billed except for international bandwidth as per actuals. This feature should also be available in the system. 1.2 GPON EMS: S.No. Description General: The management system shall be able to auto-discover the network including the network elements. The management system shall provide access using remote clients that use HTTP. 1 The functionalities layers: of the offered NMS and EMS system shall cover these management Network Element Management Layer: This shall manage the Network Elements such as their configuration, alarms or performance. Network Management Layer: This shall manage end-to-end network connectivity, network level protection, network level paths and performance and other network level issues. The NMS must support a northbound interface. Graphical User Interface: The offered NMS system shall employ Graphical User Interface that allows users to manage the network through a multilevel window. (i.e. Network and Sub networks Maps window). The offered NMS system shall allow the Users to perform, but not restricted to, the following operations on the Network and Sub network Maps: 2 View the alarm conditions of the OLT‟s, ONTs, MDUs,… View the performance parameters of an individual link. Zoom in and out on the Network Map including the ability to define a custom sub- network map. The graphical user interface shall provide a cascading menu and a graphical display of the shelf layout that allows users to move from shelf to board to port menus and execute commands for that menu. The Graphical User Interface shall provide an End-to-end Network view that could span sub networks. 3 Configuration Management: The offered NMS shall support managing ports (enable / disable). The offered NMS shall support the ability to perform a remote inventory. 133 Software Management: This shall include the ability to download software loads, activate new software loads, or get information about the active software load). The offered NMS shall provide the facility to perform backup & restore of the node configuration via non-volatile memory on the OLT or via the NMS database. Fault Management: Users shall have the ability to define customizable alarms in terms of severity levels and filtering. Alarms shall be consistent in terms of marking them with appropriate colors. There shall be mechanisms to provide for fault isolation. There shall be connectivity and loopback testing capability in all technologies to help isolate faults. There shall be alarm correlation to prevent a flood of alarms. Equipment alarms shall be localized up to the board and port level of a specific shelf of a specific node. 4 The alarms shall be audible and/or bring up a pop-up window if appropriate. The NMS shall allow users to create a Trouble Ticket for any alarms. This trouble ticket should allow users to enter comments on that alarm. There shall be a provision to run diagnostics on network elements, cards or links manually. There shall be scheduler to run diagnostics at certain times and report problems as alarms. A scheduler shall also be available to collect performance metrics from network elements to the network management system. 5 Event Logging: There shall be a mechanism for alarms and logging including all user actions. The logging shall be customizable for specific types of events or alarms. 6 Performance Management: The management system shall provide the ability to set thresholds on performance metrics and generate alarms from these thresholds. The management system shall provide capacity planning reports that provide long-term traffic analysis to help in deciding whether to upgrade links or nodes. Security Management: Illegal access to the management system shall be prevented; all users shall have a User Id and Password, which defines their access level with the management system. The offered NMS system shall allow for Domain creation and partitioning, each domain being a different access level of part of the network or different function. 7 It shall be possible to assign specific users to a particular domain, so the domain access can be restricted to the assigned users only. Users assigned to a specific Domain shall have different levels of authorization (i.e. different functions and privileges). Local access via the Local Craft Terminal to any managed Network Element or node shall be controlled by the network management system. 134 The management system shall be able to detect a Local Craft Terminal connection to any Network element or node. In the event of the management system crash, there shall be a way for the local craft terminal to still have access to the device. MANAGEMENT FEATURES & FUNCTIONALITIES: Additions of OLT‟s/MDU's to the NMS shall not require any licenses as long as the maximum capacity of the proposed NMS is not reached. The NMS shall not require any licenses for the hosted CPE (ONT). The Local craft Terminal (LCT) license shall be of un-limited use Software updates including maintenance versions shall be free of cost for the next two years. The Network Management proposal shall include all the Hardware and software requirements including servers, work station, PC, system and third part software licenses and services. 8 It should be possible to download software remotely, with or without NMS. For upgrade/downgrade purposes, the offered product should have active memory andstandby memory for ease of upgrade/downgrade. It should be possible to downgrade a software in the offered system/ Network Element Bidder shall provide a matrix table showing the compatibility of different NMS versions with different OLT/MDU software versions and different Hardware versions. The offered management system shall be equipped with the XML, SNMP and TMF CORBA open and standard interfaces for easy integration. The bidder shall specify the management procedure and interface for the local and remote management of the offered system. All the related telecom industry supported standards shall be quoted to support the above. 1.3 OSS / BSS Specifications The following requirements outline the OSS and BSS system required for the AP Fiber grid. These requirements are keeping in mind the advanced design of the AP Fiber grid and requirements of the consumers as well as service providers as envisioned in the AP Fiber grid project. These requirements include features required for system SLAs and operational SLAs. The operational SLAs must be demonstrated with at least one ISP in one mandal each in rural and urban areas, documented along with procedures others can follow. Proposed Application Architecture 135 Application Architecture Network CRM Service Assurance Marketing & Campaign Management Order Entry Customer Management Order Management Service Provisioning Number Inventory (IP Nos) Web Self Care Web Self Care Trouble Tickets Incident Management MRAS Payments MIS, Reports & Analytics Systtem Payments Collections Payment Gateway Billing Billing Data Mediation Rating and Billing Invoice Generation Components of OSS / BSS Customer Management 1 CRM Order Management ( Capture, Validation, Submission Order Orchestration, Fulfilment and Closure) Integration with MRAS Trouble Tickets – Case management Data Mediation Invoicing 2 Billing Partner Management Payments Payment Gateway Provisioning Network Inventory 3 Service Assurance Activation and Service Management IP Number Management 4 Web Self Care Web Self Care 136 Operational Reports, Analytics 5 MIS, Reporting and Analytics System Reconciliation, Auditing 6 Contact Centre Contact Centre Operations OSS BSS Applications and Software OSS BSS Software consists of applications with broad functional capabilities proposed to be supplied and integrated under this project are as given below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. CRM(Customer Management, Order Entry, Trouble Tickets) Billing(Order Management, Rating) Payment Gateway Service Assurance Web Self Care MIS, Reporting and Analytics System (MRAS) Contact Centre All proposed applications modules shall operate from the same Database cluster Note: All Applications and Modules supplied and integrated must support MULTI-TENANCY i.e the system must support MSOs, ISPs etc. be TENANTS of the system who would in turn in their own right support their customers using the system without any user count / asset count restrictions Description of Application Modules 1. Customer Relationship Management (CRM) is set of features and processes that include best practices helpful to learn more about customers' needs and behaviours in order to develop stronger relationships with them. CRM Analysts study stored information related to customers’ habits and behaviours to create methods that increase prospects for sale, productivity, profit and popularity of services. It involves using technology to organize, automate and synchronize sales, marketing, customer service and technical support. General Requirement 1. CRM solution shall provide a single customer information repository as such must have access to information in all other proposed applications and modules. 2. CRM system needs to be accessed through call centre and web self-care system. 3. It shall provide capability for multiple user sessions to synchronize subsets of user’s application business data. 4. It shall support LDAP authentication capability. 5. The solution shall interface seamlessly with the web self-care, Billing, NMS (NMS includes provisioning / activation), Order management, etc. 6. The system shall have the capabilities to track and present all the necessary information like customer details, product details, Contract / SLA details etc. 7. The CRM system should provide interface to apply for AP Fiber services through web. 137 8. CRM System should enable acquisition of the customer online by filling the forms electronically by the customers using appropriate authentication methods. 9. CRM shall maintain flexible parent child hierarchy of customers at multiple levels (configurable) at three levels (Ex. Unit level, Zonal level, Circle level / Corporate level etc). Accordingly it shall be possible to present both a consolidated bill as well as breakup bill for various items, which needs to be configured in CRM. The Solution should support defining child accounts as paying or non-paying entities. 10. AP Fiber should be able to configure the marketing advertisements to be displayed on the bills. The display can be depending on the category of the customer. It shall also be configured for a specific customer. These marketing messages can also appear in the online bill report. 11. The system should have the capability to display the Call Centre Executive (CCE) Screen in NOC Call centre giving both Customer service-related & Infrastructure-related view with correlation i.e. the system should able to present the information to the CCE in case there is fault in any network element the system should be able to present the information for the customers affected due to this element. 12. Integration Capabilities - The system shall provide Integration tools, including adaptors and object interfaces. a. Service Assurance (Provisioning, etc) b. Web Self care c. Billing system (Order Management) d. Payment Gateway e. MRAS (MIS, Reports & Analytics System) f. Industry standard GIS applications g. Other systems such as MS applications -Word, Excel, Outlook, Exchange, Scheduler, etc.; SMTP, POP3; Workforce Management tools etc 13. The system shall allow a single sign-on with transparent logon to the Billing system, meaning that the agent shall have a consolidated desktop application. There shall be no need to launch the Billing application from the CRM system 14. The system shall allow access of billing information within the CRM GUI. 15. The system should be capable to handle number of concurrent CRM users for each role including number of concurrent CRM web-self-care users 16. The system shall support various activities regarding Billing and adjustments through the CRM GUI such as a. Display of customer current billing information and services b. Customer Hierarchy and relevant billing information c. Manage bill adjustments d. View bill images – from a Billing archive system e. View billed charges and usage f. Request bill reprint/resend g. Request statements h. Bill Disputes i. Post a payment j. Display of Payment History etc. Functional Requirement 1. Marketing The CRM system shall enable the following complete business flow related to sales, marketing and ordering 1.1 The system shall manage leads, including lead generation, qualification, definition of optimal sale states, and analysis of sales and marketing performance 138 1.2 The system shall forward sales leads to appropriate business teams or individuals (field or telesales) 1.3 It will track marketing programs and link opportunities with marketing programs so that the ROI of marketing programs can be measured accurately and future marketing programs planned with these inputs 1.4 System must have features to perform outbound marketing / telemarketers calls assisted by predefined scripting/screen popup functionality (proactively calling prospects and customers to inform them of promotions and incentives, including descriptions, timeframes, and pricing 1.5 System must have capability to predefine flow steps to help CSRs up-sell/cross-sell a suite of products. The results of the survey shall be easily analyzable at a consolidated as well as detailed level. 2. Campaign Management The Campaign Management applications are responsible for managing the life cycle of marketing campaigns. CRM users can create the many types of marketing campaigns such as E-mail, Newsletter, Mail, Web, Radio, Television, Print, and Telesales. 2.1 The Marketing Management application shall provide Campaign Management, Budgeting, Segmentation, List Management, Promotion Management, deliverable Management, Direct and Indirect Fulfillment and Multi-Channel Execution features. 2.2 Maintains campaign records 2.3 Capability to create and execute campaigns through various media like Mail, Radio, News Paper, News Letter, E-mail, SMS etc 2.4 Capability to measure success of campaigns through statistics based on response received 2.5 Capability to maintain history and cost of Campaign 2.6 Other marketing tools involve Marketing Reports, Campaign ROI Analysis etc 2.7 Marketing and Analytics: System should perform marking and analytics requirement 3. Product Management 3.1 Product Catalogue Management 3.2 The Product Catalogue displays a list of all possible products that AP FIBER provides which should contain: a. Product types b. Categories c. Class of Services d. Price, Adds / modifies tariff / products e. Time period based offers 3.3 CRM Administrator defines / update product catalogue, based on the network capability to offer various services and business viability of those services. Tariffs and offers in product catalog are to be defined by Billing System 3.4 Following products/services as an example can be maintained as product catalog 3.5 OLT Port: Access-Seekers / Telecom Service provider / Customer will be able to connect to AP Fiber network by purchasing specific Service Network Interface (SNI) port at OLT. 3.6 ONT Port: Access-Seeker plugs into User-Network Interface port at ONT to receive services 3.7 Bandwidth: Access-Seeker will seek bandwidth between OLT and ONT for end premises at Gram Panchayat level for service offerings 3.8 Product Life-cycle Management 3.9 The product life cycle management involves all activities from creation of product till its withdrawal from field. 3.10 Capability to define products 3.11 Capability to define pricing rules 3.12 Ability to relate products 3.13 Ability to define product life period 3.14 Capability to maintain customer-product association 3.15 Capability to view all upgrades done on existing field products 3.16 Capability to view product support expiry date 3.17 Capability to manage upgrade on existing product with all product information 3.18 Capability to notify customers regarding product withdrawal 139 4. Product(s) Selection 4.1 CRM should expose Product catalogue to customer, provide product offers and take product(s) order from customer. Customer has to choose product/products from this catalogue. CRM product catalogue will contain all product details, requirements, configurable attributes, tariff details etc. 4.2 It should provide product Offer and credit details (generic/customer specific), tariff details etc. Product offers can be various types like offers on all products, offers on selected product, region specific offers and also offers based on customer types. 4.3 When customer has chosen the product(s), information on applicable locality or area for each product will be captured 5. Product Feasibility Checking Product feasibility checking should be done at CRM before placing the actual order of customer to assure that service(s) can actually be provided to the customer 5.1 CRM should decompose the product to corresponding services as per product to service mappings maintained by CRM. 5.2 It checks availability of resources from Resource Inventory/TAMS module at NMS system. 5.3 As per availability status replied by NMS System, CRM notifies customer regarding product order feasibility status. 6. Customer Information Management Customer Information Management should ensure management and synchronization of customer information and reconcile customer data inconsistencies. It should provide accurate and complete customers’ information. Functional requirements are: 6.1 Simple and Effective customer acquisition is key for customer satisfaction. The CRM system should provide interface to apply for AP FIBER services from comfort of the prospective customer’s office. Since AP Fiber’s prospective customers are expected to be enterprise customers, CRM system should have the option to accept all digitally signed electronic applications and push to order management system. CRM System should able to acquire the customer online by filling the forms electronically by the customers, which may use the digital signature or other authentication methods. 6.2 Create/Modify Access-seeker Details: It should enable access-seekers to provide/update their details like Customer Name (organization name), Address details (Billing, service address etc.), contact numbers (FAX, phone), customer types such as Government or private, paying or non-paying etc., billing point required for Billing System etc. 6.3 Create/Modify Customer Hierarchy: It should be able to associate/dissociate customers in parent child relationship where parent account can be associated with many child accounts. For example, parent-child relationships can be defined at unit level, block level, district level, head quarters level, state level, etc. for AP FIBER customers. 6.4 Generate Customer Report: It should manage and provide all customer reports e.g. subscribed services, product details, status reports, Billing history, complaint history, payment details, eligible offers and credit reports etc. 6.5 Customer Life Cycle management: The CRM system should be able to maintain the complete history of the customer from acquisition to removal. It should maintain the complete details such as type of services subscribed, associated products / tariff plan, Network element (s) used, number of ports on OLT/ONT/VLAN port etc. 6.6 Maintain Customer Details: It should maintain scanned copies of Customer Acquisition Forms along with supporting documents like Identity, Address Proof, Company MOU, Authorized Signatory Letter etc. It should ensure management of scanned signatures. 7. Customer Document Management The system should able to capture, manage and deliver all transaction documents and templates from/to different CRM modules. The functional requirements are: 7.1 Capture all the documents like CAF (Customer Acquisition Form), ID / Address proof, SLA etc. 7.2 Manage all customer transaction documents. 140 7.3 Provide Templates for various functions like order /quote capture, order issue, SLA template, customer data / detail capture etc. 7.4 Archiving documents 7.5 Deliver documents on request in various format like text, spreadsheets etc 8. Order Management (OM) Order Management System in AP FIBER Grid BSS suite of application shall manage and orchestrate different type of order/request related to other systems namely CRM, Billing AP FIBER NMS etc. The OM system shall enable the complete business flow for order entry / replacement and fulfillment: 8.1 The system shall include an integrated order entry process for various types of products, places of installation, geographic area and clients, temporary product. CRM should ensure all necessary information about the Customer Order (for example, type of product, address, payment information, special requirements, etc.) is available. It will issue correct and complete customer orders (product/service order/requests) to NMS System for provisioning. 8.2 This functional area must be able to receive service requests from the Order Entry system. This process behaves as an entry point for service requests into the application and notifies the Order Management functional area of new or changed service requests. Order Entry shall be able to receive different types of orders e.g. installation, fault, maintenance etc. 8.3 Complex Product Configuration - the system shall provide a sophisticated product configuration tool with the rule-based capabilities including applying restrictions by customer type. 8.4 Multi-channel - The Order Entry process shall be prepared to receive order feeds from a number of different channels, such as Customer Care applications, back-end offices, POS, third party dealers, Internet, extranet, intranet, IVR- etc. 8.5 The Order Entry process shall be integrated with the CRM, billing, NMS etc. 8.6 Order priority - Ability for the service representative to assign and display a priority level, indicating the level of care that needs to be given to the order 8.7 Multiple addresses for one order - Ability to capture multiple addresses for an order (e.g., installation address, billing address etc) 8.8 Billing accounts information - Ability to capture billing account and billing information required to bill the product or service. 8.9 Order identification - The system shall generate a unique internal order ID. It shall also be able to reference an internal order ID with several external order IDs. 8.10 Order search criteria - Ability to search and retrieve orders by multiple criteria (e.g., order reference number, project reference number, name). 8.11 Data access for products and services - Ability to access the Product Catalogue. 8.12 Provide information with order status - Provide CSRs or other entities with information regarding the order status. 8.13 Order tracking - Ability to track all information within an order at all task levels; Ability to monitor orders by different types of information, which may be geographical information, order type, resources allocated, etc. 8.14 View orders/requests rejected by downstream systems - Ability to view order status based on rejections by downstream systems (e.g. NMS / OLT). 8.15 Managing multiple order amendment - Ability to recycle in batch multiple orders after correction for a particular rejection; with this functionality, OM is able to correct all the orders for which the same rejection occurred (e.g., product-related rejections). 8.16 Internal product catalogue – OM shall include an internal Product Catalogue, flexible enough to define products and services with their hierarchy of associated options, dependencies and particular features. 8.17 Software must have capability to integrate with external product catalogues – The system must access information online and in batch mode. Order Management –Workflow & Service Creation / Fulfillment 8.18 Capability to define business rules to handle and route orders to the appropriate destinations within / outside OM, and set the appropriate status for orders when rejections and manual handling are required 8.19 The system must enable quick definition of changes and creation of new states and stages. This must be done through parameters without any hard-coded information. 8.20 Generation of routing steps - Ability to generate routing steps based on business rules containing appropriate locations, timing and information requirements for routing. 141 8.21 Work force management - The system ability to route orders to Work Force Management systems Ability to route a service order to a Work Force Management system to plan, schedule and form the most appropriate team for installation of the customer's request. The Work Force Management system shall notify OM when the work order is complete. The system should have the capability to manage resource assignment and scheduling for service requests that requires the intervention of internal or outsourced resources. 8.22 Interface with provisioning platforms Workflow engine shall have to interface with the provisioning platforms following the order, thus installing the necessary features and line classes, modifying them or taking them away. Also, it shall be possible to interface both online and through batch processes 8.23 Routing of orders to fulfillment - The OM shall send the necessary information for fulfillment to the order fulfillment component. 8.24 Ability to route to a fault management system - All information on installed services and products is sent to the fault management system. 8.25 Ability to interface with a commissioning / payment systems - Normally performed once the order is closed following the installation of the requested product/service. 8.26 Re-routing of orders - Ability to re-route the order or create an alternative workflow based on information of up- and downstream systems. 8.27 Routing to external vendors - Ability to route orders to external vendors who provide products or services in an automated manner 8.28 Escalation of orders - Mechanism based on a set of business rules to escalate orders in terms of workgroups, priority, etc 8.29 Support of order life-cycle in differing transition states - Ability to flag the order to the appropriate office for manual intervention (e.g., incomplete information). 8.30 The system should have the ability to define the type of fulfillment required for a particular order. These types of fulfillment shall be determined according to business rules which include all the functionality associated with service provisioning, inventory management and work force management, necessary to complete the order. 8.31 The system should have the capability to break down an order into different parts and fulfill the parts separately at different times. This can be linked to the provisioning timing or to the customer’s demands. 8.32 Order bulk fulfillment - Ability to specify a single destination for order bulk fulfillment. 8.33 The system should have the capability to automatically recognize that the entire work has been done and that the order can be closed and moved to order history. 8.34 It should the ability to set time intervals for certain sub-processes and notify the responsible team of a breach when necessary. Time intervals must not be hard-coded. 8.35 The system should notify customer and CSR if service provisioning problems occur even if provisioning is temporarily technically impossible or if the requested service is not available. 8.36 The system should able to manage complex provisioning rules such as pre-requisites, dependencies, sequential or parallel fulfilment tasks etc. that may pertain to a single order line (e.g. availability check before scheduling a customer site visit for the services) or multiple order lines. 8.37 The OM has the capability to interface with the NMS / provisioning platform when the order fulfillment implies the provision of a service. It should have the ability to receive a return status from the NMS / provisioning platform that the provision has been successfully completed. 8.38 The system should have the capability to export order and pricing information to billing and accounting systems after closing or cancelling an order. 8.39 It should allow amending the Customer's ordered /product(s) list. Customer may require adding / removing product to/from order list. If a product is not feasible to be provisioned by NMS System then customer may opt for other product(s), in this case customer may remove that unavailable product from order list and may add others product(s) 8.40 It should allow cancellation of customer order. Order cancellation request may come from Billing System / Customer. Penalty for cancellation will be as per pre-configured rules. CRM should inform customer regarding cancellation penalty (if applicable). In case the Customer is a defaulter (who have defaulted payment), Billing System notifies CRM to add the customer in Defaulters List. 8.41 It ensures that every order placed, is tracked all the way to closure / cancellation. 8.42 Any SLA violation should be informed by NMS System. CRM tracks the service quality by analyzing the SLA reports. Accordingly it should inform the customer and notify Billing System. 8.43 Reports – The system should be able to generate various management and analysis reports such as: 142 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Total number of orders Number of orders per input source, per entity and per user Number of pending orders, classified according to their reason Number of orders per order type Number of completed orders Number of rejections and type of rejection code per order type Orders by status type Content and level of detail - Ability to present different content with different levels of detail Export reporting information - Exporting reports to various types of support and formats 9. Contract (QoS/ SLA) Management System includes the required functionality to assure that Contract (QoS/SLA) agreements made between AP FIBER and access-seeker/customers are met. This includes taking appropriate actions when the specified agreements are not met. The functional requirements of SLA management system are: 9.1 The system shall be able to capture and control different types of Contract / Service Level Agreements (SLAs). 9.2 Service Level Agreement control types - SLAs apply to service installation, service maintenance and service repair. Therefore the SLAs must be taken into account in all types of work orders (Installation, Fault and Maintenance). 9.3 Service Level Agreements at different levels - SLAs may be at the client level, the product/service level or the contract level. SLA repository - SLA information may reside in OM or in an external system. 9.4 Segmentation of Service Level Agreements - Ability to view, choose from an inventory list, introduce and/or apply a standard or customized product Service Level Agreement (SLA), based on segments and customer type. 9.5 Allow multiple service levels to be defined for help desk, change tickets or user-developed applications 9.6 Provide response, resolution service level tracking at customer SLA and/or internal operation SLA level. 9.7 It should have the capability to produce service level agreements specifications to have network independent parameters like a. Average call response time b. Average time to resolve case (trouble ticket) c. Mean time to provide service etc. 9.8 The system should have the necessary functionality to analyze performance with respect to the established Service Level Agreement. It translates Contract (QoS/SLA) performance data received into a form suitable for Contract (QoS/SLA) analysis. 9.9 Customer Contract (QoS/SLA) Violation: It provides the necessary functionality to manage Contract (QoS/SLA) violations and the activities necessary to resolve the apparent breaches. 9.10 The system should have the capabilities for CRM to produce periodic reports say on daily/weekly/monthly/ yearly basis. The reports can be as below: a. Count / number of total complaints (breaches) for each stage at periodic intervals b. Count / number and percentage of complaints (breaches) that exceeded “n” number of days etc 10. Contract Approval 10.1 Review and approve generic and product specific terms and conditions (contracts rules). Terms and condition may consist of a number of parameters like Average call response time, Average time to resolve case (trouble ticket), Mean time to provide service etc. 10.2 Provide digital signature to approve the order placement (if done online). 11. Trouble Tickets (Case Management) Case Management applications manage the end-to-end life cycle of a case. The system will provide the necessary functionality to define different types of cases, along with the states for each case type and associated configurations and work flow. Following types as an example can be configured: General Queries, Service related complaints, billing related etc. 143 11.1 Cases and Case Management could apply to any area of assurance, Billing, or fulfillment, but presumably in the customer layer. 11.2 System should be capable to generate unique Complaint Number / Docket Number / Inquiry Number 11.3 It should be capable to create case specific to various categories. 11.4 Make available all Trouble Management functionality across all products, with full history permanently retained by the customer record. 11.5 Allow the definition of standard problem codes and the required response time. 11.6 Automatically send complaints to the appropriate person/group that deals with particular issues according to the standard problem code. 11.7 Automatically generate notifications based on user-defined business rules, for example, automatically sending an email /SMS to the customer when a trouble ticket is closed. 11.8 Describe the system’s support for Service Level Agreements (SLAs) and escalations. Capability to escalate case based on configurable level and delay with respect to case categories. Create escalation actions triggered after a period of inactivity, i.e., a case has not been closed within a certain timeframe. 11.9 Support parent/child correlation between related trouble tickets and tasks e.g. allow the status of child trouble tickets to be automatically updated when the parent trouble ticket is updated or allow the child trouble tickets to be automatically closed when the parent trouble ticket is closed. 11.10 Include central problem or knowledge management that allows call centre agents and customers (over the Web) to search inquiries / advance search. This shall include user-definable queries, search by key words and phrases. 11.11 Allow several employees to work collaboratively to resolve a customer problem (dividing the trouble ticket into sub-tickets that can be separately handled). 11.12 Be able to automatically create sub-tickets based on predefined templates. 11.13 Describe the process and time frame for capturing complaints in the system. (The time frame for inputting complaints into the system must be very short of the tune of say 60 seconds.) 11.14 Capability to attach notes and attachments with case 11.15 Provide Call Centre and outlet staff with a guide to potential resolutions for different types of complaints, including a troubleshooting guide to provide immediate answers to various complaints. This may also be based on resolutions other sites have found particularly successful for certain types of complaints. 11.16 Provide a history of a customer's previous complaints so that CSRs are aware if a certain resolution has already been tried and have a greater understanding of the customer's individual situation. 11.17 Allow for each team member to see the complaints assigned to them and to record their actions and the status of the complaint. 11.18 Monitor/track progress of complaint solving and workflow for trouble ticketing such as activities with time flags and reminders. 11.19 Display all complaints and their resolution status on a single screen (with drilldown for further information if necessary). 11.20 Automatically alert managers if there are a large number of occurrences of a particular complaint/fault report across the sites in a user-definable period. 11.21 Alert and print reports for section managers regarding all pending trouble tickets (complaints and faults) that have been waiting for resolution for a user-definable period (to ensure escalation of problem). 11.22 Track progress of fault report and resolution. 11.23 Link high-value customers to enhanced levels of service, i.e., priority call routing. 11.24 Handle inbound and outbound contact via Telephone, Email, SMS, Fax, Web self-care etc. 11.25 Support automatic screen population via CTI and/or IVR. 11.26 Enable the CSR to hot-key between screens. 11.27 Enable customers to use an SMS service to receive requested details of current balance, credit limit, etc. 11.28 Shall present all user-specified customer details on an initial customer overview screen 11.29 Enable the CSR to amend customer details within user-defined criteria and authorization level. 11.30 Shall have an alert/flash for the CSR regarding significant customer data, e.g., birthday, etc 11.31 Shall select main topics via menus/tabs on a customer overview screen with the ability to drill down to more detailed information, such as status of order, status of repair, etc 11.32 Shall show both inbound and outbound contact by any channel in sequence in the customer history screen available to the CSR 144 11.33 Create, read, and edit information on date of next communication or follow-up, following the voluntary termination of service. 11.34 Make available the same screens and system function shall be available to CSRs, Sales representatives, Staff in retail outlets, etc. 11.35 Allow agents to quickly mail, email or fax literature requests to prospects, and track inventory as it is used. 11.36 The system shall have the ability to support the various CSR related activities e.g. to display the required information, tariff plans, discounting plans, SLA details, fault / complaint details etc. To serve the customers 11.37 The system shall enable an administrator to set up a general fault alert message for distribution to all system users (including Web-based users). 11.38 The system shall be able to manage Field Operations such as Dispatching Field Engineers to customer sites, track field schedules, log parts used, log time and expenses, and more. 11.39 The system shall be able to provide a solutions database. User shall be able to create a solution database containing information that other support users and end users can access for potential solutions to their problems or questions. It shall be possible to propose new solution and to include the same after approval 11.40 It shall be possible to track duplicate cases. It shall be possible for the user to associate multiple instances to a single problem and tie the resolution of multiple cases to the resolution of one case. 11.41 The system will check for tickets status and perform escalation and notify the management or next level of support staff based on predefined Service Level Agreement (SLA) which will include (but not limited to) criteria like service application, severity and customer 11.42 System shall support bulletin board functionality that allows support technicians and managers to post and review messages about critical issues 12. Knowledge-base for complaints resolution 12.1 CRM enables to create articles on any subject such as case resolutions and FAQs for CRM users as well as CRM web self-care portal users. It can embed the contents of a file into an article, or attach the file to the article. All articles are stored in the CRM. Articles can be of two types: Internal: These articles are only available to CRM users. External: These articles are available to CRM users as well as CRM web selfcare portal users/Customers. 12.2 The system shall provide facility to generate Standard reports divided according to functional areas as described in this document. 12.3 The system should have reporting tools like Dashboards, Matrix Reports, Scheduled Reports, Custom Reports, Pipeline reports etc. at various stages to give customers integrated/unified view of overall system. 12.4 The system shall also provide a mechanism for making modifications to pre-defined standard reports as well as facilitate generation of on-demand reports beyond the above pre-defined standard reports. 12.5 Segregation of Real time reports Vs scheduled reports should be made available through the reporting system. 12.6 It should provide all reports as per the requirements of TRAI, DoT, and any other regulatory / administrative body. 12.7 To provide a consolidated view of reports it should be integrated with NMS reporting system. 12.8 Error Handling and Management 12.9 System should handle all exception while integrating with NMS. Common error and its exception handling should be seamless from operations prospective. 12.10 Queue management should be handled in an effective and efficient manner, so that CRM system is not overloaded. 2. Billing System AP FIBER systems, services proposed to be wholesale billing in nature i.e. AP FIBER Grid proposes to provide the services to the ISPs/TSPs/Enterprise customers/OSPs. It is proposed to support direct billing retail services thus Usage-based /CDR based retail billing 145 Billing & Accounting Management Systems Accounting / Journals Billing Credit Limit Manager Collections Bill Formatting Pricing / Invoice Management Rebates / Adjustments Management Billing Account management Bill enquiry & Dispute Settlements General Requirement 1. Billing Solution should support billing for multiple services. 2. The system should be capable of configuring different billing cycles which may be weekly / fortnightly/ monthly / bimonthly / quarterly / yearly etc. as per requirement of AP Fiber. 3. It should be able to bill charges in advance or in arrears or mix of both. 4. The Billing system shall interface seamlessly with the web self-care, CRM, Assurance etc. Which shall be provisioning the components (ports, bandwidth, Fibre etc.) of the AP FIBER network for the service availed by the customer. 5. The system shall have the capabilities to track and present all the necessary billing information like bill date, bill period, pay by date, total current bill amount, previous bill amount, amount that has been paid against previous bill, outstanding amounts against previous bill, type of bill, any type of adjustment (credit or debit), rebates with corresponding remarks etc. 6. CRM/Billing shall maintain flexible parent child hierarchy at multiple level (configurable) may be at three level, say Unit level, zonal level, Circle level / corporate office level etc. and accordingly it shall be possible to present both a consolidated bill as well as breakup bill. It shall be configured in CRM whether consolidated or breakup bill is required. The Solution should support defining child accounts as paying or non-paying entities. (Segregate billing data will be available for all entities, but invoice shall be generated either for Parent or child node as has been configured in the CRM for that particular customer, while defining the customer.) 7. AP FIBER Grid should be able to configure the marketing advertisements to be displayed. The display can be depending on the category of the customer. It shall also be configured for a specific customer. These marketing messages can also appear in the online bill report. 8. Transfer GL data to Financial system 9. The system should Interface with a. Payment Gateway b. CRM c. Assurance Systems d. Web self-care 10. Billing Scenarios: AP FIBER systems to maintain inventory and fulfil, assure, bill, payment, accounting services will be designed to be wholesale / enterprise in nature, and will also support direct retail of services. 11. Bill generation for the business parties / Enterprise services who have done SLA with AP FIBER for availing the AP FIBER network. The billing may be based Class of Service (COS), Quality of Services (QoS), and SLA based. The system should have the capabilities to recognize the SLA based events which have been generated and make available through NMS Interface to the billing system, calculate the charges based on SLA configured (SLA is envisaged to be configured in CRM system), and present the bill in the desire format for the customers. 12. Types of Products & Services a. Services provided to the CABLE MSO providers b. Broad Band ISP Services c. Telco Services d. Corporate V-LAN services e. Data Center ( Cloud services) f. Co-Location (Content Servers, Application Servers, etc.) g. Tariff shall include leasing partners agreement, but not limited to i. Unit (monthly, quarterly, yearly). 146 ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. Fixed charges. Maintenance charges. Bandwidth offered. ( as per the Contract with the Fiber Leasing Agency) Length of Fiber. SLA based events. Quality of Service based. Class of Service based. Functional Requirement 1. Billing 1.1 Parent-child hierarchy is proposed to be defined in the CRM system along with all the attributes. The billing solution will need to support a flexible customer hierarchy with definition of child accounts under the parent account. The Solution should support defining child accounts as paying or non-paying entities. Customer Hierarchy will enable flexibility for Service Seekers to segregate billing data. This will further allow products to be grouped into a number of different billable accounts and in order separate invoices can be generated for each. 1.2 The solution should also allow a billing account to have one or more products attached to it. 1.3 The Solution should support customer segmentation. Further, the Solution should also support defining rules based on customer segments. i.e. defining Late payment fees or payment incentives based on customer segment. The solution should not pose restriction on account belonging to more than one customer segment. 1.4 The Solution should support changes in customer hierarchy after creation of account. These changes should include a. Changing the status of an account (Changing from non-paying bill entity to a paying bill entity and vice versa). b. Change of Billing address c. Change of contact information, payment type and customer category d. Addition or cancellation of services 1.5 The Solution should provide the flexibility for the Customer Management screens. 1.6 The Solution should support backdating of customer actions like: a. Backdate Account creation b. Backdate product/ deal/ discount purchase/ cancellation c. Backdate account/ service status change. d. Backdate product or discount purchase, cycle start and end date 2. Tariff and Billing Cycle Creation 2.1 Normally product catalogue is maintained as a part of CRM solution, where creation and deletion of product and package is being carried out. The billing system should not pose any restriction in adding or removing products and/or services in packages and define tariff plans for the same. 2.2 Modified SLA / tariff shall be applicable from the next billing cycle or as per billing cycle configured in the system. 2.3 Tariff creation should have a date of effect of tariff plan. It shall be current/future date and a not any previous date. 2.4 Tariff creation should have a date range for limited period charges. 2.5 Tariff and products shall take effect as per billing cycle boundary defined for the customer. 2.6 Billing Cycle boundary shall be definable. It may be weekly / fortnightly / monthly / bimonthly / quarterly / yearly. 2.7 The solution must include a default rate plan for every Product. 2.8 The system shall have the ability to rate based on customer specific data i.e. customer type within customer information. 2.9 Solution should allow definition of the different charge types such as arrear, advance and mixed (split, recurring charges and non-recurring or one-time purchase). 2.10 Solution must be capable to support tiered, geographic based rate plans. 2.11 The Solution should support charging based on the Service level agreements committed to the customer (Silver, Gold plan etc.). SLA Management Solution will also pass information, or billing events, to the billing solution for SLA based rebates. 147 2.12 The Solution should support loading of pre-rated events/charges from the external Solutions with the following add-on options: a. Percentage increases the passed-in price by a percentage that you enter. b. Add-on Value increases the passed-in price by a fixed amount that you enter. c. New Value replaces the passed-in price with an amount you enter. 2.13 The solution should support export and importing of the pricing data as XML files. 2.14 The solution should support customization of product rates and charges at the time of plan purchase. This could be done for any specific customer. The customization should be in terms of overriding the existing one-time and recurring fees, providing a fixed-amount or percentage discounts on onetime/recurring fees, usage rates/charges. The Solution should support customization in the following ways: a. Override the price for purchase and cycle events. b. Provide a fixed-amount or percentage discount that applies to the product as a whole c. Modify rates or price models in the product by specifying positive or negative changes to resource balance impacts 2.15 The solution should support charging a cancellation fee in case the product is cancelled before a minimum configurable period. 2.16 The solution should support rollover of un-used resources from one billing cycle to another. 2.17 The solution should provide functionality for grouping of pricing components. 2.18 Flexible rounding rules in tariffs are required. The method of rounding should be capable of rounding up or down. The value that triggers the rounding should be definable as well as the digit that is rounded 2.19 It should be possible to define Pay-by-Date for various Billing cycles and late payment fee method (slab based, percentage based, fixed amount). 3. Discounts and Adjustments 3.1 Discount and adjustment shall be offered, based on the value defined for SLA threshold violations during customer creation and applied automatically at the time of bill generation. 3.2 Any fixed discount /adjustment configured during customer registration shall be applied. 3.3 Option for offering discount or adjustment in case the bill amount is more than a certain amount 3.4 Option to offer discounts and adjustment to the customers with pending bills with amount beyond a defined threshold value shall be available in the system. 3.5 The discount and adjustment functionality should have the flexibility of separate discounts in the parent child hierarchy defined. 3.6 It should also be possible to change customer discounts and adjustment 3.7 Discount and adjustment based on Customer Type can be offered. 3.8 Promotional Discount: All discounts should have an associated date range to indicate that the discount is only available for a set period of time. 3.9 Cross product discounting should be available where discount can be applied to one product based on another product's criteria. The discount should be available in the form of percentage or fixed price. 3.10 The discount model should support definition of formulae for discounting, including basic mathematical expressions. 3.11 System should be able to do adjustment based on region /tariff change and able to calculate and apply accordingly. 4. Billing Calculation 4.1 The solution should support multiple billing cycles i.e. Weekly, Monthly, Bimonthly, Quarterly, half yearly or annually. 4.2 The solution should support billing based on the occurrence of events like, a. Purchasing a product b. Changing account status eg. active, de-active c. Cancelling a product 4.3 The Solution should support generation of separate bills for different services under the same subscriber account or grouping of bills for different services. There should be an option to have different frequency of billing cycles for the 2 services and different billing dates for the generation of the 2 bills. 148 4.4 Solution should calculate pro-rata in arrears, pro-rata rebates or adjustment of fees paid and early termination fees that may apply to a Product at the time of billing 4.5 For the purpose of creation of the trial invoices, the solution should provide an option of trial billing before the actual bill run. Based on the results of the trial billing, the solution should support making changes before the final billing is done. 4.6 To load balance, the billing operations, the solution should provide an option of segment wise billing to support load balancing of the billing operations. 4.7 Based on the business requirements, the solution should provide an option of configuring bill due dates in the solution. The solution should support defining payment terms for example, a. 21 days after the billing cycle end date b. 15 business days after the billing cycle end date c. 2nd Tuesday of the month .etc 4.8 The solution should provide an option of suppressing bills on request. Suppression of bills should be based on the different criteria. 4.9 The solution should provide an option of configuring GL codes. The solution should also support export of GL data to external financial Solutions 4.10 The solution should support both open item accounting and balance forward accounting. 4.11 The solution should support running the billing function for specified accounts. 4.12 Solution should provide capability to define credit limits for each account and separately for each service within the account. 4.13 The solution should support re-billing and generation of corrective invoices or correction letters for customers. Further, the Solution should support rebilling for subscribers individually or in a batch. 4.14 Fixed rates offered can vary for different type of customers like different fixed rates could be defined for government agency and for commercial agency (CRM to take care of customers’ types, while creating the customer). 4.15 Facility for the customer to view report for bills with various tariff plan to help him in choosing the appropriate tariff plan 4.16 It shall be possible to define the various TAX types along with the value. The solution should support configuration of taxes. It should be possible to support taxes based on the tax amount as well as on the amount calculated after inclusion of taxes. 4.17 Create recurring charges for the invoice in advance. 4.18 Consolidation of charges for an invoice against each customer 5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Bill/Invoice Generation GUI shall be provided for generation of Invoices. Formatting an invoice The solution should support sending of invoices to external applications for printing, fax, E mail or FTP. At the time of account creation, the Solution should provide an option of associating each subscriber bill with an invoice template. 5.5 The solution should support digital signatures on subscriber invoices. 5.6 It shall be possible to apply any charge which is not applied automatically independent of bill generation. 5.7 Based on the parent child hierarchy defined in CRM, a consolidated bill, as well as per child-wise bill shall be generated taking into account the level of hierarchies i.e. based on the hierarchy defined for customer during provisioning by NMS for the customer for offering services in different zones / blocks / districts, it shall be possible to generate bill. 5.8 Facility shall exist for the inclusion of messages for the subscribers in the bills generated locally (either common messages, or subscriber wise messages). 5.9 The billing system should have the capability to distribute invoices via e-mail. 5.10 There should be a provision to give discount or apply interest at the time of bill generation. 5.11 Late payment reminder message on the invoice 5.12 Generation of “Revised BILL” shall be available in the system 5.13 Invoice reminders based on generic message framework (i.e. thru mail/SMS) 6. Billing Enquiry and Dispute Resolution 6.1 System must allow to process disputes and settlements which may vary slightly from level to level such as a. Bill Level 149 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 b. Item Level c. Event Level System must support passing adjustments at different levels a. Individual account level b. Subscription service level c. Bill level d. Item level e. Event level System support passing of reason codes at the time of passing adjustments, disputes and settlements System should support bulk adjustments. There shall be presentation of consolidated information like QOS report, SLA parameters, invoices etc. for the ease of verification, in case of any dispute. 7. Bill Formatting 7.1 It shall be possible to define different Invoice formats. The solution should support generation of invoice in different formats such as PDF, RTF and HTML format etc. 7.2 It shall be possible to choose from system defined format for each customer. The solution should support customization of invoice and bill numbers. It shall support logo, multiple formats for invoice, dynamic messages while formatting the bill. 8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 Collection Management The solution must provide a mechanism for identifying Invoices which are overdue for payment. The solution must provide an aged debt reporting. Solution must support configurable workflow for collecting overdue receivables such as, a. User-defined ageing buckets b. Unlimited collections scenarios c. Customer profiling to qualify accounts for specific collections scenarios d. Configurable entry and exit criteria 8.4 Solution should provide defining manual and custom actions for collections management like, a. Style sheet–based, multilingual dunning letters b. Late fees and percent-based finance charges c. Invoice reminders based on a generic message framework 9. Account Receivables 9.1 The solution should support the cash and cheques / DD based payments directly into the systems. Split payments should be possible i.e. part of the payments may be cash and part of the payment through cheques / DD. 9.2 Solution should support payment reversals and payments suspension/ disputed payments. 9.3 Solution should support refunds. 9.4 Solution support writing-off of customer bad debt. 9.5 Solution should provide APIs to integrate with 3rd Party Payment Gateways for Credit card / debit card based payments. 9.6 The solution must provide Product revenue reporting. 9.7 The solution must create financial transactions for GL postings at bill time. 9.8 The solution must create financial transactions for GL postings when a payment is received or adjustment is made. 10. Integration of Customer Web portal for billing (refer Web self-care Module) 11. Reports 11.1 It shall be possible to generate Histograms, Bar Charts, etc. of different statistical information stored over a period of time from the earlier billing cycles. 11.2 Report of Defaulters of billing shall be generated by the system. 150 11.3 The solutions should able to generate the reports as per the requirements of TRAI, DOT and any other government / regulatory bodies. 11.4 Any other reports as per the requirements of the managements / users / Business partners 12. Payments/Accounting Interface (refer Payments Gateway) 12.1 Billing system shall pass all invoice information to the financial system based on standard APIs, which are to be made available by financial system. All payments shall be recorded by financial system and to be informed to billing system via standard API. 12.2 User shall be given an interface in billing system to provide adjustments, whenever needed, which shall be reflected in next billing cycle invoice. The adjustments shall be done. Payment Gateway 1. A Secure PCI certified payment gateway which guarantees secure processing 2. Hosted Payment pages with 2048 bit encrypted SSL secure Transmission of card data 3. Single interface to deal with for all payment solutions (Internet, POS/EDC ,mobile, IVR) 4. International processing with worldwide network 5. State of the art configurable fraud management 6. Do business worldwide by choosing the local currency globally and settled globally 7. Manage your customers and subscriptions easily with one click upsell 8. Industry specific solutions that makes payment collection very easy 9. Unified payment platform that offers mobile/IVR/Email billing with No technology investment on your end 10. Unified payment engine which integrates with your billing/invoicing system to track and reconcile your payment receipts in real time 11. Ability to set automated Receipts for Both Mobile and Internet for your customers 12. Ability to expand to your Kiosk/payment collection network over Internet and Mobile platforms 13. Customized scalable solutions that can work for your business globally to reduce payment collection costs 14. Customized reporting and integration development on a project basis 3. Service Activation and Assurance Bidder(s) should refer to AP FIBER Network and NMS tender document for details on the product and NMS details). AP FIBER NMS manages and monitors the end-to-end AP FIBER network comprising Network Elements Optical technology and from multiple vendors. This module must interface with the NMS layer to provide Provisioning. This module must access Configuration and Performance data. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Web Self Care Module Web self-care module shall be able to provide a one-stop facility to the corporate customers (enterprise wide access – corporate self-care) with secure access to their information including but not limited to Bill viewing, Bill payment, complaint booking & monitoring, purchasing products & services online, updating personal information, general enquiry etc. using a standard Internet browser. The main components of the Web Self Care Portal Framework which are available on 365x24 basis Delivery Channels: Corporate Customers (enterprise wide access – corporate self-care), customers / dealers, Field Users, Regional Users Citizens and other Agencies. System shall support all types of customers / dealers including corporate customers. Presentation Services: Application Services, Marketing Requirements Notification Services, Searching and Personalization, Online help Business Support Services: Custom Applications, Electronic Bill presentment and payment, Processing Services and Reporting / Report Generation Identity and Integration Services: Account and Service Management Features, Identity Management, Authentication and Authorization, System Messaging, Trouble Ticketing 151 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 5. Infrastructure Services: System Maintenance, System Management Integration web self-care module with the CRM, Billing, ERP Solutions, etc and other third party system (e.g. AP FIBER NMS,GISetc). The portal framework supports content delivery to a number of different devices. Web Portal: The web portal would provide information as well as links to delivery services for the main actors in the system. Payment Gateway Integration: The solution would support Payment Gateway and also support the integration with the AP FIBER and all System Users through the web portal. SMS Gateway Integration: The solution would support SMS based services and also support the integration with the AP FIBER and all System Users through the web portal. Email Integration: The solution would support email based services and also support the integration with the AP FIBER and all System Users MRAS (MIS, Reports and Analytics System) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. AP FIBER will have multiple applications in their IT environment, applications such as Customer relationship management (CRM), Billing System, Order management and provisioning application, etc.. The centralized enterprise reporting system shall have visibility and access capability to take data from all the mentioned applications and will create reports and analytics to be used for various reporting purposes by AP Fiber. MRAS should have the capabilities to present reports in a dash-board like environment for the top management so as to help them make intelligent decisions based on factual data. MRAS should have capability to use Data Centre (DC) environment by using production/archived data for report generation. The reporting requirement is primarily two types: Mandatory Reports (Standard): Needed by AP FIBER Management, TRAI ,CCI ,DOT and other government agencies.) Customised Reports: Needed by AP FIBER on Daily, Weekly, Quarterly and Yearly Basis for various activities o CRM o Billing o Payments o Service Activation and Assurance o Trouble Tickets o Contact Centre Activities Batch Mode replication of Data The MRAS should take care of the enterprise wide reporting need for AP FIBER and should have the components for creating comprehensive reports. 9. SI must have capability to support additional Reporting and Analytics requirements during implementation and contract period as per AP FIBER business needs. 10. The specifications listed below layout requirements of a platform required for reporting needs of AP Fiber middle level & top management for this project. 8. The users shall be able to login and access the reporting platform based on their privileges. o MRAS must have web based interfaces o Able to pull and analyze data from multiple data sources in Data Center. o Ability to drill, slice, dice. The level of drill, etc. shall be finalized in the SRS Phase. o Ability to create graphs, charts on parameters mentioned in Reports o Ability to download reports for AP FIBER Management users depending on access privileges o Must provide online Help and Tutorial feature to get the desired outputs o MRAS Management of Users, Folders, Servers, Objects, User Groups, Server Groups, Authorization and Setting 11. Each user shall be able to get scheduled reports on his/her chosen e-mail ID. e.g: Various report type o Ad Hoc Reports o Object and Folder level Security o Multiple Export format support including PDF, MS XL, MS Word, RTF and HTML o Objective model programmable administrative control mechanism o Parameterized reporting and sorting 152 o Cross Platform Deployment 12. The report design software shall have following features: o Multiple report types including Mailing Labels, Cross Tabs, Conditional and other reports o Local printing and exporting capability o Formula expert, customs functions and display string formatting o Unlimited SQL commands 13. Capability error-check queries in the reporting software. Policies in this regard shall be user configurable by the administrator. 6. Contact Centre Operations Standard Contact centre operations to support end user base of 10 lacs and several hundred MSOs, ISPs in the first year. The call centers shall be established by the MSOs, ISPs etc, but the application should proposed by the bidder should support the same. 7. Other Requirements ● ● EMS and NMS must expose a REST API interface to provide both bandwidth consumption history and provisioning history for both the MAC and IP address. The NMS, EMS, OSS combined must provide accurate accounting of bandwidth consumption delayed by at most 4 hours, at least on a rolling 4 hour basis. Consumption accounting data must be accurate to within 5% and must be split into intra-AP (AP grid) consumption, out of grid - in India consumption and international bandwidth consumption. This data must be made available by Mac and by static IP address on a defined, authenticated REST API for use by BSS Consumer, ISP and Cable operator Features and Flows that to be provided in the NMS/ EMS/OSS/BSS ● The Fiber Grid shall support a fixed set of broadband products in V1 and allow ISPs to define their own products in V2. The V2 product should allow for any valid combination of the following variables: ○ Periodicity (monthly, weekly, ..., one-time) ○ Start/ Stop Times ○ [Bandwidth (Mbps), Usage (GB), QoS; excess usage Bandwidth + QoS] tuples, upto 3 tuples with design room for more ● In V1, the consumer products must at least include (more may be added in consultation with ISPs and Cable operators): ○ 10/5 Mbps, 25 GB, 5 GB international plan including basic cable ○ 10/10 Mbps, 35 GB, 10 GB international, high QoS business plan including basic cable ○ Both of the above without basic cable ○ 100/50 Mbps, 50 GB, 10 GB international plan ○ 100/100 Mbps, 100 GB, 20 GB international plan ○ All of the above have option of consumer switching to low bandwidth after consumption is done or to pay for consumption bandwidth including international per GB at published rates ○ 1/ 0.5 Gbps, 1000 GB, international as consumed ● Consumer operations: Express interest capture, Enroll, activate product, change product, payment (to ISP or State to be decided) ● Prepaid including monthly pre-paid must be supported in V1, post-paid must be supported in V2 ● ISP operations: Enroll, ISP parameters like area, payment (to State or reverse), add product V2, deprecate product V2; including structured metadata for ISP verification, start date, end date, target connections promised ● Web interfaces, reports, alerts the consumer, the ISP, the state will need to operationalize the requirements including SLAs and ensure quality service, assist in financial integrity ● Ability to generate unified billing spanning cable + ISP + telephone using cable and phone bill summaries delivered to BSS via batch imports using authenticated interfaces by authorized ISP personnel or alternately sent over secure authenticated API interfaces, which is must have in V2 153 ● ● ● ● Manual enablement and data entry, bill computation and reporting of Telecom circuits for 2G, 3G, 4G Provide phone lines over IP, v1 single provider, v2 multiple. In v1 its safe to accept provider billing but have all the logs in structured, quality checked data and quarterly run reports to verify accuracy of reporting and billing within 6% in V1 and 3% in V2 Trouble, non-activation and outage reporting APIs along with resolution APIs and interfaces Follow system and database design principles like 3 normal form, simplicity of consumer experience, consumer delight, simplicity of operations Additional Technical Requirements All interfaces must be specified and available as REST APIs following the Open API protocols. All user features, service staff interfaces including complete enrolment, provisioning, trouble ticket management + acceptance must be available on mobile via Android Apps. All service provider, ISP, OSS/ BSS management interfaces must have a single sign on using Aadhar. Contractor must specify for all major consumer facing data and reports such as uptime, provisioning, usage, 90-9599% bandwidth, billing amount, latency (across node), jitter (across node), specify: coverage, accuracy, timeliness SLA as well as bug fix SLAs at the time of the specification signoff. All changes to a consumer network or provisioning shall generate an alert informing them of the change with a link to a full report. Additional Features required in OSS ● Provision, disconnect consumer, telecom based on BSS API command, provisioning includes modifying BRAS tables as well as instructing the OLT ● Sanity and integrity runs to find gaps between BSS provisioning records, OSS state and when possible and legitimate modify OSS provisioning as per BSS ● Compute non-international usage from BRAS as well as mining OLT/ Switch dumps and update at least every 4 hours assuming the necessary nodes are fully up ● Configure all intra state broadband traffic to go direct between the relevant ports to the extent possible, most do for 90% of intra-state usage by V2 ● Compute international bandwidth aggregating across BRAS routers Testing and acceptance criteria relating to NMS/EMS/OSS/BSS These features and requirements must be sufficiently detailed by the contractor in the forms of requirement specification in consultation with the authority and tabled within 4 weeks of project award, to be signed off within 6 weeks of project award. A user interface review shall be conducted within 12 weeks. The contractor shall within 8 weeks of detailed requirement sign off, define use cases, test descriptions for major use case along with test data suites as time series via API calls if needed. All test results and reports must be submitted in an agreed on format via a REST API for every release starting with the first release. All regressions or lowering in performance must be explained in notes and significant degradation in any of these must be sent in the progress reports along with explanations. 154 1.4 Video Wall for NMS Video wall size: 3meters (width) X1.1meters (height) Specification for Professional LCD Display for Video wall 3 x 2 (Diagonal Size of the display should be 55” and it should be a LED backlit Model) S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description The Display should have aspect ratio of 16:9. The Display should support true resolution of 1920X1080 pixels. The Display should have minimum (Native) contrast ratio of 1600:1. The Display should have minimum life span of 50,000 Hrs. The Display should have 450cd/m2 Brightness The Gap between 2 Display should be less than 5.5 mm The display should have following input terminals. a) RGB Input –Mini D-Sub 15 PIN x 1 (Optional) b) DVI-D In – 24+1 PIN (optional) c) RS-232C - D-Sub 9 PIN X 1 (Optional) d) HDMI In – 1 (Mandatory) e) AV Port (Optional) The Display should have DVI-D loop in Loop Out facility The Display should support various types of mounting accessories like: a) Wall Mount Bracket Video controller 16 The Controller should have 6 Output( 1920 X 1080), 4 Physical Input and dual LAN 17 The Controller should have a Xeon processer , 6GBRAM and 500GB storage. 18 The controller should be supplied with Wall Management software to control the video wall for showing any Input in the wall. 19 The controller should have a feature to split the wall into multi window. 20 21 The controller should be 24 X 7 operational with proper cooling system The Media Player should have Gigabit Network Card. 2.1 -Core IP MPLS Routers 100 G S.No. Parameter Minimum Requirement Specifications Should be chassis based & modular architecture for scalability with Redundant Route Processor, Power supply, Switching fabric Router should be provided with 1+1 route processor, 1+1 or 1+N switch fabric and 1+1 or 1+N power supply redundancy Should have two free full width payload slots for future expansion. All interfaces on the routers shall provide wire-rate throughput 1 Architecture The router shall support following type of interfaces – 100GE, 10GE, 1GE interfaces The router 10 Gig interfaces for SR, LR& ZR are software configurable for LANPHY/WANPHY mode. The operating system of the router shall have a microkernel-based architecture. The modular operating system shall run all critical functions like various routing protocol, forwarding plane and management functions in separate memory protected modules. Failure of one module shall not impact operations of rest of the OS. In service bug patching should be available 155 The router along with respective line cards should be supplied with timing protocol support such as 1588v2 (with boundary clock as well as ordinary clock (master and slave) and sync E Router should support two free slots for future expansion Should be supplied with necessary power cards, data cables, connectors, CD’s, manuals, bracket accessories, wire managers and other appropriate accessories Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 3.2 Tbps The router should have capability of minimum 4 million IPv4 routes and 2 Million IPv6 routes The proposed router should have 12 GB DRAM and 8GB Flash , also should support 30GB storage in SSD the router should support minimum 2 million MAC address, minimum 128k Pseudowires. Router should have 128k multicast routes. The router should support 32 way BGP load balancing and 32 way ECMP 2 Performance Shall support online insertion and removal (OIR) that is non-disruptive in nature. Online insertion and removal of one line card shall not lead to ANY packet loss for traffic flowing through other line cards for both unicast and multicast traffic. In case of a line card or Route Processor failure on the router; the multicast and Unicast routing, multicast and Unicast distribution and multicast replication architecture of the router shall ensure no impact & zero packet loss of multicast video, audio & data traffic running on rest of the line cards in the system if the any of the feature and functionality asked in the RFP is achieved using any service module that should be quoted in 1+1 redundancy 3 Protocol Support Should have IPv4 Routing ,Border Gateway Protocol , Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System [IS-IS], and Open Shortest Path First [OSPF]), Route Policy Language (RPL), Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)/Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), IPv6 Routing, and BGP Prefix Independent Convergence ,GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) Tunneling,Multicast routing protocols IGMPv1, v2 ,v3, PIM-SM (RFC2362) and PIMSSM,MSDP,IGMP v2 snooping,DHCPv6 and OSPFv3 for IPv6,6PE & 6VPE,MPLS Provider /Provider Edge functionality. MPLS VPN, MPLS mVPN (Multicast VPN), Carrier Supporting Carrier (CsC), DiffServ Tunnel Modes, MPLS TE (Fast re-route), DiffServAware TE, Inter-AS VPN,Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), VPLS,VPWS,Ethernet over MPLS, CESoPSN and SAToP as per RFC 4553 Router shall support MPLS OAM, Ethernet OAM protocols - CFM (IEEE 802.1ag), Link OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and ITU Y.1731. The routers shall support both L2 and L3 services on all interfaces The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and Multicast traffic. The router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4. Configuration Roll Back to recover the mis-configured router to last good configuration Shall support the following: Traffic Classification using various parameters like source physical interfaces, source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination ports, IP Precedence, 802.1p, MPLS EXP, DSCP and by some well known application types through Application Recognition techniques. 4 QoS Features: Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time application like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter,Congestion Management: WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing Shall support standards based RSVP for voice & video call admission control. Ability to configure hierarchical queues in hardware for IP QoS at the egress to the edge. Minimum 128k egress and 128k ingress hardware queues per line card. Platform must support nested hierarchical QOS policies .Router should have 4 level of scheduling for HQOS. 156 Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet, Source & Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range etc.,Time based ACL,AAA using radius or TACACS 5 Security The routers shall provide hardware accelerated feature. This feature shall be available for all interfaces provisioned on the router with hardware acceleration. Should Support MD-5 route authentication for RIP, OSPF and BGP,URPF,DHCP snooping , control plane policing ,SNMPv3 authentication, SSHv2 Should have to support Out of band management through Console / external modem for remote management. Event and System logging: Event and system history logging functions shall be available. The Router shall generate system alarms on events. Facility to put selective logging of events onto a separate hardware here the analysis of log shall be available. Video Monitoring: The proposed routers should have capability to check quality of the video traffic transiting through the router. The video monitoring function shall work on both IP and MPLS enabled interfaces and it should be able to measure quality metrics such as delay, jitter, MPEG MDI (RFC 4445), Media Stop Event for uncompressed and compressed video formats (MPEG). 6 Management 7 Interfaces The proposed router should have the following interfaces 110 X 10 Gig interfaces with SR SFP+ 8 Certifications The proposed router should be EAL 3 certified by common Criteria body 2.2 - Core Switch S. No. Criteria Description There should not be any single point of failure in the switch. All the main components like CPU module, switching fabric, support module, system clock, power supplies and fans etc should be in redundant configuration. Components, like modules/power supplies/fan tray should be Hot Swappable The switch should have redundant CPU's working in an active-active or active-standby mode.There should not be any traffic disruption during the CPU fail-over/change-over and the fail-over time should be less than 1 sec. 1 Availability and Redundancy Must Have Redundancy for Power Supply, FANs and clocks to minimise unavailability of switch. Online insertion and removal (OIR) support is must for modules, Power supply and FAN. Stateful Switchover to ensure that in case of failure of active CPU module the redundant CPU should start switching L2/L3 traffic in less than 1 sec (in case switch has redundant CPU). The switch must support Hitless software upgrades (ISSU) to reduce downtime during software upgrade or downgrade. The switch must support Fault isolation per process and process patching to enhance the switch availability 2 Generic The proposed switch should have enough Memory (Flash and RAM) to hold the latest Software Release. It should support all features of switch and parameters like MAC Address Table, IP Routing Tables, VLANs etc.at their peak values as claimed in the Data Sheets of the Switch. 157 The Switch should have a Truly Distributed Architecture. All Interface Modules should have all the resources for switching and Routing and should offer True Local Switching (Intra-Module and Inter-Module). Version of software for supplied switch should be latest release with necessary licenses to support all required features IEEE 802.1D Bridging and Spanning Tree IEEE 802.1p QoS/CoS IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation with LACP IEEE 802.3x Flow Control IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3ba 40 Gigabit Ethernet RFC 2460 IPv6 RFC 2461 Neighbor Discovery for IPv6 RFC 2462 IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration RFC 2463 ICMPv6 Should support Ingress/Egress Queuing. Should support QoS scheduling with queues supported in hardware Should support upto 4 queues per port Should support ACL based traffic classification Should Support IGMP v1, v2 , v3, IGMP Snooping Switch should support 8K IGMP Group and scalable to 32K Group with/without Multi chassis ether channel (MCEC) deployment. Should support Industry Standard Port/Link Aggregation for All Ports. Also Cross Module Link aggregation should be supported Jumbo Frames support up to 9K Bytes on Gigabit / 10 G Ports 3 Layer 2 features Support for broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast storm control to prevent degradation of switch performance from faulty end stations Should support port, subnet based 802.1Q VLANs. The switch should support 4096 vlans. The switch must support Private VLAN or equivalent. The switch should support 160,000 no. of MAC addresses, 32 Nos. of link per Link Aggregation Group and must support more than 128 nos. of Link Aggregation Group per switch. Switch must support spine - leaf topology based on VXLAN and create large layer 2 domain to optimise east - west traffic within the data center to achieve the following - a) Participation of Hypervisor switches in spine-leaf architecture as virtual leaves b) support a minimum of 16,000 segment ID to support secure multi-tanace at the time of the bid submission Switch must support multi chassis link aggregation feature and work with any downstream switch, server from various vendors. 158 Switch must support IEEE 802.1BR (Bridge Port Extension) or equivalent technology which in turn enable remote line card functionality to optimize cabling inside the data center. The switch must support a minimum of 24 remote line card and scale upto 32 remote line cards in future. Should support routing protocol IP v4 - Static routing, OSPF v2, EIGRP, BGPv4, IS-IS and IP v6 - BGP, OSPF v3. The switch must support Bidirectional Forwarding detection on OSPF and BGP. Switch must support IP v4 - HSRP and VRRP and IP v6 - HSRP v6 and VRRP v6. It must also support DHCP Relay V4 and V6. Switch should support VRF - Lite and VRF Route leaking functionality. The switch should support upto 1000 VRF instances. Should support minimum 64K Route entries for IPv4 and IPv6 routes. The switch must support 64 way ECMP. 4 Layer 3 features Switch must support virtualization features like VXLAN Gateway/Bridging and routing functionality to support Vmware hypervisor connectivity and also to normalize it for Vmware VM to bare metal server / Vmware VM to other hypervisor VM communication. Switch must support NVGRE protocol to support Microsoft hypervisor connectivity and also normalize it for Microsoft hypervisor VM to bare motel server / Microsoft hypervisor VM to Vmware Hypervisor VM communication. Should support H/W based IPv4 and IPv6 Multicasting Should support Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode and PIM - ASM for IPv4 and MSDP for IP v6. It should also support Any cast Routing Protocol (Any cast RP). Switch should support 8K Multicast route and scalable to 32K Route with/without Multi chassis ether channel (MCEC) deployment. Switch should be manageable through NMS on per port/switch basis with common interface for all manageable devices on the network. Should Support SNMP, RMON/RMON-II, SSH, telnet, web management through network management software. Should support port mirroring feature for monitoring network traffic of a particular port/VLAN/group of ports/entire switch. The switch should support 16 SPAN Session and scale upto 32 SPAN session. 5 Management and Operation Switch should support Syslog, Power on Auto Provisioning, XML (NetConf), SSHv2, Telnet, OOB Management port, Console Port. should support Linux tools, Bash and Power Shell, Phython Shell and XMPP Client The switch should support configuration verification and roll-back. The switch should support SNMP v1,v2c and V3 Chassis based Multilayer Switch with sufficient modules/line cards to fit required transceivers/UTP ports. Chassis shall have minimum 4 payload slots and Maximum 7 RU Height. The switch must have front to back airflow. 6 Performance & Scalability The total aggregate switching capacity shall be 3 Tbps or more The Switch should support non-blocking Layer 2 switching and Layer 3 routing. The Backplane should be 100% Passive. Preferably back plane free design to optimize the airflow and power consumption. 159 The switch must support minimum of 192 line rate non blocking ports of 1/10G SFP+ or 1/10G T on a single chassis. The switch must support a minimum of 140 nos of 40 G QSFP ports in same chassis The switch must support 100 Gig line cards at the time of bid submission. 8 ports 40 Gig QSFP, 48 ports 1/10G Fiber module with transceivers (shortrange) and 48 ports 1/10 G - T module. Should support Standard and Extended ACLs Should support various type of ACLs like MAC Based, Port based, Vlan Based and routed ACLs. Should support integrated security features like DHCP snooping with option-82, Dynamic Arp Inspection, IP Source guard and uRPF (unicast Reverse path forwarding) Should Support MAC Address Filtering based on source and destination address 7 Security Should support AAA, with CHAP, PAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAPv2. It must support LDAP, RADIUS and TACACS+ protocol as well. The switch must support Role Based access control (RBAC) for L1, L2 and L3/Administrators. The switch should support control plane policing to filter the unwanted traffic to fill up the CPU queues. The switch should support user configurable Control Plane Policing (CoPP) The switch should support upto 16K ingress ACLs and upto 54K egress ACLs. It should support Security and QOS ACL's. Redundant poer supplies operating at 210-240v AC Operating temperature -40 to 65 Centigrade The proposed Switch should be populated with following interfaces: 8 Power 8 Interfaces a. 144 x 10 G interfaces with appropriate SFP+ loaded 2.3 Firewall S.No. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Technical Specifications required Firewall The FW should integrate with multiple full-featured, high-performance security services, including application-aware firewall, SSL (Only Support is required, SSL is not required from day 1) and IPsec VPN, IPS with Global Correlation. The FWshould have innovative extensible multiprocessor design and software architecture that enables to easily install additional high-performance security services The FW should support a comprehensive command line interface (CLI), verbose syslog, and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Should have a throughput of minimum 40gbps firewall throughput, 13Gbps of Application Inspection and 4 gbps of VON throughput 1.5 Minimum concurrent sessions 9,500,000 1.6 New connections per second 325,000, 1000 Vlans and 100 Virtual firewalls 1.7 Interfaces 6-port 10/100/1000, 4-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet SR 1.8 Should support Active/Active and Active/Standby Failover 1.9 Firewall and VPN Active/Standby failover services should be supported without any additional licenses 160 1.10 Should have redundant power supply 1.11 Should have 2 USB 2.0 ports 1.12 The device should have a dedicated console port 1.13 Should support integrated Ipsec and Client and Clientless SSL VPN 1.14 Should support at least 5,000 vpn 1.15 Should support Etherchannel/Port aggregation with Each channel group supporting upto eight active interfaces. Should support upto 16 interfaces in a channel group. 1.16 Should support Botnet Filter 1.17 Should support checking of incoming and outgoing connections against a dynamic database of known bad domain names and IP addresses, and then logs any suspicious activity. 1.18 Should support Routed and Transparent mode 1.19 Firewall should support Web based (HTTP and HTTPS) configuration, and management 1.20 Firewall should support Command Line Interface using console, Telnet and SSH 1.21 Should be managed using a centralized management system 1.22 Should support Syslog server logging 1.23 Should support stateful inspection capabilities enable deep packet inspection for services that embed IP addressing information in the user data packet or that open secondary channels on dynamically assigned ports 1.24 Should support full-featured stateful inspection firewall with enhanced application inspection capabilities. Basic application inspection support for all major protocols. Enhanced inspection for HTTP, FTP, Instant Messenger, File Sharing, SIP, H.323, SCCP, SMTP, ESMPT, DNS, RPC, CIFS, MSRPC, and NETBIOS. With the enhanced application inspection features, it should be possible to exercise a great deal of control over the behavior of network communications using those protocols. For example, with SIP inspection, you can utilize regular expressions (REGEX) to deny SIP-based VOIP communications with certain addresses or countries. 1.25 The FW should support Modular Policy Framework which provides a powerful, highly flexible framework for defining flow- or class-based policies, enabling administrators to identify a network flow or class based on different conditions, and then apply a set of customizable services to each flow or class 1.26 The FW should deliver per-flow, policy-based QoS services, with support for LLQ and Traffic Policing for prioritizing latency-sensitive network traffic and limiting bandwidth usage of administrator-specified applications 1.27 The FW should support site-to-site vpn as well as Remote access vpn on the same appliance 1.28 Should support inspection of IPv6 traffic based on the extension header 1.29 IPv6-enabled inspection services for applications based on HTTP, FTP, SMTP, ICMP, TCP, and UDP. In addition, SSHv2, Telnet, HTTP and HTTPS, and ICMP-based management over IPv6 1.30 support for network monitoring using SNMP Versions 1, 2c, and 3, and supports the use of all three versions simultaneously. 1.31 Should support notification through email 1.32 Firewall should support Stateful Failover of Firewall and VPN Sessions 1.33 1.34 1.35 The firewall must have support for virtual firewalls and include atleast 2 virtual firewalls without any additional license costs Should be able to protect “ARP spoofing” attacks at layer 2 by ARP inspection to prevent malicious users from impersonating other hosts The firewall should be RFC 1918 compatible with support for Static & Dynamic Network Address Translation and also Port Address Translation 1.36 There must be support for bi-directional NAT 1.37 The firewall should have support for cut-through proxy and user authentication 1.38 Should support creation of policies based on user identity. 161 1.39 2 The appliance should get user information from an external agent so that there is no compromise in performance VPN Features 2.1 The device should support IPSEC/IKEv2 for remote VPN access 2.2 The security appliance supports the following encryption standards for ESP: DES, 3DES, AES-128, AES-192, AES-256 2.3 The security appliance supports the following hashing algorithms: MD5, SHA 2.4 Supports the use of SHA-2 compliant signature algorithms to authenticate SSL VPN connections that use digital certificates. Support for SHA-2 includes all three hash sizes: SHA-256, SHA-384, and SHA-512 2.5 It should support IPSec VPN solution that is compliant with the following RFC: RFC 2408 - Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP) RFC 2409 - The Internet Key Exchange (IKE) RFC 2412 - The OAKLEY Key Determination Protocol. Minimum 100 licences shall be provided 2.6 Should support Perfect forward secrecy using Diffie-Hellman (DH) groups 1,2,5 and 7 2.7 The Device should preserve the TOS bits as per RFC 2401. TOS bits in the original IP header should be copied to the IP header of the encrypted packet so that QoS policies can be enforced after encryption 2.8 Should support Endpoint Assessment that examines the remote computer for a large collection of antivirus and antispyware applications, associated definitions updates, and firewalls 2.9 On Windows, Mac OS X, and Linux desktops, Advanced Endpoint Assessment should be able to initiate remediation of various aspects of antivirus, antispyware and personal firewall protection if that software allows a separate application to initiate remediation 2.10 For Windows Mobile Devices, should have capability to write Lua expressions in Dynamic Access Policies (DAPs) to perform posture checks on those attributes unique to mobile devices 2.11 Should support VPN from variety of endpoints like desktops, tablets and smartphones on the same appliance 2.12 Should support Start Before Login (SBL) feature which allows a VPN connection to be established prior to machine login. This functionality allows for native Windows functionality such as AD group policies, drive mapping and login scripts to be provided for VPN users 2.13 Should support split tunnelling 2.14 The SSL VPN client should auto detect whether it can use DTLS or TLS 2.15 2.16 2.17 3 Should support Smart tunneling which allows Microsoft Windows users access to TCP applications without the prerequisite of administrative rights and allows VPN administrators to grant only approved applications access to internal resources The secure appliance should support advanced transformation capability that helps ensure compatibility with Web pages containing complex content, including HTML, Java, ActiveX, JavaScript, and Flash. In addition, should provide filtering of ActiveX and Java applets to prevent downloads of malware The device should detect KeyLogger applications and prevent user access IPS Features 3.1 Inspect encapsulated traffic include: 3.2 • GRE 3.3 • MPLS 3.4 • 802.1q, 3.5 • IPv4 in IPv4 3.6 • IPv4 in IPv6 3.7 • Q-in-Q double VLAN 3.8 Concurrent Threat Mitigation Throughput (Mbps) (Firewall + IPS Services) should be 2gbps 3.9 IPS can be deployed inline in the traffic path or in promiscuous mode 162 3.10 3.11 3.12 Identify the source of denial of service (DoS), distributed denial of service (DDoS), SYN flood, and encrypted attacks Use patented anti-evasion technology to defend and monitor against worms, viruses, Trojans, reconnaissance, spyware, botnets, phishing, peer to peer, malware as well as numerous evasions techniques. Should be able to correctly track TCP sessions in complex network configurations 3.1 BRAS Router S.No Parameter Minimum Requirement Specifications for the BRAS Should be chassis based & modular architecture for scalability with Redundant Route Processor, Power supply Switching fabric Router should be provided with 1+1 route processor, 1+1 or 1+N switch fabric and 1+1 or 1+N power supply redundancy Should have two free payload slots for future expansion. All interfaces on the routers shall provide wire-rate throughput The router shall support following type of interfaces – 100GE, 10GE, 1GE interfaces.; POS 1 Architecture The router 10 Gig interfaces for SR,LR& ZR are software configurable for LANPHY/WANPHY mode. The operating system of the router shall have a CPU based architecture. The modular operating system shall run all critical functions like various routing protocol, forwarding plane and management functions in separate memory protected modules. Failure of one module shall not impact operations of rest of the OS.In service bug patching should be available The router along with respective line cards should be supplied with timing protocol support such as 1588v2 (with boundary clock as well as ordinary clock (master and slave) and sync E Router should support two free slots for future expansion Should be supplied with necessary power cards, data cables, connectors, CD’s, manuals, bracket accessories, wire managers and other appropriate accessories Router shall support non-blocking capacity of 3.2 Tbps The router should have capability of minimum 3.8 million IPv4 routes and 1.8 Million IPv6 routes The proposed router should have 12 GB DRAM and GB Flash , also should support 30GB storage in SSD the router should support minimum 1.8 million MAC address, minimum 125k Pseudowires. Router should have 125k multicast routes. The router should support 32 way BGP load balancing and 32 way ECMP 2 Performance Shall support online insertion and removal (OIR) that is non-disruptive in nature. Online insertion and removal of one line card shall not lead to ANY packet loss for traffic flowing through other line cards for both unicast and multicast traffic. In case of a line card or Route Processor failure on the router; the multicast and Unicast routing, multicast and Unicast distribution and multicast replication architecture of the router shall ensure no impact & zero packet loss of multicast video, audio & data traffic running on rest of the line cards in the system if the any of the feature and functionality asked in the RFP is achieved using any service module that should be quoted in 1+1 redundancy The proposed BRAS should support 64K PPPoE sessions on a single line card The proposed BRAS should support 8 priority queues for al the 64k subscribers 3 BRAS Features The proposed BRRAS, HQoS deployment per subscribers should not reduce the support of the number of subscriber sessions per card 163 The proposed BRAS should support seamless failover of sessions during the failover / switchover of the Route processor The proposed BRAS should support Geo Redundancy in warm mode, ensuring the failover of a single node should not impact the user sessions and user session would be seamlessly supported by the redundant available system The proposed BRAS should support 128k subscriber per line card The proposed BRAS should be able to protect IPv4 and IPv6 subscribers sessions from CoPP The equipment should be able to support 1K ISPs. The equipment should be able to support DHCP option 60 and option 82. The system should be able to support 4k leased lines. Accounting: RADIUS, TACACS The system should support multi-service features like BoD (Bandwidth on Demand) Video on Demand PTA services. Terminating subscriber session directly in a L3VPN Support for Captive Portal and dynamic service selection and url redirection Wholesale service based on VPDN, GRE and PBR. The offered product should have MEF –9 and MEF 14 certification. Volume based billing – Real time accounting required so that user can be charged on real time basis Customer portal required so that user can check his usage online as and when required 4 Protocol Support Should have IPv4 Routing ,Border Gateway Protocol , Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System [IS-IS], and Open Shortest Path First [OSPF]), BGP for IPv4 and Ipv6,MPBGP,Route Policy Language (RPL), Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)/Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), IPv6 Routing, and BGP Prefix Independent Convergence ,GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) Tunneling,Multicast routing protocols IGMPv1, v2 ,v3, PIM-SM (RFC2362) and PIM-SSM,MSDP,IGMP v2 snooping,DHCPv6 and OSPFv3 for IPv6,6PE & 6VPE,MPLS Provider /Provider Edge functionality. MPLS VPN, MPLS mVPN (Multicast VPN), Carrier Supporting Carrier (CsC), DiffServ Tunnel Modes, MPLS TE (Fast re-route), DiffServ-Aware TE, Inter-AS VPN,Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), VPLS ,VPWS,Ethernet over MPLS , CESoPSN and SAToP as per RFC 4553 Router shall support MPLS OAM, Ethernet OAM protocols - CFM (IEEE 802.1ag), Link OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) and ITU Y.1731. The routers shall support both L2 and L3 services on all interfaces The Router should support Point to Point and Point to Multipoint LSP for Unicast and Multicast traffic. The router should support RFC 3107 of Carrying Label Information in BGP-4. Configuration Roll Back to recover the mis-configured router to last good configuration Shall support the following: 5 QoS Features Traffic Classification using various parameters like source physical interfaces, source/destination IP subnet, protocol types (IP/TCP/UDP), source/destination ports, IP Precedence, 802.1p, MPLS EXP, DSCP and by some well known application types through Application Recognition techniques. Shall support Strict Priority Queuing or Low Latency Queuing to support real time application like Voice and Video with minimum delay and jitter,Congestion Management: WRED, Priority queuing, Class based weighted fair queuing Shall support standards based RSVP for voice & video call admission control. Ability to configure hierarchical queues in hardware for IP QoS at the egress to the edge. Minimum 126k egress and 126k ingress hardware queues per line card. Platform must support nested hierarchical QOS policies .Router should have 4 level of scheduling for HQOS. 164 6 Security Support Access Control List to filter traffic based on Source & Destination IP Subnet, Source & Destination Port, Protocol Type (IP, UDP, TCP, ICMP etc) and Port Range etc.,Time based ACL,AAA using radius or TACACS The routers shall provide hardware accelerated feature. This feature shall be available for all interfaces provisioned on the router with hardware acceleration. Should Support MD-5 route authentication for RIP, OSPF and BGP,URPF,DHCP snooping , control plane policing ,SNMPv3 authentication, SSHv2 Should have to support Out of band management through Console / external modem for remote management. Event and System logging: Event and system history logging functions shall be available. The Router shall generate system alarms on events. Facility to put selective logging of events onto a separate hardware here the analysis of log shall be available. 7 Management Video Monitoring -The proposed routers should have capability to check quality of the video traffic transiting through the router. The video monitoring function shall work on both IP and MPLS enabled interfaces and it should be able to measure quality metrics such as delay, jitter, MPEG MDI (RFC 4445), Media Stop Event for uncompressed and compressed video formats (MPEG). 8 Interfaces The proposed router should support 24 x 10G interfaces with SR optics 9 Certifications The proposed router should be EAL 3 certified by common Criteria body 3.2 Server Pool: The required Operating System Redhat Linux / Windows with relevant data base licenses shall be provisioned while integrating the solution. The spam control solution shall also be the part of the Integration. All the licenses to be provided shall be perpetual. 3.2.a Blade Chassis – 2 Nos. S.No. Description 1 Blade chassis shall be 19" Electronic Industries Alliance Standard Width rack mountable and provide appropriate rack mount kit. 2 The proposed blade chassis should support 8 half width blades in fully populated mode 3 The power supply modules should be hot pluggable 4 Power supply should meet the Energy 80 Plus certification 5 The power subsystem should support all of the following modes of power redundancy (No redundancy, N+1 , N+N or grid ) 6 The power subsystem should be support N + N power redundancy for a fully populated chassis with the 2 socket (CPU) servers 7 Should be configured to provide full redundant cooling to all blade slots 8 The chassis shall be able to support redundant switch modules for fabric connectivity 9 The uplink connectivity from the chassis should be able to support up to 160 Gb bandwidth or up to 20 Gb per server blade 10 The uplink from the chassis should support FCoE ( Fiber Channel over Ethernet ) technology 11 Should also support a 1 Gb & 10 Gb uplink from the switch which is connected to the blade chassis 165 12 The fabric connectivity from the chassis should support 1:1 subscription ratio in an active configuration 13 The chassis should support redundant management modules 14 It should support remote KVM capability from an external keyboard, video monitor and mouse to all blades installed in the chassis through the management controllers . 15 Simultaneous KVM access to a single blade KVM by multiple users but the admin user can take Read Write ownership while the other user is in Read Only mode 16 Should be able to support the feature of virtual DVD and virtual floppy to individual servers from remote systems Network: 17 The fabric switches should support Private VLANs 18 The fabric switches should support up to 1024 VLANs 19 Supports up to 2000 VIF ( Virtual Interfaces ) 20 It should support the direct connection to FCoE enabled storage arrays 21 It should support the direct connection to FC storage arrays 22 It should support the direct connection to NAS based devices 23 Should include support for FC Port Trunking 24 Supports local SPAN 25 Supports the management of the rack servers within the same control plane as the Blade servers 26 Supports up to 12 Uplink port channels per fabric switch 27 Supports up to 8 member interfaces per port channel 28 Supports up to 4 SAN port channels 29 Supports up to 8 member interfaces per FC port channel 3.2.b Blade Servers (Generation 9) – 8 Nos. S.No. Description 1 Processor 2 * Intel® Xeon® E5-2667v3 3.2GHz 135W 8-core CPU with 20MB cache memory 2 Chipset Intel Series Chipset 3 Motherboard OEM Motherboard 4 Storage The server should support SAS, SATA and SSD hard disk drives Must have an internal slot for SD card / Flash which supports booting hypervisors should have 2x300GB 12G SAS 15K rpm SFF drives 166 Scalable to two hot plug small form factor (SFF) Smart Drives The Blade should have support for Boot from SAN 5 Storage Controller Integrated hardware RAID Controller to support RAID 0,1 with 1GB FBWC (Flash back write cache) 6 Memory Configured with 16 GB DDR4 2133 MHz RAM Should have 16 DIMM Slots per blade and expandable to 1TB DDR4 2133 MHz Memory (using 64GB) Advanced ECC Memory protection 7 Network The Blade server should support Converged Network Adapter, which aggregates both the Ethernet and FC connectivity on a single controller It should support up to 40 Gb connectivity per server with a minimum of 2 ports, which is expandable to 80 Gb connectivity per server It should support two adapters per server Should include support for virtualized adapter with up to80 Gb connectivity and which can be partitioned into more than 32 NICs or HBAs, in both virtualized or non virtualized environments In a virtualized environment , the virtualized adapter should support both configuration options of passing through the hypervisor layer & or by passing the hypervisor Shouldbe able to support VMDirect I/O with Vmotion on VMware vSphere5 Adapter and QoS policies can be set and defined for each of the vNICs or vHBAs created in the virtualized adapter 8 Expansion Slots Two (2) I/O expansion mezzanine slots (x16 PCI 3.0) 9 Interfaces One (1) internal Micro Secure Digital High Capacity (Micro SDHC) card slot One (1) internal USB 3.0 connector for USB flash media drive keys 10 Graphics Integrated Graphics Controller 11 Management It should support remote KVM capability from an external keyboard, video monitor and mouse to all blades installed in the chassis through the management controllers Remote KVM should support up to 4 active sessions 12 Others The Blade should be hot pluggable 13 Form Factor Half height server blade form factor 14 Industry standard compliance ACPI 2.0 Microsoft® Logo certifications USB 3.0 Support Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Triple Data Encryption Standard (3DES) SNMP PCIe 3.0 Energy Star 167 15 Operating System and Virtualization Software support 16 Security Microsoft Windows Server Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) Oracle Solaris VMware -on password o SSL encryption o Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and Triple Data Encryption Standard (3DES) on browser, CLP and XML scripting interface o AES and RC4 encryption of video -New Instructions (AES-NI) 17 Environmental Operating Temperature support from 50 to 95°F (10 to 35°C) and Non operating Temperature from -22 to 140°F (-30 to 60°C) Operating Humidity from 10% to 90% non-condensing and Non-operating Humidity from 5% to 95% non-condensing Operating Altitude from 0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3000m) and Non operating Altitude upto 30,000 ft (9,000m) 3.2.c Caching- Rack servers (Generation 9) - 4 Nos. S.No. 1 Description Processor 2 * Intel® Xeon® E7-8891v3 2.8GHz 165W 10-core Processor with 45MB L3 Cache memory Scalable to four processors 2 Chipset Intel Series Chipset 3 Motherboard OEM Motherboard 4 Memory Minimum 64 GB DDR4 2133 MHz RAM upgradable to 128GB RAM 5 Storage 5 * 300GB 6G hot plug SAS 10,000 RPM, 2.5” HDD OR minimum 2 * 900 GB 10K RPM disks configured in RAID 0/1/5 for the Operating system & application binaries. Scalable to ten SFF hot plug hard disk drives Dual port 8GB fiber channel host bus adapter 6 Storage Controller Integrated hardware RAID Controller to support RAID 0,1,5 with 2G FBWC (Flash back write cache) 7 Optical Drive DVD RW Drive 168 8 Network Dual Port 10 Gibabit Ethernet adapter 9 Expansion Slots Up to 9 slots supported; all full-length/full-height. Standard: 4 PCI-E 3.0 x8, 5 PCI-E 3.0 x16. 10 Interfaces Serial - 1, Video - 1 front; 1 rear, Network RJ-45 – 4, iLO 4 Remote Management – 1, micro-SD Slot – 1, USB 2.0 Ports - 8 total: 2 front; 4 rear; 2 internal 11 Graphics Integrated Graphics Controller 12 Management 13 Power Supply Intelligent Provisioning Redundant ROM Remote Flash ROM Management Agents Integrated Management Log (IML) Automatic Server Recovery-2 (ASR-2) Pre-Failure Warranty (covers processors, SAS hard drives and memory) Redundant/adaptive load balancing NIC Support Hot Spare Boot 1200W Dual hot plug power supply Support upto 4 hot plug fans for N+N redundancy 14 System Fans 4 Hot Plug Fans 15 Form Factor 4U Rack 16 Industry standard compliance ACPI 2.0. Compliant PCIE 2.0 Compliant PXE Support WOL Support Physical Address Extension (PAE) Support Microsoft® Logo certifications USB 2.0 Support 17 Operating System and Virtualization Software support Microsoft Windows Server Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) VMware 18 Security Power-on password Keyboard password External USB port enable/disable Network Server Mode Serial interface control Administrator's password Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Intel® Secure Key 19 Environmental Operating Temperature support from 50 to 95°F (10 to 35°C) and Non operating Temperature from -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C) Operating Humidity from 10% to 90% non-condensing and Non-operating Humidity from 5% to 95% non-condensing Operating Altitude from 0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3000m) and Non operating Altitude upto 30,000 ft (9,000m) 169 3.2.d SAN storage for Caching – 40 TB (1 No.) and 20TB (1 No.) S.No. Parameters Description Storage System with NSPoF (No singlepoint of failure) Architecture.The storage system should support FC-SAN. The architecture should allow modular upgrades of hardware and software for investment protection. The architecture should allow modular upgrades of hardware and software for investment protection 1 Storage Architecture 2 Storage Controller The array should be equipped with N+N (with minimum of 2 array controllers) Nos. of array controllers for better performance redundancy and Failover capabilities 3 Controller Cache Requirements The system should have minimum 32 GB cache across redundant controllers with an ability to protect data on cache. Cache should be mirrored and battery backed.Cache battery backup should be atleast 48 hours. The Storage System should be configured with 1TB 7200 RPM SAS 6 Gbps HDDs. The storage system should be scalable to greater than 168 disks per system. Each controller to have atleast two nos. of 6Gbps drive ports for attaching disk expansion enclosures. Should support: * atleast 512 LUN for mapping to hosts * Should support more than 100 hosts * It should be possible to create a single LUN of minimum10TB The Storage System shall have the capability to support Storage Tiering to automatically manage Hot Spots in the system. 4 Storage Features The storage system should support Mix of FC-8Gbps, iSCSI1/10Gbps, FCoE without performing any controller upgrades. The ethernet ports should allow link aggregation/teaming for high availability and failover The SAN must support synchronous, asynchronous replication. Further, the replication must be bi-directional to support multiple replication options. The SAN must allow any LUN provided to a system configured with both types of server connectivity (fiber channel or iSCSI) and must be capable of mapping volumes from one connectivity type to the other without changing or copying the data. 5 Raid Levels 6 Disk Drive Support 7 Performance Offered Storage Subsystem shall support Raid 0, 1 , 1+0, 5 and Raid 6 Small form factor 2.5-inch disk drives: 146 GB, 300 GB @ 15k rpm 600 GB, 900 GB, 1.2 TB @ 10k rpm 1 TB @ 7.2k rpm SAS nearline Large form factor 3.5-inch disk drives: 300 GB @ 15k rpm, SAS 2.5-inch* 900 GB, 1.2 TB @ 10k rpm, SAS 2.5-inch* 2 TB, 3 TB, 4 TB @ 7.2k rpm SSD 2.5-inch drives: 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB The offered storage system shall have capability to use more than 30 drives per array group or raid group for better performance. 170 Should offer real time performance monitoring tools giving information on CPU utilization, volume throughput, I/O rate and latency 8 Storage Capacity 9 Management Software System should be configured with minimum 20TB usable capacity scalable to 40TB &40TB usable capacity expandable to 80TB based on 7.2K RPM Disk Drives on RAID 5 Bidder shall provide Storage Array configuration and web based Management software. Any Maintenance / Upgrade of firmware and management software should be performed with any disruption/downtime in the service 10 Global Hot Spare Storage Array shall support distributed Global hot Spare for offered Disk drives. Hot Spares should be provisioned with not less than one hot spare for every 30 drives. 11 Storage Scalability The array should be scalable to a minimum of 168 disks of the offered configuration of the disk count behind the same controller pair and 336 drives in two-way clustered systems 12 Protocol Support System should be configured with CIFS, NFS, Protocols. All the required licenses should be offered. 13 Snapshots and FullCopy (Snap Clone) The Storage array should support controller based functionality for pointer based snap copies. The pointer based snap copies should require minimal space for creation of snapshot. Required license to take snapshot and restore snap, a license for file-level Data should be provided. 14 Data De-duplication Offered Storage System Data de-duplication 15 OS Support The storage array should support industry-leading Operating System platforms including: Windows Server 2008, Windows 2012, VMware, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, IBM- AIX, and Linux. 16 Thin Provisioning and Compression to support file-level iSCSI, or FCoE block etc level Offered Storage System to have Thin Provisioning for file- level data. Storage array should support long distance data replication at storage level, if required through optional software license. The storage array should support hardware based data replication at the array controller level across all models of the offered family. 17 Disaster Recovery / Replication Support The Storage array shall also support multi-way (Across Data Centers located over long distances) replication to ensure zero RPO in native fashion (LUN to LUN) without using any additional replication appliance. Replication shall support incremental replication after resumption from Link Failure or failback situations. 18 Storage Tiering Offered storage shall support dynamic migration of Volume from one Raid set to another set while keeping the application online 19 Built in Redundancy The system shall support Fully Redundant & Hot Swappable Fans & Power Supplies. There shall be support for Non Disruptive Microcode Update & Non Disruptive Parts Replacement 20 AC Power 200-240VAC, 50Hz 21 Form Factor The proposed system should be Rack mountable 171 3.2.e SAN Switch S.No. Technical Specifications 1 Architecture 2. The Fiber Channel Switch should provide Non-blocking Architecture with 8FCPorts in a Single Domain Concurrently Active at 4/8Gbit/sec Full Duplex with NoOversubscription. 3. The Fiber Channel Switch should support auto-sensing 2, 4, 8, 10 and 8/16Gbit/sec FC capabilities. 4. The Fiber Channel Switch should be loaded with required SWLTransceivers. 5. The Fiber Channel Switch should support different port types such as F_Port,M_Port (Mirror/SPAN Port), EX_port and E_Port. 6. The Fiber Channel Switch should support Non-Disruptive Microcode/ FirmwareUpgrades and Hot Code Activation. 7 The Fiber Channel Switch should provide redundant and hot-pluggable components. 8 Performance 9. The Fiber Channel Switch should provide a minimum Aggregate Bandwidth: 8 ports × 4/8Gbit/sec (data rate) end to end. 10 Basic Features 11. The Fiber Channel Switch should support Quality of Service (QoS) to helpoptimize application performance in consolidated, virtual environments. It should be possible to define high, medium and low priority QOS zones to expedite high priority traffic. 12. The Fiber Channel Switch should be configured with the Zoning and ISLLicenses 13. The Fiber Channel Switch should support for web based management andshould also support CLI. 14. The Fiber Channel Switch should support Advanced Zoning and ACL to simplify administration and significantly increase control over data access. 15. The Fiber Channel Switch should support POST and online/offline diagnostics,includingRAStrace logging, environmental monitoring, non-disruptive daemon restart, FCping and Pathinfo (FC traceroute), port mirroring (SPAN port). 16 Rack Mount and Power Supply 17 The Fiber Channel Switch should be configured with 4-post rack mount Kit. 18 The Fiber Channel Switch should be loaded with hot swappable, redundantload sharing AC power supplies to provide 1:1 power supply redundancy for the fully loaded configuration. All Power Supply Module slots should be occupied with Power Supplies. 4.a Humidity, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems S.No. 1 Technical Specifications The NOC should be precision environment controlled. The temperature inside Server/network Farm area should be maintained at 20 degree centigrade with a precision of ± 2 degrees. The Precision Air Conditioning shall be provided for the Server Farm with around 1000-1500 sq.ft. area with necessary enhancements of cooling capacity in future in terms of additional indoor and outdoor units. The bidder should plan the location of such additional indoor and outdoor units. Bidder should also plan the location of such additional units in the area and lay additional conduits (including associated civil / electrical works) between locations of these additional indoor units and outdoor units, lay additional electrical cable & outlets so as to have other infrastructure ready for deploying additional indoor and outdoor units at a future date. Air Conditioning should be ensured to the extent of 99.749%. It is suggested to provide air supply typically through false flooring. 172 2 Air Conditioning Since NOC is a critical area, a separate air conditioning system (precision air conditioning) should be exclusively installed to maintain the required temperature. For other area can have a common air conditioning system for comfort. The general requirements for the two zones are as specified below: NOC – should be provided with precision air conditioning on a 24 x 7 x 365 days operating basis at least meeting with Tier – II having n + 1 redundancy architecture requirements and having enough provision to scale it to next level as may be required in a later stage. The units should be able to switch the air conditioner on and off automatically and alternately for effective usage in pre defined sequence. The units should be down-flow fashion, air-cooled conditioning system. Precision Air Conditioning systems specifically designed for stringent environmental Control with automatic monitoring and control of cooling, heating, humidification, dehumidification and air filtration function should be installed. Other area should be provided with split-type comfort air-cooled system (at least meeting with Tier - II architecture requirements). Help desk and NOC area should have a separate AC system, so that AC units can be switched off whenever required. 3 Natural Convection As the conditioned air is supplied through the grills with volume control dampers on the floor, the cold aircools the component in a much faster and efficient manner as it does moves up, after extracting heat from the component. This follows the natural convection path of the air. The warm air should be sucked at the top by machine, air-conditioned and then supplied back to the room. 4 Air Distribution The air is to be distributed evenly by providing grills with VCDs (Volume Control Dampers) in the floor tiles. 5 Flexibility The system should give the flexibility of discharging air at wherever point required even if the furniture is relocated. Changing the grill/tiles carrying grills, at suitable location does this. 4.b CCTV System S.No. Technical Specifications 1 The Critical area of the NOC along with the Non Critical area needs to be under constant video surveillance. The primary objective of a CCTV system is to ensure effective surveillance of the area and also create a record for post event analysis. The CCTV system should provide an on-line display of video images on monitor. The entire setup should be monitored from the control room as well as from NOC on 24x7 basis. 2 Fixed dome Analogue camera 3 16-Channel Digital Video recorder 4 32" LCD monitor 5 RG-11 Cable unarmored 6 20mm PVC Conduit low duty non FRLS 7 2 x 1.5 sq.mm copper conductor armoured cable non FRLS 4.c Access Control System S.No. Technical Specifications 173 1 The objective of the Access Control System is of allowing entry and exit to and from the premises to authorized personnel only with controlled by Biometric. Access control are provided for doors. These doors are with electric locks, and operate on failsafe principle. The lock remains unlocked in the event of a fire alarm or in the event of a power failure. 2 Two Reader Controller 3 ACS software with PC 4 24 Vdc power supply for Locks 5 6 Smart card Readers i-class or mifare technology with 2” read range capable of reading the facility code and unique card number from the card and also shall read the card data and passes on to the door controller for validation Pin based Access based card reader 7 Smart Cards 8 Electromagnetic Locks (600 Ibs) for single leaf doors 9 Electromagnetic Locks for Double Doors (2x600 Ibs) 10 Emergency Door Release (Break Glass Type) 11 Exit push button 12 Biometric Finger Print Reader 4.d Water Leak Detection System S.No. Technical Specifications 1 The water leak detector is to detect any seepage of water into the critical area and alert the Security Control Room for such leakage. It consists of water leak detection cable and an alarm module. 2 Water Leak detection 8zone Panel with LCD display, power supply 3 Water leak detection Tape Sensor (5 Mtr) 4 Sounder 5 2 x 1.5 Sq.mm PVC Insulated copper conductor unarmoured cable. 6 20mm PVC Conduit low duty non FRLS 4.e Pest Repellent System S.No. Technical Specifications 1 The entry of Rodents and other unwanted pests shall be controlled using non-chemical, non-toxic devices. However periodic pest control using Chemical spray can be done once in 3 months as a contingency measure to effectively fight the pest menace. 2 Rodent Panel 3 Transducer 4 Rodent unarmoured cable. 5 20mm PVC Conduit low duty non FRLS 174 4.f Public Address System S.No. Technical Specifications 1 Making public announcement from the Security Control Room and Facility Manager’s room. Clear and crisp announcement should reach to the entire Facility area. 4.g Fire Detection and Alarm System S.No. Technical Specifications 1 UL Listed / FM Approved Single Channel BLUE LED Based Aspiration Detection Unit 2 Power Supply Unit 3 Flush Capillary Sampling Point (Union and adaptor, 1.5m Capillary Tube & Sampling Point) 4 End Cap for large bore pipes, 25 mm 5 25mm PVC Conduit heavy duty FRLS 6 Gas based Fire Suppression System 7 Bidder would be responsible for refilling the gas, in case the fire suppression system has to be activated for suppressing fire and the defined time period required to refill the gas is 2-3 weeks. 8 120 ltrs Tank and valve assembly with pressure gauge 9 NOVEC 1230 Fluid Factory Fill Per Kg. 10 Electrical Actuator 11 Manual Actuator 12 Discharge Hose 13 Actuation / Pilot Hose 14 Swivel Adapter 15 Pressure Switch - Dpst 16 NOZZLE BRASS - 360/180 Degree 17 Cylinder Straps 18 Warning Sign 19 Manual Release Switch ( Break Glass Type) 20 Abort Switch ( Break Glass Type) 21 Gas Release Panel 4.h Civil and Electrical Works S.No. Technical Specifications 175 1 Includes false flooring, false ceiling, doors & locking, Partitioning, Fire Proofing of all surfaces, Furniture & fixtures and Painting and all other electrical repairs. It also includes cement concrete work, masonry work, and trench work, storage, glazing and scaffolding work TOTAL AN ARAE OF 2500 Sft where in 1500 Sft NOC room of tier-2 environment 2 Multi-point reference ground system with less than 2 ohm resistance. 3 Full building lightning protection 4.i UPS - SNMP enabled S.No. Technical Specifications 1 The power infrastructure should cater to the following: a Multiple utility feeds should be provided from separate substations or power grids to ensure constant system uptime Critical Load UPS 2 a 3 Supply of UPS of 20kVA, 3Ph input, 3Ph output, true online double conversion, IGBT based Inverter and rectifier UPS System with 15 minutes 12V SMF battery backup. Shall also include required number of SMF 12V batteries, Battery breakers, Base frame and supporting structure for UPS systems and complete as required.(The UPS should be provided with isolation transformer at the output.) Non-Critical Load UPS 4 Supply of UPS of 10kVA, 3Ph input, 3Ph output, true online double conversion, IGBT based Inverter and rectifier UPS System with 60 minutes SMF 12V battery backup. Shall also include required number of 12V SMF batteries, Battery breakers, Base frame and supporting structure for UPS systems and complete as required.(without Isolation transformer) Other Features a Power conditioning b N+1 configuration c Complete unit Redundancy d Online Double conversion Topology e Six Pack IGBT Technology f Liquid Cooling technology for IGBT g Input Voltage Range 250 V to 440 V h Input Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz 5 Zero Single Point of Failure electric distribution system with maintenance bypass Constantly available and operational a a b True diverse path and redundant power feeds for both dual and single corded equipment 5 - Head end: 250 channel (with 500 channels capable) (20 HD channels, 230 SD channels) – Qty. as required The Digital Headend shall support: - 230 SD and 20 HD, Total 250 Channels. - The Digital Headend should be MPEG-4 part 10 (h.264). - The total SD Encoding Services would be 108 SD. - The total HD Encoding Services would be 20 HD (Full Resolution). 176 - The other 122 services shall be the part of turnaround setup using 45 L-band transponders. Each L-band port shall have one CAM slot per L-band for descrambling the services. The Transcoding shall be offered for 122 services with Automatic Audio control for levelling and Loudness. The Digital Headend shall offer the Scrambled IP Output to transport to remote locations. The Edge QAM shall be offered with the Digital Headend proposal. The offered Digital headend shall be upgradeable to total of 500 channels, as and when may be required by adding additional equipment’s. The offered DHE platform should offer the best compression efficiency. The vendor shall produce the compression efficiency documents. The encoding chassis shall have interactive front panel for configuration. Each of the equipment shall support modular architecture and individual modules shall be independent to other modules of the same chassis processing different services. All the modules shall be hot swappable and shall support the inter module and Inter / intra chassis redundancy. The offered DHE shall include the proposal for Dish farm installation & L-band distribution. The offered Platform shall include the third party items and integration, Training services for DHE like, Switches, racks with accessories, cables, connectors, wiring, PSI_SI, Installation and training. The same supplier / vendor shall offer the end to end solution for Multiscreen Transport as required by us. The LMOs at remote sites shall insert up to 4 local services and these services shall be encrypted in BISS mode. All the equipment shall be controlled and managed by NMS. 177 Annexure I Network Route Map & Proposed locations of PoPs State Map: Enclosed as a separate file by names “STATEMAP.pdf” District Maps: Enclosed as a separate file by name “DISTRICTMAPS.pdf” Location of the proposed PoPs: Enclosed as separate file by the name “PoPlocations.xls” 178 Annexure II FORMS OF TENDER DECLARATION OF THE BIDDER (to be submitted by the bidder along with the bid) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) I/WE have not been black listed in any Central / State Government department or any PSU due to any reasons. I/WE agree to disqualify me/us for any wrong declaration in respect of any item and to summarily reject my/our tender. I/WE certify that I/We are clearly aware of the scope of the work and the BOQ / Specifications thereof and taken into consideration all requisite technical / financial aspects related to this project work before quoting my Percentage excess or less on ECV. I/WE am/are prepared to furnish detailed data in support of all my quoted rates, if and when called upon to do so without any reservations. I/WE hereby declare that I/We will pay an additional security deposit in terms of instructions to Bidders. I/WE hereby declare that I am/we are accepting to reject my tender in terms of conditions mentioned in this document. I/WE hereby declare that I am/we are accepting for the defect liability period as 12 months after the contract completion period (i.e. 12 Months after 9 Months of projects works completion period plus 12 Months of subsequent O&M period). I/WE declare that I/WE will procure the required equipment, cables, software and all other materials required for successful completion & maintenance of the project. I/WE shall ensure smooth and uninterrupted supply of required equipment, cables, software and all other materials. I/WE declare that I/WE will execute the work as per the time schedules and milestones specified in this document, and if I/WE fail to complete the work as per the milestones, I/WE abide by the condition to recover Liquidated Damages as per the tender conditions. I/WE declare that I/WE will abide for settlement of disputes as per the tender conditions I/WE declare that I/WE have carefully gone through this tender document and will abide by the terms and the conditions mentioned in this document. I/WE declare that I/WE submit hereby the requisite tender fee and EMD in the form of BG/DD as stipulated in this tender document. Address of the Bidder: Phone No.: Bidder Fax No.: 179 FORM OF AGREEMENT (to be entered between the successful bidder and the Authority) THIS AGREEMENT is made on the .......day of.………..... 2015 between (name of Authority) ................................................................................................ of (mailing address of Authority) ................................................................................................ hereinafter called “the Authority”, of the one part and (name of Contractor) .......................................................................... (here after called “the Contractor”) of the other part. WHEREAS the Authority is desirous that certain works should be executed, viz. (brief description of Works) .................................................................................... and has, by Letter of Acceptance dated (date of Letter of Acceptance) ................................................................., accepted a tender by the Contractor for the execution, completion and maintenance of such Works, NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows: 1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to. 2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement, viz: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) j) k) l) this Form of Agreement; Security deposit; the Letter of Acceptance; the said Tender and Appendix the Technical Specifications; Price Bid - Schedule – A (BoQ) & Schedule – B (Price Bid) Route Map & Network Design / Architecture; General Conditions of Contract Special Conditions of Contract Programme of Work 3. The aforesaid documents shall be taken as complementary and mutually explanatory of one another, but in the case of ambiguities or discrepancies shall take precedence in the order set out above. 4. In consideration of the payment to be made by the Authority to the Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Authority to execute, complete and maintain the works in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract. 5. The Authority hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion and maintenance of the Works the Contract Price at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused their respective Common Seals to be hereunto affixed (or have hereunto set their respective hands and seals) the day and year first above written. SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED. By the said By the said Name ................................................... Name ...……................................................ 180 On behalf of the Contractor In the presence of: On behalf of the Authority In the presence of: ................................................……….. ..............................……………................... Name ................................................... Name Address ............................................... Address .............…..................................… ...……................................................ ................................................... .….................................................. ................................................... .….................................................. 181 FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT / ADDITIONAL SECURITY DEPOSIT (to be submitted by the successful bidder only) In consideration of the Authority, ____________________,having agreed to accept from ___________________________________________________ “the said Contractor(s)”, a security deposit as may be modified from time to time wherever necessary under the terms and Conditions of the Contract entered into by the said Contractor(s) in respect of work ________________________________________ ______________________________________, Contract No. ______________________ under the Authority for the due fulfillment of the terms and conditions of the said Contracts under the said Authority, on production of a Bank Guarantee for Rs.___ (Rupees __________________________________only), we ____________________________Bank _______________________ branch, hereby undertake the guarantee to pay immediately to the Authority, on demand in writing by the Authority, an amount of Rs. __________ (Rupees __________________________ ____________________________________) without any reservation and recourse against any loss or damage caused to or suffered by the _________________ Authority by reason of any breach by the said Contractor(s) of any of the terms and conditions of the said contact under the said Authority We _______________________________________________ Bank, __________ further agree that the guarantee hereby contained shall remain in full force and effect during the period that will be taken for the performance of the said Agreement under the said Authority and that it shall be in enforcement until all the dues of the _____________ Authority under or by virtue of the said Contract under the said Authority have been fully paid and their claims satisfied or discharged or until the said Authority certifies that the terms and conditions of the said Agreement under the said Authority have been fully and properly carried out by the said Contractor(s) and accordingly discharges the guarantee subject, however, that the _________________ Authority shall have no rights under this guarantee after (date). We ____________ ___________________________ Bank Ltd., lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent of the Authority in writing. Dated ______________________ day of ________________ 2013. For ________________________________________________________ Bank. 182 FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) WHEREAS____________________________________________________ (name of firm (hereinafter called ‘BIDDER’) wish to participate in tender enquiry Notice No. INCAP(AP)/P/Optic Fiber Grid/ 62/2014, Dt.0707-2015 of The INCAP, AC Guards, Hyderabad-500 028, (hereinafter called the ‘INCAP’) for the Work: “Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh” AND WHEREAS in terms of the tender conditions the Bidder is required to furnish to the INCAP a Bank Guarantee for a sum of Rs. ________________ (Rupees ______________________________________________________________________) as earnest money against the Bidder’s offer aforesaid. AND WHEREAS We, _________________ Bank, ____________________________ branch have at the request of the Bidder agreed to give to the INCAP this guarantee as hereinafter contained. We, _______________________________________________________________ Bank, ________________________ branch, hereby undertake the guarantee to pay immediately to the INCAP, on demand in writing by the INCAP, an amount of Rs. ________________(Rupees ___________________________________________________) without any reservation and recourse if the Bidder shall for any reason withdraw whether expressly or implied their said tender during the period of its validity or any extension thereof or the Bidder fails to execute the agreement for the work awarded to them by the INCAP. We, The _________________________________ Bank, ______________________ further agree to that our liability to pay the aforesaid amount is not dependent or conditional on the INCAP proceeding against the Bidder and we shall be liable to pay the amount without any demur, merely on a claim raised by the INCAP. The guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or winding up or dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the said Bidder but shall in all respects and for all purposes be binding and operative until payment of all money(s) due to the INCAP in respect of such liability under the guarantee is restricted to Rs. ____________ (Rupees _____________________________________________________). Our guarantee shall remain in force until _______________________________. We shall be relieved and discharged from all our liability there under. We, the ______________________________________, undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its pendency/currency except with the previous consent of the INCAP in writing. Station : Name of the Bank 183 : Indemnity Bond (to be submitted by the bidder along with the bid) I/We ……………………………………...Resident of ……………………………………………… do hereby bind myself to pay all the claims may come (a) under Workmen’s Compensation Act. 1933 with any statutory modification thereof and rules there under or otherwise for or in respect of any damage or compensation payable in connection with any accident or injury sustained (b) under Minimum wages Act 1948 (c) under payment of wages Act.1936 (d) under the Contractor labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act. 1970 by workmen engaged for the performance of the business relating to the above contract i.e., failing such payment of claims of workmen engaged in the above work, I/We abide in accepting for the recovery of such claims, effected from any of my assets with the departments. Contractor 184 KEY PERSONNEL PROPOSED (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) S.No Name of the Key personnel Seal of Company Qualification Designation Name : Signature : Date : Designation : 185 Proposed Role Experience Details RECORD OF ARBITRATION & LITIGATION (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) The Bidder shall record chronologically any disputes he has had with any of his previous Clients during the last 10 years, indicate whether Arbitration or Litigation, the nature, approximate duration and amount of claim involved in respective cases. S No Project Identification and Location . Name and Address of Client, tel & fax Nature of Dispute Descriptio n Arbit’n/ Period Amount Litigat’ n From -To Claimed (lakh Rs). Name: Signature: Seal of Company Date: Designation: Result In favour of Client/ Contractor DECLARATION (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) I / WE ……………………………………………………………….have gone through carefully all the Tender conditions and solemnly declare that / we will abide by any penal action such as disqualification or black listing or determination of contract or any other action deemed fit, taken by, the Authority against us, if it is found that the statements, documents, certificates produced by us are false / fabricated. I / WE hereby declare that, I / WE have not been blacklisted / debarred / suspended / demoted in any department in Andhra Pradesh or in any State due to any reasons as on date of bid submission. Signature of the Bidder Note: The declaration as mentioned above shall be filled in and signed the bidder and shall be uploaded in the eprocurement platform. Letter of Authorization to attend Bid Opening (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) (To be typed on the letterhead of the company) To Subject: Authorization for attending bid opening on (date) in the Tender of _________________________________________. . I/ We Mr. /Ms. ........................................... have submitted our bid for the tender no. …………………………………………………………………………….. in respect of ............................................................................................................. (Item of work) which is due to open on .......................... (date). Following persons are hereby authorized to attend the bid opening for the tender mentioned above on behalf of ……………………………………………………(Bidder) in order of preference given below. Order of Preference Name Specimen Signatures I. II. Alternate Representative Signatures of Bidder/ Officer authorized to sign the bid Documents on behalf of the Bidder. Note: 1. Maximum of two representatives will be permitted to attend bid opening. In cases where it is restricted to one, first preference will be allowed. Alternate representative will be permitted when regular representatives are not able to attend. 2. Permission for entry to the hall where bids are opened, may be refused in case authorization as prescribed above is not received 188 MANUFACTURER AUTHORIZATION FORM (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) Bidder needs to submit MAF from all OEMs including Network Equipments, IT & non-IT Components and Software Product Manufacturers Manufacturers'/Producers’ Authorization Form (On Company letterhead only) Date: dd/mm/yyyy To, VC & MD Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh Limited (INCAP), Hyderabad, Telangana Subject: Supply of equipment for “Implementation and Management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing poles / sub stations to establish state-wide wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the State of Andhra Pradesh ” for INCAP Sir, This is to certify that ; I/we am/are the Original Equipment Manufacturers (“OEM”) in respect of the products listed below (“Products”). I/We confirm the Products listed herein have not been announced as End-of-Life or End-of-Sale. I/We confirm that (“bidder”) has due authorization from us to resell and supply certain OEM Equipment(s), to INCAP / any other designated Government Authority. The bidder is authorised by us, to provide the solution, implementation, requisite training & maintenance services, provide maintenance and upgrade support services for our products for the listed Information Technology infrastructure and System Integration services to INCAP /any other designated Government Authority. When resold by reseller the Products shall be subject to applicable warranty terms and service policies of the OEM. I/We affirm that as of the date of this letter, we shall make support available for the Product(s) and provide support of parts for repair (or functionally equivalent replacements) thereof for a period of up to seven (7) years from the date of sale to INCAP / any other designated Government Authorityand that we currently expect to make these Products, or subsequent versions or functional equivalents of them, available for sale during such period of time. We assure you that in the event of bidder, not being able to fulfil its obligation as our representative in respect of applicable standard warranty terms we would continue to meet our warranty terms for the entire term of the bidder agreement with INCAP / any other designated Government Authority, as signed at the start of the project, through appropriate alternate arrangement(s) through our support mechanism in India. This authorization letter is applicable against the Products listed below: S. No. Product Name 1. 2. 3. For and on behalf of Cc: Bidder’s corporate name & Address 189 Manufacturers'/Producers’ Authorization Form (For Optical Fiber) (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) (On Company letterhead only) Date: dd/mm/yyyy To, VC & MD Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh Limited (INCAP), Hyderabad, Telangana Subject: Supply of equipment for “Implementation and Management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing poles / sub stations to establish state-wide wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the State of Andhra Pradesh ” for INCAP Sir, This is to certify that ; I/we am/are the Original Equipment Manufacturers (“OEM”) in respect of the products listed below (“Products”). I/We confirm the Products listed herein have not been announced as End-of-Life or End-of-Sale. I/We confirm that (“bidder”) has due authorization from us to resell and supply certain OEM Equipment(s), to INCAP / any other designated Authority. The bidder is authorised by us, to provide the solution, implementation, requisite training & maintenance services, provide maintenance and upgrade support services for our products for the listed Information Technology infrastructure and System Integration services to INCAP / any other designated Authority. When resold by reseller the Products shall be subject to applicable warranty terms and service policies of the OEM. I/We affirm that as of the date of this letter, we shall make support available for the Product(s) and provide support of parts for repair (or functionally equivalent replacements) thereof for a period of up to twenty (20) years from the date of sale to INCAP / any other designated Authority and that we currently expect to make these Products, or subsequent versions or functional equivalents of them, available for sale during such period of time. We assure you that in the event of bidder, not being able to fulfil its obligation as our representative in respect of applicable standard warranty terms we would continue to meet our warranty terms for the entire term of the bidder agreement with INCAP / any other designated Authority, as signed at the start of the project, through appropriate alternate arrangement(s) through our support mechanism in India. This authorization letter is applicable against the Products listed below: S. No. Product Name 1. 2. 3. For and on behalf of Cc: Bidder’s corporate name & Address Note: This letter of authority should be on the letterhead of the manufacturer and should be signed by a person competent and having the power of attorney to bind the manufacturer. The bidder in its Bid should include it. 190 INTEGRITY PACT (to be entered into between the successful bidder and the Authority) Between The Authority and ………………………………..hereinafter referred to as “The Bidder/Contractor” Preamble The Authority intends to award, under laid down organizational procedures, contract/s for ------------------------------------------. The Authority values full compliance with all relevant laws and regulations, and the principles of economic use of resources, and of fairness and transparency in its relations with its Bidder/s and Contractor/s. In order to achieve these goals, the Authority will appoint Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) who will monitor the tender process and the execution of the contract for compliance with the principles mentioned above. Section 1 – Commitments of the Authority (1) (2) The Authority commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption and to observe the following principles:(a) No employee of the Authority , personally or through family members, will in connection with the tender for, or the execution of a contract, demand, take a promise for or accept, for him/herself or third person, any material or immaterial benefit which he/she is not legally entitled to. (b) The Authority will, during the tender process treat all Bidder(s) with equity and reason. The Authority will in particular, before and during the tender process, provide to all Bidder(s) the same information and will not provide to any Bidder(s) confidential/additional information through which the Bidder(s) could obtain an advantage in relation to the tender process or the contract execution. (c) The Authority will exclude from the process all known prejudiced persons. If the Authority obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees which is a criminal offence under the relevant Anti-Corruption Laws of India, or if there be a substantive suspicion in this regard, the Authority will inform its Vigilance Office and in addition can initiate disciplinary action. Section 2 – Commitments of the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) (1) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption. He commits himself to observe the following principles during his participation in the tender process and during the contract execution. (a) Thee Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm, offer, promise or give to any of the Authority’s employees involved in the tender process or the execution of the contract or to any third person any material or immaterial benefit which he/she is not legally entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of any kind whatsoever during the tender process or during the execution of the contract. 191 (2) (b) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not enter with other Bidder(s) into any undisclosed agreement or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to prices, specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-submission of bids or any other actions to restrict competitiveness or to introduce cartelization in the bidding process. (c) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not commit any offence under the relevant Anti-corruption Laws of India; further the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not use improperly, for purposes of competition or personal gain, or pass on to others, any information or document provided by the Authority as part of the business relationship, regarding plans, Technical proposals and business details, including information contained or transmitted electronically. (d) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all payments he has made, is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in connection with the award of the contract. The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not instigate third persons to commit offences outlined above or be an accessory to such offences. Section 3 – Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from future contracts If the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s), before contract award or during execution has committed a transgression through a violation of Section 2, above or in any other form such as to put his reliability or credibility in question, the Authority is entitled to disqualify the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) from the tender process or take action as per the defined procedure. (1) (2) Section 4 – Compensation for Damages If the Authority has disqualified the Bidder(s) from the tender process prior to the award according to Section 3, the Authority is entitled to demand and recover the damages equivalent to Earnest Money Deposit / Bid Security. If the Authority has terminated the contract according to Section 3, or if the Authority is entitled to terminate the contract according to section 3, the Authority shall be entitled to demand and recover from the Contractor the amount equivalent to Security Deposit / Performance Bank Guarantee in addition to any other penalties/ recoveries as per terms and conditions of the tender. Section 5 – Previous transgression (1) The Bidder declares that no previous transgression occurred in the last 3 years with any other Company in any country conforming to the Anti-corruption approach or with any other Public Sector Enterprise in India that could justify his exclusion from the tender process. (2) If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from the tender process or action can be taken as per the defined procedure. Section 6 – Equal treatment of all Bidders/Contractors (1) The Authority will enter into agreements with identical conditions as this one with all Bidders/Contractors. (2) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) undertake(s) to demand from all members (if bidder is a consortium), a commitment in conformity with this Integrity Pact. (3) The Authority will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do not sign this Pact or violate its provisions. 192 Section 7 – Criminal charges against violating Bidder(s) / Contractor(s) / SubContractor(s) If the Authority obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or SubContractor, or of an employee or a representative or an associate of a Bidder, Contractor or SubContractor, which constitutes corruption, or if the Authority has substantive suspicion in this regard, the Authority will inform the appropriate Vigilance Authority. Section 8 – External Independent Monitor/Monitors (1) Authority appoints Project Monitoring Agency (PMA) for this Pact. The task of the Monitor is to review independently and objectively, whether and to what extent the parties comply with the obligations under this agreement. (2) The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and performs his functions neutrally and independently. He reports to the Vice Chairman & Managing Director, INCAP / any other designated Authority. (3) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) accepts that the Monitor has the right to access without restriction to all Project documentation of the Authority including that provided by the Contractor. The Contractor will also grant the Monitor, upon his request and demonstration of a valid interest, unrestricted and unconditional access to his project documentation. The same is applicable to SubContractors. The Monitor is under contractual obligation to treat the information and documents of the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s)/SubContractor(s) with confidentiality. (4) (5) Notwithstanding anything contained in this Section, the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) shall have no obligation whatsoever to provide any internal costing mechanisms or any internal financial or commercial data pursuant to any audit or review conducted by or on behalf of the Authority. Further, the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) shall not be required to provide any data relating to its other customers, or any personnel or employee related date. The Authority will provide to the Monitor sufficient information about all meetings among the parties related to the Project provided such meetings could have an impact on the contractual relations between the Authority and the Contractor. The parties offer to the Monitor the option to participate in such meetings. As soon as the PMA notices, or believes to notice, a violation of this agreement, he will so inform the Management of the Authority and request the Management to discontinue or take corrective action, or to take other relevant action. The monitor can in this regard submit non-binding recommendations. Beyond this, the PMA has no right to demand from the parties that they act in a specific manner, refrain from action or tolerate action. Section 9 – Pact Duration This Pact begins when both parties have legally signed it. It expires for the Contractor 12 months after the last payment under the contract. If any claim is made/ lodged during this time, the same shall be binding and continue to be valid despite the lapse of this pact as specified above, unless it is discharged/determined by the Authority. 193 Section 10 – Other Provisions (1) This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and jurisdiction is the Registered Office of the Authority, i.e. Hyderabad. The arbitration clause provided in the tender document / contract shall not be applicable for any issue /dispute arising under Integrity Pact. (2) Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be made in writing. (3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be, signed by all partners or consortium members. (4) Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid, the remainder of this agreement remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their original intensions. -------------------------------- ---------------------------------- For the Authority For the Bidder/Contractor Place…………………… Witness1: ……………………………… Date …………………… ……………………………… Witness 2: 194 Compliance Certificate (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) It is to certify that the tender document – Tender No……………. dated…………….is carefully read & understood and all the sections and clauses are COMPLIED UNCONDITIONALLY AND UNEQUIVOCALLY. There is no deviation from the terms & conditions of the tender. Signature of Authorized Signatory of the Bidder Company Seal Date 195 Statement of Deviation from Required Specifications (to be submitted by the bidders along with the bid) To Vice Chairman & Managing Director Infrastructure Corporation of Andhra Pradesh (INCAP) Hyderabad Date: Sub: Statement of Deviation – Reg. Ref No: NIT. No . INCAP(AP)/P/Optical Fiber Grid / 62/2014 Dated: 07-07-2015 Name of Work: Implementation and management of Aerial Optical Fiber Grid leveraging the existing electrical poles / Sub Stations to establish state wide optical fiber network infrastructure in the state of Andhra Pradesh Sir, There are no technical deviations (null deviations) from the required specifications of tendered items and schedule of requirements. The entire work shall be performed as per your specifications and documents. OR (Strike out whatever is not applicable) Following is the exhaustive list of technical deviations and variations from the required specifications of tendered items and schedule of requirements. Except for these deviations and variations, the entire work shall be performed as per your specifications and documents. S. No. Item / Component Required Specifications / Features Tender Document Page No. Statement of deviations and variations 1. 2. Witness Signature Bidder Signature Name: Designation: Address: Directorate: Date: Name: Designation: Address: Directorate: Date: Bidder Seal 196 Annexure III Guidelines for Installation of ADSS Aerial Optical Fiber Cable 1. Scope This document is intended to provide guidelines for selection of appropriate methodology for aerial installation of ADSS optical Fiber Cable on Existing Electrical Poles of 440/220/132/33/11 KV Lines and LT lines as per the roupe map and network design. 2. Installation Techniques The techniques used in installation of Aerial ADSS Optical Fiber Cables are described here. With the proper installation hardware and skilled resource, any of these methods can be used to install ADSS cable. Many a times, it will become necessary to use a combination of these methods to achieve full installation. Selection of the specific technique (i.e. Moving Drum method, Stationary Drum method or Manual Installation method), or a combination thereof, shall largely depend on the actual site conditions. The Contractor shall select the most appropriate installation technique suitable to the site conditions. a. Moving Drum Method In this method the cable is pulled directly from the cable drum mounted on a moving vehicle as it drives along the pole line. The cable drum must be mounted on a proper support to allow easy cable pay off. At the dead-end point, the cable is terminated using Termination Assembly sets and tensioned using turnbuckles to maintain cable sag within permissible value. To start installation, park the vehicle with the cable drum approximately 1 5 - 20 meters away from the pole facing away from it down the pole line. The cable must pay off from top of the drum towards the rear of the vehicle. Install the termination supports and temporary hooks on the poles at the starting point and subsequent poles. Pull off the necessary amount of slack, lift the dead-end to the top of the pole and mount on the termination assembly. Once the cable is fixed at both ends with at the terminating assemblies, carry out tensioning. After the cable section is properly tensioned and secured at both ends lift the cable out of the hooks at each of the intermediate pole and support it with the suspension set assemblies. b. Stationary Drum Method In this method of aerial cable installation, the cable is pulled along the cable route through temporary support hardware. Stationery drum installation method requires installation of temporary support hardware such as pulley blocks. A rope wound on the tension limiting winch is passed through the pulleys and connected to the cable on the drum installed on a stand which allows free rotation of the drum. The pulling load should normally not exceed 60% of the maximum permissible cable tension recommended by cable supplier. The cable drum and winch locations must have vehicular access. The cable drum should always be placed on levelled ground so that its flanges are vertical thus avoiding rubbing of cable against flanges. The orientation should be such that the cable pay-off is directly in the direction of pull. Always pay-out the cable from top of the drum and not from bottom. The drum should have provision to allow controlled pay-out of cable. Cable pay-out needs to be controlled to prevent free running or jerking. 197 Once the cable is completely pulled end to end, it is then ready for installation of permanent supporting system of terminating and suspension set assemblies at required locations and tensioning for sag control. c. Manual Installation Method Manual installation method technique is similar to stationary drum method, except that in this case the cable is uncoiled from the drum and placed on the ground in the shape of 8. The pulling operation is same as in stationary drum method. The hardware requirement and pulling equipment also remains same. For pulling in both directions, two loops ofshape of 8 can be made and each can be pulled in separate directions. Loops of size 4 to 5m x 1.5m should be sufficient in most cases. 3. Installation of Accessories a. Pole Clamp Prior to fixing any temporary supports/stringing blocks or permanent cable suspension / termination assemblies, it is necessary to fix pole clamps. Appropriate type of pole clamps will be required depending on the shape of the pole. The two halves shall be opened and fixed at the specified height using tightening bolts. b. Terminating (or Dead End) Assembly Termination assemblies are required at dead ends locations where: i. cable needs to be terminated at the end facility ii. loops are to be kept for future maintenance activities For double sided termination assembly 2 sets would be required. To fix a termination Assembly following accessories are required: i. Protective Helix on the cable, ii. Terminating Helix with a thimble, iii. Clevis Thimble, iv. Spiral Vibration Damper c. Suspension Assembly ADSS optical fiber cable shall be supported on all intermediate poles between two terminating poles using the pole clamp and a suspension assembly set. To fix a suspension Assembly following accessories are required: i. Protective Helix on the cable, ii. Suspension Helix, iii. Clevis Thimble, iv. Spiral Vibration Dampers d. Installing Cable Loop / Storage / Joint Closure Cable loops are to be provided for future maintenance purposes at regular spacing. A fixture is required to be installed. Excess cable is then wound & kept on support. The fixture provides a means to ensure proper bend radius is maintained. Separate clamp is required for installation of Joint Closures. 198 e. Supporting Jumper Cable Clamp Jumper cable hanging between a pair of Termination Assemblies installed at locations where there is sharp change in direction need to be supported with a special twisted link. To support jumper cable, Use already installed pole clamp. f. Cable Tensioning After the required length of cable has been placed, the cable shall be properly tensioned before it is permanently secured into suspension assemblies. The temporary dead end should be installed 4 to 5 m from the pole so that after complete tension is applied, appropriate permanent termination assembly set can be installed while the cable is in tension. The chain hoist will also need to be tied to the pole directly using a sling and not onto the pole clamp. Once the cable sections are under the required tension and the sag is within limits (i.e. less than 1% of span), the “free” end of the cable used for tensioning is fitted with termination assembly set and terminated. Once the load is transferred on to permanent termination end, the temporary arrangement shall be removed. g. Machinery / Equipment / Tools i. Ropes and light weight ladder for installation of termination/suspension assemblies, clamps etc. ii. Temporary supports, dynamometer, chain hoists, temporary dead ends, steel cables, etc. required during cable laying and/or cable pulling and cable tensioning operations as applicable will have to be arranged by the Contractor. iii. Van with portable splicing machines and OTDR, power meter, cable preparation kits, etc. for splicing and testing of installed ADSS Optic al Fiber Cable. iv. Other tools and tackles shall include wrenches, spanners, screw drivers, hammer, ropes etc. v. All safety equipment such as safety belts, insulating and cotton gloves and hard hats, fluorescent vests etc. as required 199 Annexure IV Quality Assurance General Quality Assurance Program (QAP) Within 15 days of Agreement signing, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Quality Assurance Plan (QAP), which shall generally conform to relevant ISO requirements. Approval to proceed with manufacture of equipment within this Contract will not be given until the QAP for all major equipment / material has been received and approved by the Authority. Delays to the Contract completion date due to non-compliance with this specification requirement will be the Contractor's responsibility. Major features of the QAP shall ensure: (a) The Contractor has defined all staff responsibilities and the QA systems operating within the organization for the purpose of ensuring adequate quality of the end product. (b) The Contractor has a senior officer with the Authority available at site all the time to resolve matters of quality to the satisfaction of the Client. (c) The Contractor has adequate facilities under the control of properly trained staff to perform the quality control duties. (d) All production operations and test functions are properly documented and available to any relevant member of the Contractor's workforce. (e) A detailed inspection and test plan is prepared for the whole manufacturing operation. (f) Regular and systematic programmes of testing are carried out for all incoming raw materials. (g) Regular calibration checks are carried out on all measuring equipment used in the manufacturing operations. (h) Statistical analyses are carried out regularly on appropriate test results to confirm that all processes are performing within the specified tolerances. (i) Adequate procedures are planned for corrective action in the event that quality checks show that performance is not satisfactory. (j) All checking activities, test results etc. are recorded on appropriate standardized forms and these are verified, certified, recorded and filed in a systematic manner. The above listing is not exhaustive and any additional systems are to be put in by Contractor to ensure timely and effective execution of the project. 200 Annexure V Installation Methodology Live Line Installation Requirement All of the ADSS fiber cable under this project shall be installed under live line condition i.e. with all the circuits of the line charged to their rated voltage. The ADSS cable shall be installed on power distribution poles on 33kV, 11kV and 440/220/132/33/11 KV Lines and LT distribution lines. The Contractor shall carry out proper tensioning wherever required to maintain the adequate ground clearance and clearance from the live conductor. The detailed installation methodology shall be furnished in the Technical bid and finalized during the detailed engineering. The installation shall be generally in accordance with the latest version of IEEE Guide to the Installation of Overhead transmission Line Conductor with additional instructions and precautions for live line working and fiber optic cable handling. The Contractor shall ensure that there shall be no outage of the distribution line during the live line stringing of ADSS cable and live line strengthening of the poles. Analysis for Support augmentation / strengthening After finalization of the ADSS cable design, analysis shall be carried out by the Contractor to ensure that with the stringing of ADSS cable, the pole remains stable as per the relevant standards. The bidder shall consider the requirement of such analysis to meet the specified requirement and no separate payment shall be payable for any design analysis for the poles / ADSS/underground armored optical fibers parameter finalization. The successful bidder is required to provide pole strengthening mechanisms such as cross arms, pole stays/guys etc. to ensure that the safety of the existing power infrastructure is not compromised. This requirement has not been reflected as a separate item in the price schedule and therefore any costs associated with it should be included in the item price of other items included in the price schedule. Contractor's Responsibility Safety of Personnel The Contractor shall afford maximum safety to personnel directly engaged on this Contract or to persons who, in the normal course of their occupation, find it necessary to utilize temporary works erected and to frequent the working area. The Contractor and the Client / Authority shall establish and agree to a system for ensuring the safety of personnel and equipment. While the plant is under the control of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be primarily responsible for the safety precautions. Indemnification of the Client The project is a live line installation of ADSS. The Client assumes that the Contractor is aware of any and all risks associated with this project. Under this assumption the Client considers itself indemnified against any and all charges/legal proceedings for any accidents associated with the project. The Clientwill however extend any reasonably possible help. Training of Authority’s Staff 201 The Contractor shall facilitate hands-on-training and handling of special tools and tackles, as relevant to the engineers and line staffs during site installation. The number of the line staffs to be deputed to the site will be determined by the Client. The Client line staffs shall be associated with project from the onset of the work. The cost associated with such hands-on training during at project site is deemed to have been included in the overall price of the Contract. The Contractor shall also provide formal classroom training and field visits on Optical Fiber Communications/Maintenance Techniques and other relevant fields as may be determined by the Authority , to at least five (5) engineers and 10 line staffs at their home office/manufacturers works for ten (10) working days. The training modalities shall be finalized after the award of Contract. The cost associated with such training is deemed to have been included in the overall price of the Contract Progress Reports Fortnightly, the Contractor shall submit to the Client detailed progress reports (in triplicate) in an approved form indicating the stage reached in the design, ordering of material, manufacture, delivery and supervision of erection of all components of plant. All variances from the agreed schedule are to be promptly reported. These reports shall be forwarded promptly so that, on receipt by the Client, the information contained therein is not more than seven days old. Copies shall also be forwarded to the Client's representative on Site. These reports shall be prepared using project management software like Microsoft Project 2000 similar project management software. The soft copies of the report shall also be supplied to the Client. The Contractor shall submit to the Client a fortnightly work plan detailing for each portion of the works separately, the numbers of the various classes of workmen deployed by him on the Site, the Contractor's equipment on site, or any other information that may reasonably be required. Access to the Contractor's and Sub-Contractor's works shall be granted to the Client at all reasonable times for the purpose of ascertaining progress. Progress Review Meetings The Contractor shall attend regular formal site Progress Review Meetings (PRM) monthly with the Client where progress and installation-related issues will be reviewed. If requested by the Client the Contractor shall prepare for issue of the day before the meeting, detailed schedules showing separately the erection, fixing, concreting, commissioning, or other work activities planned for the next two weeks as well as progress achieved over the preceding week. The Contractor shall also be required to attend other meetings from time to time on special subjects. Public Relations The Contractor shall not publish or provide any information relating to progress or financial status of the works to any person or organization without the prior consent of the Client. Contractors Responsibility The Contractor shall fully comply with applicable environmental laws, regulatory requirements, and clients requirements including the key requirements listed below: The Contractor shall designate a focal person at every project site to ensure compliance to regulations and any other requirements governing the project; 202 The Contractor should as far as possible ensure to avoid occurrence of accidents at the work site. The Contractor shall ensure to provide reports on incidents and cases of accidents occurred at work site within 24 hours and its corresponding corrective and preventive measures taken to deal with such issues; Managers and supervisors will participate in environmental self-assessments, monitoring and audits, incident investigations; additionally, supervisors are responsible for conducting monthly meetings to emphasize important ES&H issues associated with their work activities including any deficiencies and corrective actions; All the workers will be supplied with appropriate personal protective equipment (e.g., safety helmet, safety glasses, protective gloves and boots etc.) and tools where applicable to allow them to perform their work safely, maintain equipment in good working condition, and operate equipment in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations; Client may set further safety requirements that may apply depending on the Contractor’s scope of work, site-specific conditions, or when specialized equipment is used in accordance with the applicable norms. The Contractor shall demonstrate in his EMP proposal that he has incorporated all applicable safety and health requirements to the risks and hazards associated with their scope of work. Contractors will be responsible for conducting regular inspections and periodic evaluations of their work activities to ensure compliance with the project’s ES&H requirements, environmental clearance requirements etc. Contractor’s inspection and audit results will be made available to client for review. Safety and Health Contractors are responsible for complying with all applicable safety and health (S&H) regulations, manuals, and the Contractor’s own S&H requirements as they apply to their scope of work. Contractors may be required to provide a written S&H Plan that specifically addresses the hazards and corresponding mitigation measures associated with their scope of work. Prior to starting work, Contractors will demonstrate to client that all applicable safety procedures have been adopted. Contractor is expected to perform weekly pre-task planning to identify potential hazards and the corresponding mitigation measure(s) to eliminate or minimize the risk associated with performance of the work. Contractors will be responsible for promptly reporting all injuries and near misses to the Authority’s onsite management and conducting an incident investigation in a timely manner. The incident investigation should focus on identifying and documenting the root cause(s), finding(s), and corrective action(s) to prevent a reoccurrence of the incident. Contractors are required to provide an employee who is currently certified in first aid to render adequate treatment for their employees working onsite or make available first aid medical facilities available on site. The Contractor shall hold the proponent/the Authority harmless from any liability for not complying with environmental laws and regulations and any other requirements governing the project. 203 Annexure VI Acceptance Test Procedure PMA would be responsible to oversee the work being done by Contractor to ensure quality of work as well as quantity verification. Contractor need to coordinate with PMA for getting the certification done and the schedules for the same need to be planned by the contractor in consultation with the PMA. All records and testing output conducted by Contractor has to be verified by PMA. PMA will have the responsibility of Quality Review of the work done by Contractor on day to day basis for all 100% sites. GIS co-ordinates of the entire OFC route at an interval of every 500 metres (including Equipment Site, Jointing / Splicing) shall be captured by Contractor and will be updated in the GIS tool deployed by the contractor for this project. This GIS tool need to be bought in the name of the Authority and will belong to Authority. PMA will certify the quality of work as well as quantity of material on behalf of the Authority for equipment, Fiber, OTDR Testing, laying of OFC, splicing etc. PMA shall do verification of Contractor’s final deliverables including ABDs. PMA shall conduct all pre-defined tests for ensuring quality of work done by Contractors including: i. Field Acceptance Test - of OFC laid ii. End to End testing – of OFC route from POP to POP. For all such testing’s the requisite tools shall be provided by the contractor to the PMA. The Authority shall have the right to cause an audit and Technical examination of the work and the final bills of the Contractor including all supporting vouchers, abstract etc. to be made after payment of the final bill and if as a result of such audit and Technical examination any sum is found to have been overpaid in respect of any work done by the Contractor under the contract or any work claimed by him to have been done by him under the contract and found not to have been executed, the Contractor shall be liable for refund of the amount of over payment and it shall be lawful for The Authority to recover the same from Contractor. i. The Authority shall be entitled to recover any sum overpaid. ii. Any sum of money due and payable to the Contractor (including security deposit returnable to him) under this contract may be appropriated by the Authority for the payment of a sum of money arising out or under any other contract made by the Contractor with the Authority. 1. Measurement & Inspection i. Measurement: The measurement books are to be prepared by Contractor PoP-wise and are to be certified by PMA. One hard bound copy (duly signed on each page by Contractor and PMA) and soft copies (scanned) in three CDs will be handed over by PMA to the Authority every month. ii. Method of recording of complete nomenclature of items, as given in the agreement need not be reproduced in the measurement sheet for recording the measurement but corresponding item code as provided, shall be used. iii. The measurements of various items of work shall be taken and recorded in the measurements sheet. The measurements shall be taken and recorded by Contractor which will be countersigned by the PMA. PMA shall be directly responsible for supervision of work, shall be responsible for accuracy of 100% of measurements. All the support in terms of tools, availability of manpower at sites and all other assistance etc shall be provided by the contractor. The Authority, without any prejudice, reserves the right to carry out any kind of inspection of the works being carried out by PMA and Contractor at any time to ascertain its quantity and quality. 204 iv. Site Images (Photographs) for PoP locations and others shall be taken by Contractor through Digital Cameras during Acceptance Testing and verification of measurement book. The images should be minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. The images must display the date and time of capture of the image on it bottom right corner. The digital camera should also have the capability to record the GPS coordinates of the location and embed the co-ordinates (Latitude, Longitude and Altitude) as EXIF data in the image. No alteration or fabrication or makeover of any kind should be made to the Site images being submitted. Site images shall be captured at every 500 meters and at PoP site. The site images are to be captured in such a manner so that the object being captured is clearly visible and the surrounding areas are also identifiable or distinguishable. The photographs shall be printed in sizes 5” x 7” (matte) and attached along with the Field Acceptance Test Report. The site images, in soft copies, are to be maintained in separate folders / directories and nomenclature as per the PoP. The site images should be so arranged such that they are easily locatable and identifiable in the folder where they are stored. The site images are to be monthly recorded on a non-erasable, good quality Compact Disk and sent to the Authority along with the Monthly Status Reports. The site images are to be uploaded and GIS co-ordinates are to be entered by Contractor in the project management tool and GIS tool. Printing of site images to be arranged by the contractor. v. Method of measurement: The measurement of the work shall be done activity-wise as and when the item of work is ready for measurement. The methods of measurement of various items are enumerated as under: a. Measurement of length of cable The length of cables laid on poles shall be measured by use of PON OTDR. The length should be crossverified with the marking of lengths on the cables. The lengths shall be recorded in sheet provided in the measurement book. b. Measurement of other items The measurement/ numerical details of other items shall be recorded in the sheets provided for respective items viz.  Termination of Cable in equipment room  The number of joints.  Record splice loss details for each joint. c. The PMA & Contractor shall sign all the measurement recorded in the measurement sheet/book. This will be considered as an acceptance by the PMA of measurements recorded in the MB by Contractor. d. Measurement of the work of cable for calculation of services portion will be taken equal to the length cable on pole (as measured in the Roadometer) and not the total length of the cable laid through pole. e. Measurement Book (MB) The Contractor shall also maintain a Measurement Book for each Mandal/District. This will be maintained as compilation of copies of the measurement sheets verified by PMA. This book is one of the primary records to be maintained by the Contractor carrying out the work during the course of execution of works. The Contractor shall remove all the defects pointed out by PMA in the Measurement Sheet. The PMA / Contractor or their authorized representatives shall also be at liberty to note their difficulties etc. in these 205 sheets. The hard-bounded measurement sheets shall invariably be consulted at the time of making final payments to the PMA / Contractor. 2. Procedure for preparation, processing and payment of bill for works i. ii. 3. For claiming the payment on successful completion of the milestones defined in payments Section, the Contractor shall prepare the bill along with Mandal wise testing and acceptance document of all the works and submit the same to PMA. The final bill shall be prepared as per measurements of all items involved in execution of complete route. The PMA scrutinize the final bill against the works entrusted and accord necessary certificates stating that the work has been executed satisfactorily in accordance with Specification and terms and condition of the contract. The PMA shall verify the quantities of items of work done by Contractor with reference to measurement recorded in the measurement sheet and Acceptance Testing procedure as defined in this Clause shall be followed. a. The PMA verify and submit the bills (for work carried out by Contractor in Mandal which is accepted by PMA) provided by Contractor along with all self-certifications, test reports and measurement records to the Authority. b. The Authority shall release the payment to Contractor accordingly based on certificates received from PMA. c. PMA shall submit its report to the Authority, however the payment shall be made as per payment schedule. The Authority shall exercise the prescribed checks on the bills provided by PMA and make payments. Procedure for Payment for Sub-Standard Works The Contractor is required to execute all works satisfactorily and in accordance with the Specification. If certain items of work are executed with unsound, imperfect or unskilled workmanship or with materials of any inferior description or that any materials or articles provided by him for execution of work or unsound or of a quality inferior to that contracted for or otherwise not in accordance with the contract (referred to as substandard work hereinafter), the Authority shall make a demand in writing specifying the work, materials or articles about which there is a complaint. 4. Timely Action by PMA a. Timely reporting and action, to a great extent, can prevent occurrence of sub-standard work, which will be difficult or impossible to rectify later on. It is incumbent on the part of PMA for supervision of work to point out the defects in work in time during progress of the work. The PMA responsible for supervision of work shall without any loss of time submit a report of occurrence of any sub-standard work to the Authority besides making an entry in the site order book. A notice in respect of defective work shall be given to the Contractor in writing during the progress of work asking the Contractor to rectify/replace/remove the sub-standard item of work and also definite time period within which such rectification/removal/replacement has to be done. After expiry of the notice period, if the Contractor fails to rectify/ replace/ remove the sub-standard items, the defects shall be rectified/replaced/removed by the Authority, at its sole discretion, through some other agency at the risk and cost of the Contractor. 206 b. Non-reporting of the sub-standard work in time on the part of PMA shall not in any way entitle the Contractor to claim that the defects were not pointed out during execution and as such the Contractor cannot be absolved of the responsibility for sub-standard work and associated liabilities. 5. Quality Control of Works i. The importance of quality of Fiber optic cable splicing works cannot be over-emphasized. The quality and availability of long distance media and efficiency of the reliable media connectivity between terminal equipment depends upon quality of optic fiber cable plant. The quality of fiber optic cable plant depends upon the quality of individual items of work involved viz. laying, Protection, Jointing of cables and Terminations in equipment room and also on documentation of cable network. The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with Specifications laid down to achieve the requisite quality aim. ii. The Authority shall be the final judge of the quality of the work and the satisfaction of the Authority in respect thereof set forth in the contract document. Laxity or failure to enforce compliance with the contract documents by the Authority and/ or its representative shall not manifest a change or intent of waiver, the intention being that, notwithstanding the same, the Contractor shall be and remain responsible for complete and proper compliance with the contract documents and the Specification there in. The representative of the Authority has the right to prohibit the use of men and any tools, materials and equipment which, in his opinion, do not produce the required work or performance meet the requirement of the contract documents. iii. It is imperative that the Contractor is fully conversant with the construction practices and shall be fully equipped to carry out the work in accordance with the Specifications. The Contractor is expected and bound to ensure quality in construction works in accordance with Specifications laid down. The Contractor shall engage adequate and experienced supervisors to ensure that work is carried out as per Specifications and with due diligence and in a professional manner. A two stage testing process will be incorporated as follows: a. The first level of testing shall be carried out the Contractor. Once the Contractor is confirmed about the quality assurance of their work and material then they will hand it over to PMA for review and testing. . b. The PMA testing teams shall carry out the second level of testing. iv. In addition to Acceptance Testing being carried out by PMA, all works at all times shall be open to inspection of the Authority. The Contractor shall be bound, if called upon to do so, to offer the works for inspection without any extra payment. The presence of monitoring teams nominated by the Authority during construction shall not preclude separate acceptance testing teams to recheck adherence to all aspects as mentioned in the contract. 6. Quality Control of material supplied by Contractor PMA has to ascertain that all the material being supplied by Contractor for Works being carried out are in compliance with the required standard and quality and as per Quality Assurance Plan. Any instance of violation by Contractor shall be immediately reported to the Authority by PMA. 7. Support Services: 207 The Contractor shall ensure the availability of service, spare and expansion parts for the supplied equipment for a minimum period of 7 years from Operational Acceptance by the Authority or 7 years from the date of withdrawal from production whichever is earlier. However, the termination of production shall not occur prior to operational acceptance by the Authority. For Fiber cable the same need to be available for 20 years. 8. Inspection and Testing i. All materials furnished and all work performed under this Contract shall be inspected and tested. The Contractor shall furnish all manpower and materials for tests, including testing facilities, power and instrumentation, and replacement of damaged parts. The costs shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the contract price. ii. The entire cost of testing for factory & site acceptance, routine tests, production tests and other test during manufacture & site activities specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of materials, except for the expenses of the Authority representative. iii. Prior notice of at least 15 days should be given to PMA by Contractor for making the representative of PMA available for observing the factory tests. Any cost of pertaining to making available the PMA representative at the necessary site shall be solely borne by PMA and non-chargeable to the Authority. iv. All tests conducted by Contractor must be verified by PMA. v. Should any inspections or tests indicate that specific item does not meet Specification requirements; the appropriate items shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by the Contractor as necessary and as applicable to correct the noted deficiencies at no cost to the Authority. After correction of a deficiency, all necessary retests shall be performed to verify the effectiveness of the corrective action. vi. Deliveries shall not be shipped until all required inspections and tests have been completed and all deficiencies have been corrected to comply with this specification and approved for shipment by the Authority. vii. Acceptance or waiver of tests will not relieve the Contractor from the responsibilities to furnish material and works in accordance with the specifications and to the Authority’s satisfaction. viii. Unless otherwise specified in this Contract, selection of test samples, numbers of specimens and acceptance of results shall be in accordance with the terms of the relevant Standards and Codes. Where no terms exist, the Client is to instruct details in advance of the inspection and tests in response to the request of the Contractor. ix. Contractor shall comply with various instructions / guidelines issued by Authority relating to testing and acceptance of the deliverables of the contractor. 9. Optical Fiber Identification i. Individual optical fibers within the fiber unit and fiber units shall be identifiable in accordance with EIA/TIA 598 or IEC 60304 or Bellcore GR-20 colour coding scheme. The actual colouring scheme shall be mentioned by the Contractor in Data Requirement Sheet and the same shall be finalized during the detailed engineering in consultation with the Authority. 208 ii. Colouring utilized for colour coding optical fiber shall be integrated into the fiber coating and shall be homogenous. The colour shall not bleed from one fiber to another and shall not fade during fiber preparation for termination of splicing. Each fiber cable shall have traceability of each fiber back to the original fiber manufacturer’s fiber number ad parameters of the fiber. 10. i. Testing Methodology Acceptance Tests a. The works shall be deemed to have been completed only after the same has been accepted by PMA as per the process mentioned in this tender and after it has been informed by PMA to the Authority confirming the completion of work. The various testing will be undertaken by Contractor in the presence of PMA. Contractor may conduct its own test prior for self-assessment before asking for tests to be conducted in the presence of PMA. Certificate will be issued by PMA representative after successful completion of testing (for each milestone). b. The Contractor, after having satisfied himself of completion of work, from FDMS/OLT at connecting POP end to FTB at Mandal end, shall offer the work to PMA for conducting Testing. The work shall be offered for Inspection as soon as link to Mandal is complete. Scope of Acceptance Testing in next clause. c. If the measurements (of length of OFC laid) taken by PMA are found to be lesser than the measurements recorded by the Contractor responsible for recording the measurements, the measurement taken by PMA shall prevail without prejudice to any punitive action against the Contractor as per provisions of the contract and the testing officer of Contractor recording the measurements. d. The Contractor shall be obligated to remove defects/deficiencies pointed out by the PMA without any additional cost. The Authority does not take any responsibility of return of defective used items / items previously accepted by Contractor. e. Factory Acceptance Test: Factory Acceptance Tests shall be conducted as per relevant Standards and Codes on randomly selected final assemblies of selected equipment to be supplied. These tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Authority’s authorized representatives unless waiver for witnessing by the Authority is intimated to the Contractor. Factory acceptance testing shall be carried out on ADSS, FODP, Splice enclosure, Approach cable, Test Equipment, installation accessories and all other items to be supplied unless factory testing and inspection has been waived off by the Authority. Equipment shall not be shipped to the Authority until required factory tests are completed satisfactorily, all variances are resolved, and the Authority has issued Dispatch Clearance, which may be issued after completion of FAT by the Authority or his authorized representatives deputed for carrying out the FAT. Successful completion of the factory tests and the Authority approval to ship shall in no way constitute final acceptance of the system or any portion thereof. The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) shall demonstrate the Technical characteristics of the Fiber Optic cable & associated accessories in relation to this specifications and approved drawings and documents. The list of factory acceptance tests shall be supplemented by the Contractor's standard FAT testing program. In general the FAT for other items shall include at least: Physical verification, demonstration of Technical characteristics, various operational modes, functional interfaces, alarms and diagnostics etc. For Test equipment, FAT shall include supply of proper calibration certificates, demonstration of satisfactory. 209 There shall be no factory splice allowed within a continuous length of cable. Only one continuous cable length shall be provided on each drum. The lengths of the cable to be supplied on each drum shall be determined by a “cable drum schedule” prepared by the Contractor after the survey duly taking into account sag, splicing, wastage, unequal heights etc. of the line route. f. Scope of Acceptance Testing: It is essential to verify the integrity and the capability of the Optical Fiber Cable and to assess its readiness for intended services. This scope defines the methodology for cable and accessories. The purpose of acceptance and testing is to verify integrity of measurement and quality of work done. ii. Fiber Optic cable link testing: a. Fiber continuity and link attenuation (Bi-directional) between FODP connectors at two ends for each fiber at 1310 and 1550 nm by OTDR b. Fiber continuity and link attenuation (Bi-directional) between FODP connectors at two ends for each fiber at 1310 and 1550 nm by Power meter & Laser source c. Average fiber attenuation and average splice loss in the link including FODP d. Proper termination and labelling of fiber and fiber optic cables at FODP e. Data loss test and ensuring that the same is within the acceptable limits iii. Termination arrangement at PoP location: The fibers of the cable shall be spliced to the pigtails for connection to the optical line systems. Pigtails shall be duly terminated at the FDMS (fiber distribution management system). iv. Field Acceptance Test. a. The field installation test shall be performed for all equipment at each location. If any equipment has been damaged or for any reason does not comply with this Specification, the Contractor shall provide and install replacement parts at its own cost and expense b. As per Technical requirements, the Acceptance Test is required to be carried out for all 24 Fibers in each cable section, and the Authority Acceptance Test schedule is to be followed for proper testing of the OF cable network c. The OF cable sections shall be identified on ABDs attached with the Acceptance Test Report and in the GIS tool. d. Testing shall be done in each OF cable section in one direction only and for two wavelengths viz. 1310 nm and 1550 nm using power meter and source. OTDR traces would be obtained for each OF Cable sections to measure and record the splice loss wherever applicable. e. A minimum length of 2.0 km shall be maintained for all the ADSS cable between splices except as directed by the Client for any intermediate T-offs v. End to End Testing of Optical Fiber Cable Route from PoP to PoP This document defines the procedure to be adopted for end to end testing of the OF cable route from POP to POPs. 210 a. The End to End testing from POP to POP shall be carried out using Power meter/source and with OTDR after splicing OF cable. b. The average attenuation (dB/Km) for cable shall be recorded c. End to end Testing shall be done in one direction only for the two wavelengths i.e. 1310 nm & 1550 nm from POP to POP side using Power meter and source. The Fiber connected to each port of the OTN shall also be tested using the OTDR and the traces obtained shall be recorded for future reference. d. The Contractor entrusted with the task of for laying the incremental OF cable shall be responsible for co-ordination for conducting this test. e. After carrying out this test, the respective POP shall be detected in the NMS by the central NOC team of the Authority and shown as active at the Authority NOC. The Authority shall publish the list of Mandals in each district which have gone active. f. The format for End to End Testing of Cable Route is provided in this RFP. 11. ADSS Fiber Link Length The estimated ADSS optical fiber lengths for various feeder lengths from one terminal point (FODP) to the other are given in the respective price schedules. However, the Contractor shall supply and install the optical fiber cable as required based on actual work requirements finalized after detailed site survey carried out by the Contractor during the project execution. The payment will be based on actual quantities of work carried out by the Contractor, as per the measurement criterion set forth in these specifications. 12. Commissioning Certificate i. Contractor shall be eligible to apply for Commissioning Certificate of a Mandal after successful completion of End to End testing of a Mandal. ii. The End to End Testing Report has to be submitted for obtaining the Commissioning Certificate. iii. The Authority, without any prejudice, reserves the right to carry out any kind of inspection of the works being carried out by PMA and Contractor at any time to ascertain its quantity and quality. iv. Testing will also be done for NOC, Cable TV Head End, OSS and BSS, NMS, cloud services and all other components supplied by the contractor as per the guidelines issued by the authority in this regard from time to time. 13. i. Final Completion Certificate Only upon completion of all Works as required to be done by Contractor for a given district, Contractor shall be given the Final Completion Certificate for that district by the Authority. 211 Annexure VII Verification & Measurement of Work Done OFC Testing & Certification Formats Test Format 1: Physical Inspection of ADSS OFC & Accessories S. No. Name of Items 1 24 Core Optical Fiber Cable 2 FDMS 3 FDB 4 Any other items Quantities (or Length) Installed / Used (Verified as per Physical Inspection) Observations Remarks Accessories: Length: Sag: Routing & Tagging of fibres Routing & Tagging of Fibres Test Format 2: Report for Splices on an ADSS Fiber Cable Section Section Identity/No. :_________ Section Length :_________ Kms Splice No. :_________ Splice Loss (dB) Tube Colour Fiber Colour Fiber Number 1310 nm 1550 nm 1 2 3 4 To 21 22 23 24 Name, Signature & Seal of the Authority Official Date: (Accepted / Rejected) Name, Signature & Seal of PMA Official Date: 212 Remarks, if any: Note: Splice Loss Measurement using OTDR 1. The fiber under test is connected to the OTDR which directly displays the splice loss after suitably adjusting the markers. The observations shall be recorded for both the windows i.e. 1310 nm and 1550 nm. 2. For the splice(s) within the ADSS Fiber Cable section (in cases where the ADSS Fiber Cable section is more than 2 Kms in length) the splice loss shall be measured for all the 24 fibers. The splice no. shall be counted from POP side towards the nearest POPs. The test results shall be recorded in the format given in Form 3 of the Formats for the Test Report. 3. Specification: Max Splice Loss 0.05 dB for one fiber per splice for straight/branch joints. Test Format 3: Attenuation Test for ADSS Fiber Cable Section in the POP using Power Meter (for each fiber) Section Identity/No :__________ Section Length :__________ Kms Transmit Power (PTx) :__________ dB Testing at 1310 nm Fiber No. Testing at 1550 nm Level at Rec. End Loss (in dB) Attenuation per KM (dB/Km) Level at Rec. End Loss (in dB) Attenuation per KM (dB/Km) (PRx) (A=PTx-PRx) (A/section length) (PRx) (A=PTx-PRx) (A/section length) 1 2 TO 23 24 Name, Signature & Seal of the Authority’s Official Date: (Accepted / Rejected) Name, Signature & Seal of PMA Official Date: Remarks, if any: Note: a. Carry out total section attenuation loss as mentioned in table above. b. All the cables should meet the standard for both the wavelength i.e.1310 nm and 1550 nm as per specification given above i.e. less than 0.43 dB/Km for 1310 nm and 0.30 dB/km.for1550 nm. c. Connect standard optical source with 1310 nm and 1550 nm at particular level (say P1 dBm.) at one end of the fiber. Measure with power meter the power at the other End of the fiber (say P2 dBm.) Thus, attenuation of the fiber = (P1 - P2) dB. 213 d. Specifications i. At l310nm Total Link Loss ≤ 0.36 dB/km x Section Length + (0.05 dB/Splice) x (No. of Splices) + 0.5 dB x No. of Connectors + splitter loss ii. At l550nm Total Link Loss ≤ 0.21dB/km x Section Length + (0.05 dB/Splice) x (No. of Splices) + 0.5 dB x No. of Connectors e. All the 24 Fibers of the ADSS Fiber Cable shall be tested with the pigtail spliced to each fiber one by one for taking the test readings as per the table below. f. Attenuation test shall also be taken with OTDR at 1550nm and 1310nm and printout for each fiber for each window shall be obtained. Preparation of OTDR Traces Report a. This method uses an optical time-domain reflectometer (OTDR). Unlike a Power Meter, the OTDR can identify and locate the position of each component in the network. The OTDR will reveal splice loss, connector loss and reflectance, and the total end to end loss. b. For End-to-End measurements including joint enclosures must be carried out to document the characterization of the joint loss and the total link loss. The OTDR measurement must be conducted upstream (i.e., from the OLT to POP). c. Carry out OTDR measurements and take traces taken on all wavelengths (1310 nm / 1550 nm).Soft copy of this report needs to made available for updating in Test reports Electronics & Network Equipment testing & certification The PMA will work in-line with the agreed execution schedule during the installation of Electronics & Network Equipment at the field level. The PMA needs to test and certify the each location where electronics and network equipment is installed for its operations and acceptance. Note: Necessary testing equipment required to meet standards compliance will be provided by the contractor. After completion of the testing for each site PMA need to submit the report in prescribed format to the Authority’s central team. PMA will use the equipment to validate the reports submitted by the Contractor. 214 Electronics & Network Equipment Testing & Certification Format Test Format 4: Field Acceptance Test for POP Name of District: Name of Mandal: PoP Name: Latitude & Longitude: Test Requirements: Cable Attenuation per km (dB) Total Physical Cable Length (km) Splice Loss Mean Value (dB) Total Number of Splices Maximum Connectors Loss (dB) Total Number of Connectors Total Section Loss (dB) 1310 nm 1550 nm Test Period: From _______________ to ___________________ Total Route Length of ADSS Fiber Cable laid from POP to POP: ________________ Kms Total ADSS Fiber Cable length tested: ________________ Kms No. of Straight Joints: ______________ No. of Branch Joints: ______________ No. of FDBs: __________________ Name, Signature & Seal of the Authority’s Official Date: (Accepted / Rejected) Name, Signature & Seal of PMA Official Date: Remarks, if any: 215 NOC & Point of Presence (PoP) Testing & Certification PMA will work in-line with the agreed execution schedule during the set-up, installation and commissioning of Network Operations Centre and Points of Presence. The PMA needs to test and certify commissioning the each PoP and the centralized NOC including other components as mentioned in contractor RFP like OSS, BSS, NMS, Cable TV Head end and other components. NOC & PoP Testing & Certification Format Test Format 5: End to End Testing of Route From PoP to PoP 1. The End to End testing from POP to POP shall be carried out using Power meter/source and with OTDR after splicing Optical Fiber Cable. 2. The average attenuation (dB/Km) for cable shall be recorded in the given format: a. Tested Length : ________ Km b. Total loss on the length : ________ dB c. Average Attenuation per Km. : ________ dB/Km d. Fiber length used : ________ Km e. Net loss for Fiber at FDMS : ________ dB 3. End to end Testing shall be done in one direction only for the two wavelengths i.e. 1310 nm & 1550 nm from POP to POP side using Power meter and source. The Fiber connected to each port of the OTN shall also be tested using the OTDR and the traces obtained shall be recorded for future reference. 4. The Implementing Agency entrusted with the task of for laying the Optical Fiber Cable shall be responsible for co-ordination for conducting this test. 5. After carrying out this test, the respective POP shall be detected in the NMS by the central NOC team of the Authority and shown as active at the Authority NOC. The Authority shall publish the list of Mandals and Substations in each district which have gone active. Test Format 6: End to End Testing of Route from PoP to OLT 1. The End to End testing of the ADSS Fiber Cable route from the POP to OLT shall be done by measuring the receive power at each POP location using the power meter and source. Thus total attenuation would be recorded. 2. The attenuation shall be tested from POP to each FDB at POP in one direction only for two wavelengths 1310 nm and 1550 nm. 3. The tests shall be carried on the fiber connected to each of utilized ports. 4. The test results shall be recorded in the format given in the following table. Separate sheet shall be prepared for each port. 5. Specifications: The total attenuation from POP to POP at each location should be well within the available power budget for GPON equipment which is 28 dB. The max value should be about 25 dB. 6. The fiber connected to each port shall also be tested using the OTDR and the traces obtained shall be recorded for future reference. 216 Test Format 7: NOC Active Components Test S. No Description Section 1 A B C PMA Remarks Acceptance Tests After completion of the installation work, the complete system shall be tested for H/Ware and S/Ware functions and features. Contractor’s engineers, under the supervision and guidance of the Contractor’s experts will carry out this work. Thereafter, the Contractor, along with the representative nominated by the Authority, shall carry out the Acceptance tests to prove performance of the different equipment, sub-system, and the overall installation to the entire satisfaction of the Authority. The Contractor shall submit sufficiently in advance before the start of the acceptance tests, a list of all the acceptance test and procedures, it proposes to conduct to demonstrate that the system satisfies all the requirements of the specifications. The Authority shall have the right to propose modifications or additions to tests or measuring techniques before commencements of tests. As a part of the acceptance tests, it shall be checked that: All documentation should be supplied & fully updated. All hardware and software items are in perfect working order at the time of taking over. Acceptance tests, including stability test as defined will have to be completed to the full satisfaction of the Authority. All the network elements & route shall be brought in the NMS with complete testing of FCAPS functionality. Section-2 A B Testing of Technical Specification & Equipment Configuration System Requirement. The DWDM equipment shall allow multiple wavelengths to be added or dropped from each of the terminal stations The interfaces are to be G.709 compliant. The DWDM system should have the OTN compliant interfaces & Client interfaces like SDH/SONET Mandatory laser shutdown shall be implemented in case of fiber break. Optical supervisory channel (OSC): Testing of Link Margin / Route –Span Design 217 The proposed DWDM system should be capable of supporting C D Minimum no. of regenerators required in a link. Maximum no. of spans supported without regeneration in a link. If lesser no. of regenerators are required then the Contractor may propose the no. of regenerators The link engineering calculations along with link margins If the system permits All the link margin calculations shall be done based on EOL of electronics. Testing of Mandatory design parameters: Return Loss shall be at least 40 dB 4dB end to end OSNR margin Per span margin shall be more than or equal to 4 dB Auto shut down of laser & power amplifier System should support Automatic Level control, Automatic Gain control, and Automatic equalization of the links for per channel addition/deletion. NMS capability testing Regarding NMS functionality the performance management capability to be available on per channel basis in addition to line side. Alarms: Derived Power supply failure alarm Loss of input at Optical Add/Drop multiplex equipment Input channel failure Optical Add/Drop multiplex equipment. Hardware mismatch alarm Loss of Supervisory Channel End-to-End Network Testing & Certification The PMA will work in-line with the agreed execution schedule and needs to test and certify commissioning End-toEnd Network Operations for the AP Fiber Grid Project Phase I. This will require testing of all installed infrastructure, hardware and software of the project, Standard Operating Procedures for NOC, Processes for Network Management, Service Provisioning & Monitoring. The End-to-End Network testing will be required to be done in phases along the commissioning of the districts. 218 Annexure VIII Project Timelines, SLA and Penalties Timelines for Implementation 1. Contractor shall carry out due diligence and prepare an implementation plan for its package. It has to predetermine which Mandals are to be covered in which Quarter of the implementation period. 2. The implementation plan shall be verified by PMA and submitted to the Authority for approval. 3. The implementation plan shall have minimum periodic targets as mentioned in the table below. 4. Contractor has to carry out the execution of the project as per the implementation plan. 5. The plan should follow a general pattern of implementation as given below: S. No. Project Deliverable / Milestone Timelines (D + n) in Calendar Weeks 1 Team Mobilization & Project Inception Report 2 Route Survey & Network Validation 3 Commissioning of Network Operating Centre, Headend and all other components of NOC D + 16 Commissioning in the ‘first’ 2 identified Districts (at least 95% PoPs) and providing service to the first customer D + 18 5 Commissioning in ‘additional’ 5 identified Districts (at least 95% PoPs) D + 26 6 Commissioning in the remaining 6 Districts (at least 95% PoPs) D + 34 4 7 Commissioning of all balance PoPs in the State 8 Completion of all left over works & Project Go-Live D+2 D+4 D + 37 D + 39 SLA & Penalties during Operations Phase and also during Phase Commissioning Period (for the sites that are commissioned) 1. 2. 3. 4. For the purpose of these calculations the route shall be defined as the section of fiber as unique identifiable route. In case of route failure due to cable cut/damage when the services are disrupted /not available for a period up to 8 Hours, the fault(s) shall be treated as Severity Level 1. In such cases, if fault is restored within 8 hours there shall be no penalty. In case the fault restoration time extends beyond 8 hours up to 10 hours, the fault shall be treated as Severity Level 2. In case the fault restoration time extends beyond 10 hours, the fault shall be treated as Severity Level 3. 219 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. In case the fault restoration time extends beyond 1 week, the fault shall be treated as Severity Level 4. The penalty for each of these Levels shall be as tabulated below. In case there is/are additional fault(s) on the route which are yet to be repaired, the already existing severity level shall be maintained and the severity shall be further raised depending upon the restoration time of the latest fault beginning with the earliest fault since the downtime of the services is in concurrent Partial restoration of fault resulting in deteriorated functioning of the system shall not be treated as a repaired fault under any circumstances and the down time till the proper restoration of fault shall be counted in full. In cases where the fault is restored by replacing the faulty FDMS unit/connectors or by shifting of working ports to spare port in order to expeditiously restore the services, the fault would continue to be treated in Severity Level 4 till such time as the faulty unit/port is rectified. However if the Technical parameters/arrangement provided in the alternate solution are acceptable to the Authority the fault would not be raised to Severity Level 4 The decision regarding acceptance of the alternate solution shall be at the sole discretion of the Authority. The penalties to be imposed for the restoration of different severity levels of faults are defined below: Severity Level Level 1 Level 2 10. MTTR Up to 8 Hours 8 Hours to 10 Hours Penalty Nil INR 10000 per route fault Level 3 Beyond 10 Hours Level 4 Beyond 1 week Additional INR 4000 per Hour subject to maximum of INR 15000 per fault per route fault Additional INR 1000 per day or part thereof subject to maximum of INR 50000 per fault per route. Any other concurrent fault on the same route to be treated as separate fault. Fiber cuts per 1000 KM/month KPI Value 10 11 12 13 and above 11. Percentage of non-compliance to approved network changes as per process KPI Value 2 3 4 5 and above 12. Penalty Nil INR 2000 per cut Additional INR 500 per cut Additional INR 1000 per cut Penalty Nil INR 2000 per instance Additional INR 500 per instance Additional INR 1000 per instance Link Margin Values degradation in ring topology of DWDM network on monthly basis. KPI Value 4 db Penalty Nil 220 3 db 2 db 0 db and Below 13. INR 2000 per db INR 10000 per db INR 25000 per db Percentage of non-compliance to approved uptime for NOC including CATV Headend Value on monthly basis 99% Below 98% Below 97% Below 96% 14. Penalty Nil INR 100000 per instance INR 250000 per instance INR 500000 per instance Percentage of non-compliance to approved network uptime for each POPs Value on monthly basis Below 98% Below 97% Below 96% 95% and Below 15. Penalty Nil INR 10000 per instance INR 25000 per instance INR 50000 per instance The penalties to be imposed for the restoration of different severity levels of faults for IT and Non IT electronic equipments and MTTR prescribed below shall be inclusive of commuting time and time taken for replacement of faulty OF cable etc. Severity Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 MTTR Upto 8 hrs 8 – 10 hrs Penalty for each equipment Nil INR 5,000/- per fault Additional INR 500 per hour subject to maximum of INR 15,000 Beyond 10 hrs per fault Additional INR 1000 per day or part thereof subject to maximum Beyond 1 week of INR 25000 per fault per any other concurrent fault on the same route to be treated as separate fault Note: 1. Bidder needs to include the requisite licenses of monitoring tool for automatic monitoring of all SLAs. 2. All the operational SLAs are measured on weekly & monthly basis. The penalties will be levied on monthly basis and will be deducted from the payment due to the contractor. 221 16. Other SLA Provisions / Additional Service Levels that need to be complied with by the Contractor during the entire contract duration of the Project A. Other Service Levels 1: AP Fiber grid’s core network requirements are based on needs of advanced uses like IoT, telemedicine, telepresence, precision agriculture, smart power grids, 3G and LTE. These requirements are measured endto-end from SHQ (not including the SHQ routers for routing to external traffic) down to the GPON port (not including customer CPE): a) Packet Loss: 0.1% for GPON to SHQ and for any GPON to any GPON. b) End to end latency (from both SHQ to GPON and any GPON to any GPON) less than 4 ms for any GPON pair or any GPON to SHQ plus transmission latency of 5ms/ 1000km which shall be computed using the shortest GIS path on the network for the given pair of nodes. c) Jitter less than 1.5 ms and must also meet TEC GR requirements. d) Timing and phase requirements from any GPON to any GPON to match or exceed LTE and Next Generation Mobile Network requirements. All GPONs must have capability to provide LTE circuits to the nearest cell towers or other such needs These requirements are for 3-Sigma of the time periods measured and apply for any GPON to any GPON and any GPON to any SHQ node measured for all GPONs. The measured time periods are 1 hr, 1 day and last 7 days in 15 minute increments, except for nodes where the total traffic across the node or pair of nodes in question exceeds the total rated traffic. In such a case reasons or error codes must be clearly documented and reported in the dashboard in realtime subject to stated reporting delays. Note, dynamic traffic spikes and changes shall not be a valid reason for SLA failure unless the spikes exceed total rated physical capacity of the equipment(s) in question as specified at bid time. And when such spikes do happen, the SLA failure is expected to last no more than 500s longer than after the spike falling below rated traffic including the estimated time needed to flush backlog of dropped packets. To aid monitoring and management of the above SLA, contractor must provide the rated capacity of each network element which shall meet the criteria in the SLA as defined above and elsewhere. If the “rated” capacity is less than 90% of the advertized capacity (e.g. as understood in the industry for that equipment, standard and link type), an analysis and explanation shall be provided. The above assumes an architecture of a dual NOC SHQ, a set of DHQs in one or more rings, a set of ZHQs in rings connected to at least one DHQ, a set of MHQs in either existing rings or new rings connected to ZHQ(s) or direct single line (can be shared) spurs from one of the existing nodes on one of the aforementioned rings. And finally GPONs on one of these nodes or connected to one of the MHQs again on a spur (point to point or shared). In addition to these, the following is the maximum allowable latency on any piece of equipment. The requirement for each layer applies if the equipment supports these layers ● Layer 1 switching: 10 micro-seconds ● Layer 2, 2.5, 3 switching: 330 micro-seconds This SLA remains in force for any expansion (i.e. add, delete, change) of the network. It is the responsibility of the maintenance and management team to ensure all proposed expansion complies with this SLA before undertaking such expansion 222 Failure to meet any of the criteria ( other Service Levels A) shall be considered a significant SLA violation with penalties of INR 10 lakhs per day for every day of violation across the network. Maximum penalty for any / all of the above violations will be INR 10 lakhs per day. B. Other Requirements: Note, the contractor must supply these numbers per equipment and show calculations of how these requirements will be achieved as part of its technical proposal and in addition: 1. Demonstrate the same in test conditions with 100% rated traffic conditions as part of equipment acceptance time. Equipment or installation fees shall be withheld until these results are reported both for supplied and installed equipment. 2. For each unique configuration of each network element and combination, do complete testing using RFC 2544 and other RFCs to test the above parameters and where possible follow TEC guidelines and provide these test results before installing said equipment and configuration. 3. On installation, do end-to-end testing at rated capacity for several of the worst pairs of consumer nodes (GPONs). Indicative nodes shall be proposed by the bidder and several others may be added by the TEC at any time before or after the tests subject to total node pairs tested being less than 200 where at most 50 are proposed by the bidder. 4. Log the above parameters at each equipment and node, and report the same in 15 minute intervals at least with this data displayed at an aggregated level at the state, district, ZHQ, MHQ, PHQ level in 1 hr, 1 day and moving 1 week graphs These criteria subject to less than rated IP + bulk bandwidth traffic (which shall also be provided as part of the bid) flowing through the relevant node. Failure to meet these criteria (B. Other Requirements) shall be considered a significant SLA violation with penalties of 10L per day for every day of violation across the network and if only for a part of the network, proportionally with a minimum of 10% of the penalty as long as no node experiences worse than 3x of this criteria on an extended basis (multiple weeks), at which point the total penalty shall apply. Note, if more than 1% of nodes experience violations or more than 0.5% on a sustained basis during the first month, all payments including installation payments shall be withheld until this is rectified and demonstrated for 3 months running. 223 Annexure IX Roles & Responsibilities of Stakeholders Project is envisaged to be executed in two stages: A) Implementation B) Operations & Maintenance The roles and responsibilities of the key stakeholders during the three phases are detailed in the Responsibility Matrix below: Responsibility Matrix Legend Primary Entity with primary responsibility for an activity is expected to drive the activity and ensure successful completion Secondary Entity with secondary responsibility for an activity is expected to provide support to the primary owner Project Stage: Planning Stakeholder’s Role Activities The Authority Contractor PMA Approvals and Authorizations Securing Right Of Way (ROW) permissions through State Electricity MOU agreements Securing permissions for access to Mandal and other offices Implementation Schedule Primary Primary Submission of preliminary implementation schedule Implementation Plan collation from Contractor Information Sharing Designating a PMA Nodal officer for each District Designate one senior Contractor official to coordinate with the corporate office of the Authority Designate one senior PMA official to coordinate with the corporate office of the Authority Publishing acceptance, testing Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary 224 Stakeholder’s Role Activities and sign off procedures Publishing guidelines for maintenance of Contractor warehouse records Publishing of templates, checklists, data submission formats Project Management Setup Commissioning of Project Management Tool Training on usage of project management tool Entry of detailed survey data in Project management tool Publishing procedures, guidelines, checklists and report formats Training Publish training schedules Implementation procedure training to Contractor and PMA The Authority Contractor PMA Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Primary 225 Secondary Project Stage: Implementation Stakeholder’s Role Activities The Authority Site Access and Verification Coordination with local authorities for access to site Secondary locations (Mandal, Substation sites etc.) Site level verification of Route Survey Initiate requests for deviation from routes survey and engineering guidelines First level verification and approval of deviations from engineering guidelines and route survey Final approval on deviations from engineering guidelines Primary and route survey Site level coordination and verification of Mandal equipment availability at Mandal Electricity connection and coordination for subsequent bill payment during implementation phase Coordination for payment of Mandal electricity bills during implementation phase Resolution of discrepancies with respect to readiness of sites for equipment installation. Procurement Procurement of OFC, Equipments and accessories Provisioning of testing tools (PON OTDR, Roadometer, Power meter etc.) for field acceptance testing and end-toend testing Material Delivery OFC, Equipments and accessories delivery at designated warehouses Ensuring collection and replacement of fault material Contractor Primary 226 PMA Secondary Primary Primary Secondary Secondary Primary Secondary Secondary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Activities Stakeholder’s Role The Authority at Contractor warehouse is completed by the supplier Delivery of Mandal and Substation equipment at site location Installation of equipment at site location Maintaining Contractor warehouse records as per agreed procedures Transport of OFC, Electronics and other accessories to site location Storing material at site Laying of OFC on Pole Splicing of OFC and installation of joint enclosures Preparation of ABD’s with GIS co-ordinates of the entire route Capturing and Uploading GIS data of the entire route in the GIS tool Verification of GIS data uploaded by Contractor in the GIS tool Conducting tests as per Field Acceptance Test Procedures for OFC laid Provisioning of equipment for photography Take site images at designated locations and images of the testing procedures carried out Approval of material supplied by Contractor as per Engineering guidelines Approval of Field Acceptance Test Reports Procurement, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and acceptance of equipment Conducting End-to-End Test as per Test Procedures Approval of End-to-End Test Reports Request for Commissioning certificate Contractor PMA Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary 227 Secondary Activities Issuance of Commissioning certificate Request for Final Completion certificate Issuance of Final Completion certificate Regular update of project progress on project management tool as well as sharing with relevant officials as per laid down procedures Upkeep and safety of material till commissioning Request approval for deviations from specified standards and engineering guidelines First level verification of deviations from specified standards and engineering guidelines Final approval of deviations from specified standards and engineering guidelines Request approval for variation from Contractor Schedule Request approval for variation from PMA Schedule Approve requests for variation from implementation schedule Stakeholder’s Role The Authority Contractor PMA Primary Primary Primary (for Contractor Deliverables) Primary (for PMA Deliverables) Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Update of actuals against the planned estimates (for schedule, material, sites status etc.) Communicate updated schedule to all stakeholders Secondary Primary Primary Contractor Warehouse Audit Publish warehouse audit schedule Sharing of warehouse audit schedule with Contractor Timely sharing of warehouse records Ensuring access to warehouse as per agreed schedule Ensuring availability of relevant warehouse records Primary Primary 228 Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Activities Physical stock (Quantity and Quality) reconciliation with warehouse records Invoice and Payment Submission of Contractor invoices with all relevant test reports Verification of Contractor work and approval of invoices and relevant test reports submitted by Contractor Final Verification of document submitted by Contractor and certification by PMA Approval of Contractor invoices and release of payment Submission of PMA invoices Verification of MONITORING AGENCY invoices Approval of PMA invoices and release of payment Monitoring of implementation, calculation of LD and penalties etc. Imposition of LD and Penalty on the net payment to Contractor and PMA respectively Prepare Monthly Progress Report for work done in the respective work package and submit to PMA & the Authority. Review Monthly Progress Report submitted by Contractor for work done in the respective work package and submit to the Authority Stakeholder’s Role The Authority Contractor PMA Secondary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Secondary Primary Project Stage: Maintenance Stakeholder’s Role Activities The Authority Maintenance Requirements Centralized monitoring through Contractor Primary 229 Stakeholder’s Role Activities NOC/NMS Commissioning of centralized tool for fault reporting and diagnosis Formation of FRTs Route patrolling for all OF cable routes Measurement and upkeep of optical power budget parameters of both incremental cable Replace the high loss cable sections Provide sufficient maintenance infrastructure/teams as may be essential to provide services to the Authority as per the Service Level Agreement (SLA). Shifting of the existing OFC route/section Fault Repair Formation of FRTs Availability of necessary testing and splicing tools with FRTs Assigning and communicating fault incidents Fault diagnosis and reporting Carrying out repair work including replacement of material if required within the defined SLA Material procurement and warehousing Procurement of all material needed for maintenance. Storing and warehousing of material Maintaining and submission of warehouse records as per procedures Upkeep and safety of material during complete maintenance phase QA and Audit Warehouse audit Primary Maintenance Phase SLA Primary monitoring for Contractor Update of ABDs and GIS data Preparation and submission of updated site data Verification of data and updating Primary The Authority Contractor Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Secondary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary Primary 230 Stakeholder’s Role Activities The Authority repository Invoice Submission and Payment Release Submission of invoices and support documentation as per agreed payment schedule Verification of invoices and Primary support documentation Calculating SLA penalties, if Primary any. Release of quarterly O&M Primary payment Coordination Activities Coordination for electricity bill payment during maintenance phase Contractor Primary Secondary Primary x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x-x 231